Перевод: со всех языков на все языки

со всех языков на все языки

his succession to the post

  • 1 succession

    succession [sək'seʃən]
    (a) (series) succession f, suite f;
    ∎ a succession of visitors une succession ou une suite de visiteurs;
    ∎ we won three years in succession nous avons gagné trois ans de suite;
    ∎ for five years in succession pendant cinq années consécutives ou cinq ans de suite;
    ∎ she made three phone calls in succession elle a passé trois coups de fil de suite;
    ∎ they filed into the room in close succession ils sont entrés dans la pièce les uns derrière les autres;
    ∎ the fireworks went off in quick or rapid succession les feux d'artifice sont partis les uns après les autres;
    ∎ he got several promotions in rapid succession il a eu plusieurs promotions coup sur coup;
    ∎ they fired questions at him in rapid succession ils l'ont soumis à un feu roulant de questions;
    ∎ a succession of gains and losses une succession de gains et de pertes
    (b) (ascension to power) succession f;
    ∎ his succession to the post sa succession au poste;
    ∎ she's first in succession (to the throne) elle occupe la première place dans l'ordre de succession (au trône);
    ∎ at the time of his succession to the throne au moment de son accession au trône;
    ∎ in succession to her boss à la suite de son patron
    (c) Law (descendants) descendance f; (heirs) héritiers mpl

    Un panorama unique de l'anglais et du français > succession

  • 2 succession

    noun
    1) Folge, die

    four games/years etc. in succession — vier Spiele/Jahre usw. hintereinander

    in close succession — (in space) dicht hintereinander; (in time) kurz hintereinander

    2) (series) Serie, die

    a succession of losses/visitors — eine Verlust-/Besucherserie

    3) (right of succeeding to the throne etc.) Erbfolge, die

    he is second in succession — er ist Zweiter in der Erbfolge

    in succession to his uncle — als Nachfolger seines Onkels

    * * *
    [sək'seʃən]
    1) (the right of succeeding to a throne as king, to a title etc: The Princess is fifth in (order of) succession (to the throne).) die Nachfolge
    2) (a number of things following after one another: a succession of bad harvests.) die Folge
    3) (the act or process of following and taking the place of someone or something else: his succession to the throne.) die Nachfolge
    * * *
    suc·ces·sion
    [səkˈseʃən]
    1. (sequence) Folge f, Reihe f; of events, things also Serie f
    she is the latest in a \succession of girl-friends sie ist die Neuste in einer langen Reihe von Freundinnen
    an endless \succession of visitors eine endlose Folge [o Reihe] von Besuchern
    a \succession of rulers aufeinanderfolgende Herrscher
    \succession of scandals Skandalserie f, Reihe f von Skandalen
    ▪ in \succession hintereinander, nacheinander
    in close [or quick] [or rapid] \succession dicht [o kurz] hintereinander
    2. (line of inheritance) Nachfolge f, Erbfolge f
    \succession to the throne Thronfolge f
    * * *
    [sək'seSən]
    n
    1) Folge f, Serie f; (with no intervening period) (Aufeinander)folge f, Kette f

    a succession of visitors —

    in succession — nacheinander, hintereinander

    in quick or rapid succession — in rascher Folge, schnell hintereinander

    2) (to post) Nachfolge f; (to throne) Thronfolge f; (to title, estate) Erbfolge f

    in succession to sb — als jds Nachfolger(in) m(f), in jds Nachfolge (dat) (geh)

    fourth in (line of) succession to the throne — an vierter Stelle in der Thronfolge

    See:
    → academic.ru/3167/apostolic">apostolic
    * * *
    succession [səkˈseʃn] s
    1. (Aufeinander-, Reihen)Folge f:
    in succession nach-, auf-, hintereinander;
    in quick ( oder rapid) succession in rascher (Aufeinander)Folge
    2. Reihe f, Kette f, (ununterbrochene) Folge (of gen oder von):
    a succession of sunny days mehrere Sonnentage hintereinander
    3. Nach-, Erbfolge f, Sukzession f:
    in succession to George II als Nachfolger von Georg II.;
    be next in succession to sb als Nächster auf jemanden folgen;
    succession to an office Übernahme f eines Amtes, Nachfolge in einem Amt;
    succession state POL Nachfolgestaat m; → apostolic 1, intestacy, intestate A 2, Spanish A
    4. JUR
    a) Rechtsnachfolge f
    b) Erbfolge f
    c) Erbfolgeordnung f
    e) succession to Übernahme f oder Antritt m (eines Erbes);
    succession duties pl Erbschaftssteuer f (für unbewegliches Vermögen);
    5. koll
    a) Nachfolger pl
    b) Nachkommenschaft f
    c) Erben pl
    6. BIOL Abstammungsfolge f (einer Art etc)
    7. BOT Sukzession f
    * * *
    noun
    1) Folge, die

    four games/years etc. in succession — vier Spiele/Jahre usw. hintereinander

    in close succession — (in space) dicht hintereinander; (in time) kurz hintereinander

    2) (series) Serie, die

    a succession of losses/visitors — eine Verlust-/Besucherserie

    3) (right of succeeding to the throne etc.) Erbfolge, die
    * * *
    n.
    Abfolge -n f.
    Aufeinanderfolge f.
    Erbfolge -n f.
    Folge -n f.

    English-german dictionary > succession

  • 3 succession

    1) (the right of succeeding to a throne as king, to a title etc: The Princess is fifth in (order of) succession (to the throne).) sucesión
    2) (a number of things following after one another: a succession of bad harvests.) sucesión
    3) (the act or process of following and taking the place of someone or something else: his succession to the throne.) sucesión
    succession n sucesión / serie
    tr[sək'seʃən]
    ■ three months in succession tres meses seguidos, tres meses consecutivos
    3 (to post, throne) sucesión nombre femenino
    succession [sək'sɛʃən] n
    : sucesión f
    in succesion: sucesivamente
    n.
    • descendencia s.f.
    • generación s.f.
    • seguida s.f.
    • serie s.m.
    • sucesión (Matemática) s.f.
    sək'seʃən
    1)
    a) u ( act of following) sucesión f
    b) c ( series) sucesión f, serie f
    2) u (to office, rank) sucesión f

    to be first in succession to the throne — ser* el primero en la línea de sucesión al trono

    [sǝk'seʃǝn]
    1. N
    1) (=series) sucesión f, serie f

    for the third day/year in succession — por tercer día/año consecutivo

    in close or quick or rapid succession — uno tras de otro, en rápida sucesión

    2) (to a post) sucesión f

    Princess Rebecca is seventh in (line of) succession to the throne — la princesa Rebeca ocupa el séptimo puesto en la línea de sucesión a la corona

    3) (=descendants) descendencia f
    2.
    CPD

    succession duty N — derechos mpl de sucesión

    * * *
    [sək'seʃən]
    1)
    a) u ( act of following) sucesión f
    b) c ( series) sucesión f, serie f
    2) u (to office, rank) sucesión f

    to be first in succession to the throne — ser* el primero en la línea de sucesión al trono

    English-spanish dictionary > succession

  • 4 Pliny the Elder (Gaius Plinius Secundus)

    SUBJECT AREA: Metallurgy
    [br]
    b. c. 23 AD Como, Italy
    d. 25 August 79 AD near Pompeii, Italy
    [br]
    Roman encyclopedic writer on the natural world.
    [br]
    Pliny was well educated in Rome, and for ten years or so followed a military career with which he was able to combine literary work, writing especially on historical subjects. He completed his duties c. 57 AD and concentrated on writing until he resumed his official career in 69 AD with administrative duties. During this last phase he began work on his only extant work, the thirty-seven "books" of his Historia Naturalis (Natural History), each dealing with a broad subject such as astronomy, geography, mineralogy, etc. His last post was the command of the fleet based at Misenum, which came to an end when he sailed too near Vesuvius during the eruption that engulfed Pompeii and he was overcome by the fumes.
    Pliny developed an insatiable curiosity about the natural world. Unlike the Greeks, the Romans made few original contributions to scientific thought and observation, but some made careful compilations of the learning and observations of Greek scholars. The most notable and influential of these was the Historia Naturalis. To the ideas about the natural world gleaned from earlier Greek authors, he added information about natural history, mineral resources, crafts and some technological processes, such as the extraction of metals from their ores, reported to him from the corners of the Empire. He added a few observations of his own, noted during travels on his official duties. Not all the reports were reliable, and the work often presents a tangled web of fact and fable. Gibbon described it as an immense register in which the author has "deposited the discoveries, the arts, and the errors of mankind". Pliny was indefatigable in his relentless note-taking, even dictating to his secretary while dining.
    During the Dark Ages and early Middle Ages in Western Europe, Pliny's Historia Naturalis was the largest known collection of facts about the natural world and was drawn upon freely by a succession of later writers. Its influence survived the influx into Western Europe, from the twelfth century, of translations of the works of Greek and Arab scholars. After the invention of printing in the middle of the fifteenth century, Pliny was the first work on a scientific subject to be printed, in 1469. Many editions followed and it may still be consulted with profit for its insights into technical knowledge and practice in the ancient world.
    [br]
    Bibliography
    The standard Latin text with English translation is that edited by H.Rackham et al.(1942– 63, Loeb Classical Library, London: Heinemann, 10 vols). The French version is by A.
    Ernout et al. (1947–, Belles Lettres, Paris).
    Further Reading
    The editions mentioned above include useful biographical and other details. For special aspects of Pliny, see K.C.Bailey, 1929–32, The Elder Pliny's Chapters on Chemical Subjects, London, 2 vols.
    LRD

    Biographical history of technology > Pliny the Elder (Gaius Plinius Secundus)

  • 5 after

    1. adverb
    1) (later) danach
    2) (behind) hinterher
    2. preposition
    1) (following in time, as result of) nach
    2) (behind) hinter (+ Dat.)

    what are you after? — was suchst du denn?; (to questioner) was willst du wirklich wissen?

    she's only after his money — sie ist nur hinter seinem Geld her

    3) (about)

    ask after somebody/something — nach jemandem/etwas fragen

    4) (next in importance to) nach
    5) (in spite of) nach
    * * *
    1. preposition
    1) (later in time or place than: After the car came a bus.) nach
    2) (following (often indicating repetition): one thing after another; night after night.) nach
    3) (behind: Shut the door after you!) hinter
    4) (in search or pursuit of: He ran after the bus.) hinter...her
    5) (considering: After all I've done you'd think he'd thank me; It's sad to fail after all that work.) nach
    6) ((American: in telling the time) past: It's a quarter after ten.) nach
    2. adverb
    (later in time or place: They arrived soon after.) danach
    3. conjunction
    (later than the time when: After she died we moved house twice.) nachdem
    - academic.ru/1091/aftermath">aftermath
    - afterthought
    - afterwards
    - after all
    - be after
    * * *
    af·ter
    [ˈɑ:ftəʳ, AM ˈæftɚ]
    I. prep
    1. (later time) nach + dat
    \after two weeks of vacationing nach zwei Wochen Ferien
    he always takes a nap \after lunch er macht nach dem Mittagessen immer einen kurzen Mittagsschlaf
    the day \after tomorrow übermorgen
    \after hours (in pubs) außerhalb der gesetzlich erlaubten Zeit, nach der Polizeistunde; (in shops) nach Ladenschluss; (working hours) nach Feierabend
    [a] quarter \after six AM [um] Viertel nach Sechs
    the week \after next übernächste Woche
    ▪ to be \after sb/sth hinter jdm/etw her sein
    you're chasing \after sth you can't have du jagst etwas hinterher, was du nicht haben kannst
    most of them are \after money die meisten von ihnen sind nur hinter dem Geld her [o auf das Geld aus
    3. (following) nach + dat
    the letter C comes \after B der Buchstabe C kommt nach B
    \after you! nach Ihnen!
    \after you with the butter! reichst du mir dann bitte auch die Butter?
    4. (many in succession) nach + dat
    day \after day Tag für Tag
    hour \after hour Stunde um Stunde
    time \after time immer wieder
    she ate one piece of cake \after another sie aß ein Stück Kuchen nach dem anderen
    5. (behind) nach + dat
    can you lock up \after you? können Sie zuschließen, wenn Sie gehen?
    he shut the door \after them er machte die Tür hinter ihnen zu
    she stared \after him in disbelief sie starrte ihm ungläubig nach
    6. (result of) nach + dat
    \after what he did to me, I'll never talk to him again nach dem, was er mir angetan hat, werde ich nie wieder ein Wort mit ihm wechseln
    7. (in honour of) nach + dat
    to name sb/sth \after sb/sth jdn/etw nach jdm/etw [be]nennen
    they named her Anne, \after her father's sister sie haben sie Anne genannt, nach der Schwester ihres Vaters
    8. (similar to) nach + dat
    a painting \after Picasso ein Gemälde im Stil von Picasso
    to take \after sb jdm nachschlagen
    she takes \after her mother sie kommt nach ihrer Mutter
    9. (about) nach + dat
    he inquired \after his uncle's health er erkundigte sich nach dem Befinden seines Onkels
    10. (in comparison to) verglichen mit + dat
    my children seem small \after his meine Kinder wirken klein verglichen mit seinen
    11.
    ▶ \after all (in spite of) trotz + dat
    \after all his efforts, he still failed the driving test trotz all seiner Bemühungen fiel er durch die Führerscheinprüfung
    he rang and told me that he couldn't come \after all er hat angerufen und mir gesagt, dass er doch nicht kommen könne; (giving reason) schließlich
    you are my husband, \after all du bist schließlich mein Mann
    she promised it, \after all sie hat es immerhin versprochen
    ▶ to be \after doing sth IRISH (going to do) dabei sein, etw zu tun; (just done) gerade etw getan haben
    II. conj nachdem
    I'll call you \after I take a shower ich rufe dich an, wenn ich geduscht habe
    right [or straight] [or immediately] \after sth unmittelbar nachdem...
    I went to the post office straight \after I left you ich bin direkt von dir zur Post gelaufen
    soon [or shortly] [or not long] \after sth kurz nachdem...
    soon \after we joined the motorway, the car started to make a strange noise wir waren noch nicht lange auf der Autobahn, da gab der Motor ein seltsames Geräusch von sich
    III. adv inv
    1. (at a later time) danach
    the day/week \after einen Tag/eine Woche danach [o darauf]
    shortly [or soon] \after kurz [o bald] darauf
    marriage, house, baby — and what comes \after? Hochzeit, Haus, Kinder — und was kommt dann?
    a mouse ran into the bushes and the cat ran \after eine Maus rannte in die Büsche und die Katze hinterher
    3. ( fam: afterwards) danach, nachher
    what are you going to do \after? was hast du danach noch vor?
    IV. adj inv, attr ( liter) später
    in \after years in späteren Jahren
    * * *
    I ['Aːftə(r)]
    adj attr (NAUT)
    Achter- II
    1. prep
    1) (time) nach (+dat)
    2) (order) nach (+dat), hinter (+dat); (in priorities etc) nach (+dat)

    I would put Keats after Shelley —

    after Germany, Japan is our biggest market — nach Deutschland ist Japan unser größter Markt

    3) (place) hinter (+dat)
    4) (= as a result of) nach (+dat)

    after what has happened — nach allem, was geschehen ist

    5)

    (= in spite of) to do sth after all — etw schließlich doch tun

    after all our efforts! — und das, nachdem or wo (inf) wir uns so viel Mühe gegeben haben!

    after all I've done for you! — und das nach allem, was ich für dich getan habe!

    after all, he is your brother —

    and to do this after I had warned him — und das, nachdem ich ihn gewarnt hatte

    6) (succession) nach (+dat)

    you tell me lie after lie — du erzählst mir eine Lüge nach der anderen, du belügst mich am laufenden Band

    one after the other — eine(r, s) nach der/dem anderen

    day after day —

    7) (manner = according to) nach (+dat)

    after El Greco — in der Art von El Greco, nach El Greco

    8)

    (pursuit, inquiry) to be after sb/sth — hinter jdm/etw her sein

    he's just after a free meal/a bit of excitement — er ist nur auf ein kostenloses Essen/ein bisschen Abwechslung aus

    2. adv
    (time, order) danach; (place, pursuit) hinterher

    for years/weeks after — noch Jahre/Wochen or jahrelang/wochenlang danach

    the year/week after — das Jahr/die Woche danach or darauf

    I'll be back some time the year after — ich komme irgendwann im Jahr danach or im darauffolgenden Jahr wieder

    soon after —

    what comes after? the car drove off with the dog running after — was kommt danach or nachher? das Auto fuhr los und der Hund rannte hinterher

    3. conj
    nachdem

    after he had closed the door he began to speak — nachdem er die Tür geschlossen hatte, begann er zu sprechen

    what will you do after he's gone? — was machst du, wenn er weg ist?

    after finishing it I will... — wenn ich das fertig habe, werde ich...

    after arriving they went... — nachdem sie angekommen waren, gingen sie...

    4. adj
    5. n afters
    6. pl (Brit inf)
    Nachtisch m
    * * *
    after [ˈɑːftə; US ˈæftər]
    A adv nachher, hinterher, danach, darauf, später:
    for months after noch monatelang;
    during the weeks after in den (nach)folgenden Wochen;
    that comes after das kommt nachher;
    shortly after kurz danach; → day Bes Redew
    B präp
    1. hinter (dat) … her, nach, hinter (dat):
    close the door after sb die Tür hinter jemandem zumachen;
    a) er kam hinter mir her,
    b) er kam nach mir;
    be after sb (sth) fig hinter jemandem (einer Sache) her sein;
    be after sth auch auf etwas aus sein, es auf etwas abgesehen haben;
    after you bitte nach Ihnen!; → go after, look after
    2. (zeitlich) nach:
    after a week auch nach Ablauf einer Woche;
    ten after five US 10 nach 5;
    day after day Tag für Tag;
    blow after blow Schlag auf Schlag;
    wave after wave Welle um Welle;
    the month after next der übernächste Monat;
    one after the other einer (eine, eines) nach dem (der, dem) andern, nacheinander, hintereinander;
    a) schließlich, im Grunde, eigentlich, alles in allem,
    b) immerhin, dennoch,
    c) (also) doch,
    d) doch (noch);
    I think I’ll stay at home after all ich bleibe doch lieber zu Haus;
    after all my trouble trotz aller meiner Mühe;
    after what has happened nach dem, was geschehen ist; → hour 5
    3. (im Range) nach:
    4. nach, gemäß:
    after his nature seinem Wesen gemäß;
    a picture after Rubens ein Gemälde nach oder im Stil von Rubens;
    after what you have told me nach dem, was Sie mir erzählt haben; → heart Bes Redew
    C adj
    1. später:
    2. hinter(er, e, es), SCHIFF Achter…:
    D konj nachdem:
    E s afters pl (auch als sg konstruiert) Br umg Nachtisch m:
    for afters als oder zum Nachtisch
    p. abk
    1. page S.
    2. part T.
    3. LING participle Part.
    4. past
    5. Br penny, pence
    6. per
    7. post, after
    * * *
    1. adverb
    1) (later) danach
    2) (behind) hinterher
    2. preposition
    1) (following in time, as result of) nach
    2) (behind) hinter (+ Dat.)

    what are you after? — was suchst du denn?; (to questioner) was willst du wirklich wissen?

    ask after somebody/something — nach jemandem/etwas fragen

    * * *
    adj.
    Hinter- Präfix adv.
    gemäß adv.
    hinterher (örtlich) adv.
    nachher adv. prep.
    nach präp.

    English-german dictionary > after

  • 6 ac

    atque or āc (atque is used before vowels and consonants, ac, in class. lang., only before consonants; v. infra, I.), conj. [at has regularly in the compound atque a continuative, as in atqui it has an adversative force; pr. and further, and besides, and also; cf. in Gr. pros de, pros de eti, eti kai, eti de, and te kai; v. at init., and for the change of form atque, ac, cf. neque, nec; in MSS. and inscriptions sometimes written adque, and sometimes by confusion atqui ], a copulative particle, and also, and besides, and even, and (indicating a close internal connection between single words or whole clauses; while et designates an external connection of diff. objects with each other, v. et; syn.: et, -que, autem, praeterea, porro, ad hoc, ad haec).
    I.
    In joining single words, which is its most common use.
    A.
    In gen. (The following representation is based on a collection of all the instances of the use of atque and ac in Cic. Imp. Pomp., Phil. 2, Tusc. 1, and Off. 1; in Caes. B. G. 1 and 2; in Sall. C.; and in Liv. 21; and wherever in the account either author or work is not cited, there atque or ac does not occur.)
    1.
    The form atque.
    a.
    Before vowels and h. —Before a (very freq.):

    sociorum atque amicorum,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 2, 6; 3, 7; id. Phil. 2, 13, 33; id. Tusc. 1, 34, 122; Caes. B. G. 1, 2; 1, 18; 1, 26; 2, 14; Sall. C. 5, 8; 7, 5; Liv. 21, 3; 21, 12.—Before e (very freq.):

    deposci atque expeti,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 2, 5; 6, 16; 10, 28; id. Phil, 2, 21, 51; 2, 21, 52; id. Tusc. 1, 20, 46; Caes. B. G. 1, 6; 1, 15; 1, 18; 2, 19; Sall. C. 14, 6; 49, 4; Liv. 21, 4; 21, 37.—Before i (very freq.):

    excitare atque inflammare,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 2, 6; 3, 7; 7, 18; id. Phil. 2, 15, 37; 2, 21, 50; id. Tusc. 1, 20, 46; 1, 40, 97; Caes. B. G. 1, 17; 1, 20; 1, 22; 2, 1 bis; Sall. C. 2, 3; 3, 5; 14, 4; Liv. 21, 4; 21, 6; 21, 10.—Before o (freq. in Cic.):

    honestissimus atque ornatissimus,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 7, 17; 8, 21; 11, 31; id. Off. 1, 25, 86; 1, 27, 94; Caes. B. G. 1, 40; 2, 14; Sall. C. 10, 6; Liv. 21, 8.—Before u (very rare), Cic. Imp. Pomp. 3, 7; 5, 11; 6, 15; Caes. B. G. 1, 26; 2, 20; Sall. C. 31, 6; 42, 1.—Before h (not infreq.):

    Sertorianae atque Hispaniensis,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 4, 10; 7, 19; id. Tusc. 1, 28, 69; id. Off. 1, 24, 87; Caes. B. G. 1, 19; 2, 9; 2, 10; Sall. C. 6, 1; 12, 2; Liv. 21, 37.—
    b.
    Before consonants.—Before b (very rare):

    Gallorum atque Belgarum,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 6; so,

    Cassius atque Brutus,

    Tac. A. 3, 76.—Before c (infreq. in Cic., freq. in Sall.):

    in portubus atque custodiis,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 6, 16; 8, 21; id. Phil. 2, 8, 18; id. Tusc. 1, 18, 42; id. Off. 1, 25, 88; Sall. C. 2, 3; 7, 4; 16, 3; 26, 4; 29, 3.—Before d (infreq.):

    superatam esse atque depressam,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 8, 21; id. Phil. 2, 44, 114: id. Off. 1, 6, 19; 1, 25, 85; 1, 33, 119; Sall. C. 4, 1; 20, 7; 20, 10.—Before f (infreq.):

    vitiis atque flagitiis,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 30, 72; id. Off. 1, 28, 98; 1, 28, 100; Caes. B. G. 1, 2; Sall. C. 1, 4; 2, 9; 11, 2.— Before g (very rare):

    dignitate atque gloria,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 4, 11; 5, 12:

    virtute atque gloria,

    Sall. C. 3, 2; 61, 9.—Before j (very rare):

    labore atque justitia,

    Sall. C. 10, 1; 29, 3.—Before l (rare):

    hilari atque laeto,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 42, 100; id. Off. 1, 19, 64; Sall. C. 14, 3; 21, 2; 28, 4.—Before m (infreq. in Cic., once in Caes.):

    multae atque magnae,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 9, 23; 17, 50; id. Phil. 2, 39, 100; id. Off. 1, 29, 103; 1, 31, 110; Caes. B. G. 1, 34; Sall. C. 18, 4; 31, 7; 34, 1; 51, 1.—Before n (infreq.):

    adventu atque nomine,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 5, 13; 20, 60; id. Off. 1, 28, 101; Sall. C. 2, 2 bis. —Before p (infreq. in Cic.):

    magna atque praeclara,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 4, 10; 11, 31; 16, 48; id. Off. 1, 44, 156; Sall. C. 4, 1; 4, 4; 16, 2; 20, 3.—Before q (does not occur).—Before r (rare):

    se conlegit atque recreavit,

    Cic. Phil. 2, 24, 58.— Before s (rare in Cic.):

    provinciarum atque sociorum,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 1, 24, 71; id. Off. 1, 9, 30; 1, 21, 72; Sall. C. 2, 5; 2, 7; 6, 1.— Before t (infreq.):

    parietum atque tectorum,

    Cic. Phil. 2, 28, 69; id. Tusc. 1, 24, 57; id. Off. 1, 35, 126; Sall. C. 42, 2; 50, 3; 51, 38.—Before v (infreq.):

    gravis atque vehemens,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 9, 23; 9, 25; id. Tusc. 1, 23, 54; Sall. C. 1, 1; 12, 3; 45, 4; Liv. 21, 4; 21, 30.—
    2.
    The form ac before consonants.—Before b (very rare):

    sentientes ac bene meritos,

    Cic. Off. 1, 41, 149:

    feri ac barbari,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 31 and 33.—Before c (very rare):

    liberis ac conjugibus,

    Liv. 21, 30:

    Romae ac circa urbem,

    id. 21, 62.—Before d (freq. in Cic.):

    periculum ac discrimen,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 5, 12; 9, 23; 12, 33; id. Tusc. 1, 17, 40; 1, 28, 69; id. Off. 1, 14, 42:

    usus ac disciplina,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 40; 2, 31; Sall. C. 5, 4; 5, 8; 28, 1; Liv. 21, 10; 21, 18; 21, 19.—Before f (infreq.):

    opima est ac fertilis,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 6, 14; 7, 19; id. Tusc. 1, 1, 2; 1, 27, 66; id. Off. 1, 29, 103:

    potentissimos ac firmissimos,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 3; 1, 48; 2, 12;

    2, 13: pessuma ac flagitiosissima,

    Sall. C. 5, 9; Liv. 21, 17; 21, 20.—Before g (does not occur).—Before j (very rare):

    nobilitatis ac juventutis,

    Cic. Phil. 2, 15, 37.—Before l (not infreq. in Liv.), Cic. Imp. Pomp. 4, 9; 23, 66; id. Phil. 2, 22, 54; Caes. B. G. 1, 12; 1, 23; 2, 23; Liv. 21, 13; 21, 14; 21, 35.—Before m (not infreq. in Cic.):

    terrore ac metu,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 9, 23; 18, 54 bis; 20, 59; id. Tusc. 1, 40, 95; id. Off. 1, 30, 106; Caes. B. G. 1, 39; 2, 14; Sall. C. 2, 4; 10, 1; Liv. 21, 8; 21, 60.—Before n (not infreq. in Cic.):

    insedit ac nimis inveteravit,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 3, 7:

    gentes ac nationes,

    id. ib. 11, 31; 12, 35 bis; id. Phil. 2, 21, 50; id. Tusc. 1, 21, 48; Caes. B. G. 1, 20; 2, 28; Liv. 21, 32.—Before p (not infreq. in Cic., Caes., and Liv.):

    celeberrimum ac plenissimum,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 12, 33; 12, 35; 13, 36; id. Phil. 2, 15, 39; id. Tusc. 1, 17, 41; id. Off. 1, 20, 68; Caes. B. G. 1, 18; 1, 20; 2, 13; 2, 19; Sall. C. 5, 9; Liv. 21, 25; 21, 34; 21, 35.—Before q (does not occur).—Before r (infreq.):

    firmamenti ac roboris,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 4, 10; 8, 21; 15, 45; id. Off. 1, 5, 15; Caes. B. G. 1, 25; Liv. 21, 41; 21, 44.—Before s (freq. in Cic. and Liv., infreq. in Caes.):

    vectigalibus ac sociis,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 2, 4; 4, 10; 11, 30; id. Phil. 2, 27, 66; Caes. B. G. 1, 25; 1, 31; 1, 33; 2, 24; Liv. 21, 4; 21, 33 bis; 21, 36.—Before t (infreq. in Cic., freq. in Liv.):

    tantis rebus ac tanto bello,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 10, 27 bis; 19, 56; 20, 59; Caes. B. G. 1, 26; 1, 39; 2, 6; Liv. 21, 7 ter; 21, 10; 21, 14; 21, 25.—Before v (not in Cic., only once in Caes. and Sall., but freq. in Liv.):

    armatos ac victores,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 40:

    inconsulte ac veluti etc.,

    Sall. C. 42, 2:

    opera ac vineae,

    Liv. 21, 7; 21, 22; 21, 40; 21, 43. —(So in the phrases treated below: atque adeo, atque alter or alius, atque eccum, atque eo, atque etiam, atque illuc, atque is or hic, atque iterum, atque omnia, atque ut, atque late, atque sic, atque velut, but ac ne, ac si, and ac tamen).—With simul:

    Britannorum acies in speciem simul ac terrorem editioribus locis constiterat,

    Tac. Agr. 35:

    in se simul atque in Herculem,

    id. G. 34:

    suos prosequitur simul ac deponit,

    id. ib. 30; so,

    sociis pariter atque hostibus,

    id. H. 4, 73:

    innocentes ac noxios juxta cadere,

    id. A. 1, 48.—Hence, sometimes syn. with et—et, ut—ita, aeque ac; both—and, as—so, as well—as, as well as: hodie sero ac nequiquam [p. 190] voles, Ter. Heaut. 2, 3, 103 (cf. Cic. Quinct. 25, 79:

    verum et sero et nequidquam pudet): copia sententiarum atque verborum,

    Cic. Cael. 19, 45:

    omnia honesta atque inhonesta,

    Sall. C. 30, 4:

    nobiles atque ignobiles,

    id. ib. 20, 7:

    caloris ac frigoris patientia par,

    Liv. 21, 4; 6, 41; Vell. 2, 127:

    vir bonus et prudens dici delector ego ac tu,

    Hor. Ep. 1, 16, 32.—
    B.
    Esp.
    a.
    In a hendiadys:

    utinam isto animo atque virtute in summa re publica versari quam in municipali maluisset,

    with this virtuous feeling, Cic. Leg. 3, 16, 36:

    de conplexu ejus ac sinu,

    of his bosom embrace, id. Cat. 2, 10, 22:

    me eadem, quae ceteros, fama atque invidia vexabat, i. e. invidiosa fama,

    Sall. C. 3 fin.:

    clamore atque adsensu,

    shout of applause, Liv. 21, 3.—
    b.
    In joining to the idea of a preceding word one more important, and indeed, and even, and especially (v. Kritz ad Sall. J. 4, 3).
    (α).
    Absol.: Pa. Nempe tu istic ais esse erilem concubinam? Sc. Atque arguo me etc., yea and I maintain that I etc., Plaut. Mil. 2, 3, 66: Ph. Tun vidisti? Sc. Atque his quidem oculis, id. ib. 2, 4, 15: Ps. Ecquid habet is homo aceti in pectore? Ch. Atque acidissimi, id. Ps. 2, 4, 49; so id. Bacch. 3, 6, 9; id. Men. 1, 2, 40: Py. Cognoscitne (ea)? Ch. Ac memoriter, Ter. Eun. 5, 3, 6:

    Faciam boni tibi aliquid pro ista re ac lubens,

    and with a good will, id. Heaut. 4, 5, 15:

    rem difficilem (dii immortales) atque omnium difficillimam,

    and indeed, Cic. Or. 16, 52:

    magna diis immortalibus habenda est gratia atque huic ipsi Jovi Statori, etc.,

    and especially, id. Cat. 1, 5, 11:

    hebeti ingenio atque nullo,

    and in fact, id. Tusc. 5, 15, 45:

    ex plurimis periculis et insidiis atque ex media morte,

    and even, id. Cat. 4, 9:

    fratre meo atque eodem propinquo suo interfecto,

    and at the same time, Sall. J. 14, 11:

    intra moenia atque in sinu urbis,

    id. C. 52, 35.—
    (β).
    With adeo, and that too, and even:

    intra moenia atque adeo in senatu,

    Cic. Cat. 1, 2, 5:

    qui in urbe remanserunt atque adeo qui contra urbis salutem etc.,

    id. ib. 2, 12, 27:

    insto atque urgeo, insector, posco atque adeo flagito crimen,

    id. Planc. 19 fin.:

    non petentem atque adeo etiam absentem,

    Liv. 10, 5.—And with autem also added:

    atque adeo autem quor etc.,

    Ter. Eun. 5, 4, 42.—
    (γ).
    With etiam:

    id jam populare atque etiam plausibile factum est,

    and also, Cic. Div. in Caecil. 3, 8:

    ne Verginio commeatum dent atque etiam in custodia habeant,

    Liv. 3, 46.—
    (δ).
    With the dem. pron. hic, is:

    negotium magnum est navigare atque id mense Quintili,

    and besides, and that, and that too, Cic. Att. 5, 12; 1, 14:

    maximis defixis trabibus atque eis praeacutis,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 27:

    Asseres pedum XII. cuspidibus praefixis atque hi maximis ballistis missi,

    id. ib. 2, 2:

    duabus missis subsidio cohortibus a Caesare, atque his primis legionum duarum,

    id. B. G. 5, 15; id. B. C. 3, 70:

    flumen uno omnino loco pedibus atque hoc aegre transiri potest,

    id. B. G. 5, 18:

    ad celeritatem onerandi subductionesque paulo facit humiliores... atque id eo magis, quod, etc.,

    id. ib. 5, 1; cf. without id (perh. to avoid the repetition of the pron.): qua (sc. virtute) nostri milites facile superabant, atque eo magis, quod, etc., and that the more because etc., id. ib. 3, 8 fin.:

    dicendi artem apta trepidatione occultans atque eo validior,

    Tac. H. 1, 69; 2, 37; id. A. 4, 22; 4, 46.—
    II.
    In comparisons.
    A.
    Of equality (Rudd. II. p. 94; Zumpt, § 340); with par, idem, item, aequus, similis, juxta, talis, totidem, etc., as: et nota, quod ex hujus modi structura Graeca (sc. homoios kai, etc.) frequenter Latini ac et atque in significatione similitudinis accipiunt, Prisc. pp. 1192 and 1193 P.; cf. Gell. 10, 29; Lidd. and Scott, s. v. kai, III.:

    si parem sententiam hic habet ac formam,

    Plaut. Mil. 4, 6, 36: quom opulenti loquuntur pariter atque ignobiles, Enn. ap. Gell. 11, 4:

    Ecastor pariter hoc atque alias res soles,

    Plaut. Men. 5, 1, 52:

    pariter nunc opera me adjuves ac re dudum opitulata es,

    Ter. Phorm. 5, 3, 3:

    neque enim mihi par ratio cum Lucilio est ac tecum fuit,

    Cic. N. D. 3, 1, 3:

    parique eum atque illos imperio esse jussit,

    Nep. Dat. 3, 5:

    magistrum equitum pari ac dictatorem imperio fugavit,

    id. Hann. 5, 3:

    pariter patribus ac plebi carus,

    Liv. 2, 33: nam et vita est eadem et animus te erga idem ac fuit, Ter. Heaut. 2, 3, 24:

    In hanc argumentationes ex eisdem locis sumendae sunt atque in causam negotialem,

    Cic. Inv. 2, 23, 70:

    equi quod alii sunt ad rem militarem idonei, alii ad vecturam... non item sunt spectandi atque habendi,

    Varr. R. R. 2, 7, 15; id. L. L. 10, § 74 Mull.:

    cum ex provincia populi Romani aequam partem tu tibi sumpseris atque populo Romano miseris,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 19:

    Modo ne in aequo (jure) hostes apud vos sint ac nos socii,

    Liv. 39, 37 (exs. with aeque; v. aeque, d); Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 83 fin.:

    et simili jure tu ulcisceris patrui mortem atque ille persequeretur fratris sui, si, etc.,

    id. Rab. Perd. 5; id. Phil. 1, 4; id. Agr. 1, 4 fin.:

    similem pavorem inde ac fugam fore, ac bello Gallico fuerit,

    Liv. 6, 28; Col. 5, 7, 3:

    contendant, se juxta hieme atque aestate bella gerere posse,

    Liv. 5, 6; cf. Drak. ad Liv. 1, 54, 9:

    faxo eum tali mactatum, atque hic est, infortunio,

    Ter. Phorm. 5, 9, 39; Cic. Vatin. 4, 10:

    cum totidem navibus atque erat profectus,

    Nep. Milt. 7, 4.—
    B.
    Of difference; with alius and its derivv., with dissimile, contra, contrarius, secus, etc., than:

    illi sunt alio ingenio atque tu,

    other than, different from, Plaut. Ps. 4, 7, 35 al.; v. the passages under alius, I. B. a:

    aliter tuum amorem atque est accipis,

    Ter. Heaut. 2, 3, 23 al.; v. the passages under aliter, 1. a.; cf.

    also aliorsum, II., and aliusmodi: quod est non dissimile atque ire in Solonium,

    Cic. Att. 2, 3:

    simulacrum in excelso collocare et, contra atque ante fuerat, ad orientem convertere,

    id. Cat. 3, 8, 20:

    vides, omnia fere contra ac dicta sint evenisse,

    id. Div. 2, 24 fin.; id. Verr. 2, 1, 46:

    qui versantur retro, contrario motu atque caelum,

    id. Rep. 6, 17, 17:

    membra paulo secus a me atque ab illo partita,

    id. de Or. 3, 30, 119:

    cujus ego salutem non secus ac meam tueri debeo,

    id. Planc. 1 fin. al.; v. contra, contrarius, secus, etc.—
    C.
    Sometimes, in cases of equality or difference, atque with ut or ac with si (with aliter affirm. Cic. appears to connect only atque ut, not ac si;

    once, however, non aliter, ac si,

    Cic. Att. 13, 51;

    v. aliter, 1. b.): pariter hoc fit atque ut alia facta sunt,

    Plaut. Am. 4, 1, 11:

    nec fallaciam Astutiorem ullus fecit poeta atque Ut haec est fabre facta a nobis,

    id. Cas. 5, 1, 6 sqq.:

    quod iste aliter atque ut edixerat decrevisset,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 46:

    et qui suos casus aliter ferunt atque ut auctores aliis ipsi fuerunt, etc.,

    id. Tusc. 3, 30, 73:

    si mentionem fecerint, quo aliter ager possideretur atque ut ex legibus Juliis,

    id. Att. 2, 18, 2; 16, 13, c; cf. Wopk. Lect. Tull. 1, 15, p. 118; Dig. 43, 13, 11:

    Egnatii absentis rem ut tueare, aeque a te peto ac si mea negotia essent,

    just as if, Cic. Fam. 13, 43:

    tu autem similiter facis ac si me roges, etc.,

    id. N. D. 3, 3, 8:

    reliquis officiis, juxta ac si meus frater esset, sustentavit,

    id. Post. Red. in Sen. 8, 20:

    quod dandum est amicitiae, large dabitur a me non secus ac si meus esset frater,

    id. Mur. 4 fin.:

    haec sunt, tribuni, consilia vestra, non, hercule, dissimilia, ac si quis, etc.,

    Liv. 5, 5 fin. al. —
    D.
    More rare with nimis, in partem, pro eo, etc.;

    in Plaut. also with mutare or demutare = aliud esse: nimis bellus, atque ut esse maxume optabam, locus,

    Plaut. Bacch. 4, 4, 73:

    haud centensumam Partem dixi atque, otium rei si sit, possim expromere,

    id. Mil. 3, 1, 168: sane quam pro eo ac debui graviter molesteque tuli, just as was my duty, Sulp. ap. Cic. Fam. 4, 5:

    debeo sperare, omnes deos, qui huic urbi praesident, pro eo mihi, ac mereor, relaturos gratiam esse,

    Cic. Cat. 4, 2:

    pro eo, ac si concessum sit, concludere oportebit argumentationem,

    id. Inv. 1, 32, 54:

    non possum ego non aut proxime atque ille aut etiam aeque laborare,

    nearly the same as he, id. Fam. 9, 13, 2:

    neque se luna quoquam mutat atque uti exorta est semel,

    Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 118:

    num quid videtur demutare atque ut quidem Dixi?

    id. Mil. 4, 3, 37.—
    E.
    Sometimes the word indicating comparison (aeque, tantopere, etc.) is to be supplied from the connection (in the class. per. perh. used only once by Cassius in epist. style):

    nebula haud est mollis atque hujus est,

    Plaut. Cas. 4, 4, 21:

    quem esse amicum ratus sum atque ipsus sum mihi,

    id. Bacch. 3, 6, 20:

    quae suco caret atque putris pumex,

    Priap. 32, 7 (Mull., est putusque): digne ac mereor commendatus esse, Cass. ap. Cic. Fam. 12, 13; Dig. 2, 14, 4; 19, 2, 54.—
    F.
    Poet. or in post-Aug. prose with comparatives (for quam), than:

    amicior mihi nullus vivit atque is est,

    Plaut. Merc. 5, 2, 56:

    non Apollinis magis verum atque hoc responsum est,

    Ter. And. 4, 2, 15 Ruhnk.:

    Illi non minus ac tibi Pectore uritur intimo Flamma,

    Cat. 61, 172:

    haud minus ac jussi faciunt,

    Verg. A. 3, 561:

    Non tuus hoc capiet venter plus ac meus,

    Hor. S. 1, 1, 46 Bentl. and Heind. (cf. infra:

    nihilo plus accipias quam Qui nil portarit): qui peccas minus atque ego,

    id. ib. 2, 7, 96:

    Artius atque hedera procera adstringitur ilex,

    id. Epod. 15, 5; Suet. Caes. 14 Ruhnk. —
    G.
    In the comparison of two periods of time, most freq. with simul (v. examples under simul); ante- or post-class. with principio, statim:

    principio Atque animus ephebis aetate exiit,

    as soon as, Plaut. Merc. 1, 1, 40:

    judici enim, statim atque factus est, omnium rerum officium incumbit,

    Dig. 21, 1, 25:

    quamvis, statim atque intercessit, mulier competierat,

    ib. 16, 1, 24.—
    III.
    To connect a negative clause which explains or corrects what precedes; hence sometimes with potius (class.; in Cic. very freq., but rare in the poets), and not, and not rather.
    a.
    Absol.:

    Decipiam ac non veniam,

    Ter. Heaut. 4, 4, 6:

    si fidem habeat,... ac non id metuat, ne etc.,

    id. Eun. 1, 2, 60:

    perparvam vero controversiam dicis, ac non eam, quae dirimat omnia,

    Cic. Leg. 1, 20, 54:

    quasi nunc id agatur, quis ex tanta multitudine occiderit, ac non hoc quaeratur, eum, etc.,

    id. Rosc. Am. 33:

    si (mundum) tuum ac non deorum immortalium domicilium putes, nonne plane desipere videare?

    id. N. D. 2, 6, 17:

    nemo erat, qui illum reum ac non miliens condemnatum arbitraretur,

    id. Att. 1, 16:

    si hoc dissuadere est, ac non disturbare ac pervertere,

    id. Agr. 2, 37, 101:

    si res verba desideraret ac non pro se ipsa loqueretur,

    id. Fam. 3, 2 fin.: hoc te exspectare tempus tibi turpe est ac non ei rei sapientia tua te occurrere, Serv. ap. Cic. Fam. 4, 5, 6:

    velut destituti ac non qui ipsi destituissent,

    Liv. 8, 27; 7, 3 fin.:

    si mihi mea sententia proferenda ac non disertissimorum,

    Tac. Or. 1.—
    b.
    With potius:

    Quam ob rem scriba deducet, ac non potius mulio, qui advexit?

    Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 79 (B. and K., et):

    quis (eum) ita aspexit, ut perditum civem, ac non potius ut importunissimum hostem?

    id. Cat. 2, 6, 12.— Pliny the elder commonly employs in this sense atque non, not ac non:

    concremasse ea (scrinia) optuma fide atque non legisse,

    Plin. 7, 25, 26, § 94; 22, 24, 50, § 108; 29, 2, 9, § 29; 27, 9, 55, § 78; 31, 7, 39, § 73 et saep. —
    IV.
    In connecting clauses and beginning periods.
    1.
    In gen., and, and so, and even, and too: Pamph. Antiquam adeo tuam venustatem obtines. Bacch. Ac tu ecastor morem antiquom atque ingenium obtines, And you too, Ter. Hec. 5, 4, 20:

    atque illi (philosopho) ordiri placet etc.,

    Cic. de Or. 3, 47, 183: Africanus indigens mei? Minime hercle. Ac ne ego quidem illius, And I indeed not, etc., id. Lael. 9, 30; id. Fin. 5, 11, 33:

    cum versus facias, te ipsum percontor, etc.... Atque ego cum Graecos facerem, natus mare citra, Versiculos, etc.,

    Hor. S. 1, 10, 31:

    multa quippe et diversa angebant: validior per Germaniam exercitus, etc.... quos igitur anteferret? ac (i. e. similiter angebat), ne postpositi contumelia incenderentur,

    Tac. A. 1, 47:

    Minime, minime, inquit Secundus, atque adeo vellem maturius intervenisses,

    Tac. Or. 14:

    ac similiter in translatione, etc.,

    Quint. 3, 6, 77.—
    2.
    In adducing new arguments of similar force in favor of any assertion or making further statements about a subject, etc.; cf. Beier ad Cic. Off. 3, 11, 487.
    a.
    Absol.:

    maxima est enim vis vetustatis et consuetudinis: atque in ipso equo, cujus modo mentionem feci, si, etc.,

    and furthermore, and moreover, Cic. Lael. 19, 68: Atque, si natura confirmatura jus non erit, virtutes omnes tollentur, id. Leg. 1, 15, 42 B. and K. —
    b.
    Often with etiam:

    Atque alias etiam dicendi virtutes sequitur,

    Cic. Or. 40, 139:

    Atque hoc etiam animadvertendum non esse omnia etc.,

    id. de Or. 2, 61, 251; so id. Off. 1, 26, 90; id. N. D. 2, 11, 30; Col. 2, 2, 3.—
    c.
    Sometimes with quoque:

    Atque occidi quoque Potius quam cibum praehiberem,

    Plaut. Ps. 1, 3, 133; so Cic. N. D. 2, 12, 32; Col. 2, 13, 3, and Cels. 2, 3; 3, 22.—
    d.
    And even with quoque etiam: Atque ego [p. 191] quoque etiam, qui Jovis sum filius, Contagione etc., Plaut. Am. prol. 30.—
    3.
    In narration:

    aegre submoventes obvios intrare portam, qui adducebant Philopoemenem, potuerunt: atque conferta turba iter reliquum clauserat,

    Liv. 39, 49; 5, 21 fin.:

    completur caede, quantum inter castra murosque vacui fuit: ac rursus nova laborum facies,

    Tac. H. 3, 30; cf. Caes. B. C. 2, 28 fin. and 2, 29 init. —
    4.
    In introducing comparisons, atque ut, atque velut (mostly poet., esp. in epic poetry):

    Atque ut perspicio, profecto etc.,

    Plaut. Capt. 3, 4, 53:

    ac veluti magno in populo cum saepe coorta est Seditio.... Sic cunctus pelagi cecidit fragor, etc.,

    Verg. A. 1, 148; so id. G. 4, 170; id. A. 2, 626; 4, 402; 4, 441; 6, 707; 9, 59; 10, 405; 10, 707; 10, 803; 11, 809; 12, 365; 12, 521; 12, 684; 12, 715;

    12, 908: Inclinare meridiem Sentis ac, veluti stet volucris dies, Parcis deripere etc.,

    Hor. C. 3, 28, 6; Val. Fl. 6, 664;

    and so, Ac velut in nigro jactatis turbine nautis, etc.... Tale fuit nobis Manius auxilium,

    Cat. 68, 63 (for which Sillig and Muller read:

    Hic velut, etc.): Atque ut magnas utilitates adipiscimur, etc.,

    Cic. Off. 2, 5, 16:

    Atque ut hujus mores veros amicos parere non potuerunt, sic etc.,

    id. Lael. 15, 54.—
    5.
    In connecting two acts or events.
    a.
    In the order of time, and then; hence the ancient grammarians assume in it the notion of quick succession, and explain it, though improperly, as syn. with statim, ilico, without any accompanying copulative, v. Gell. 10, 29; Non. p. 530, 1 sq. (only in the poets and histt.): Atque atque accedit muros Romana juventus (the repetition of the atque represents the approach step by step), Enn. ap. Gell. and Non. l. l. (Ann. v. 527 Mull.): Quo imus una;

    ad prandium? Atque illi tacent,

    And then they are silent, Plaut. Capt. 3, 1, 19:

    Ubi cenamus? inquam, atque illi abnuunt,

    and upon this they shake their head, id. ib. 3, 1, 21; id. Ep. 2, 2, 33:

    dum circumspecto atque ego lembum conspicor,

    id. Bacch. 2, 3, 45; so id. Merc. 2, 1, 32; 2, 1, 35; id. Most. 5, 1, 9:

    lucernam forte oblitus fueram exstinguere: Atque ille exclamat derepente maximum,

    and then he suddenly exclaims, id. ib. 2, 2, 57: cui fidus Achates It comes... atque illi Misenum in litore sicco Ut venere, vident, etc., and as they thus came, etc., Verg. A. 6, 162:

    dixerat, atque illi sese deus obtulit ultro,

    Stat. Th. 9, 481; 12, 360; Liv. 26, 39, 16; Tac. H. 3, 17:

    tum Otho ingredi castra ausus: atque illum tribuni centurionesque circumsistunt,

    id. ib. 1, 82. —Sometimes with two imperatives, in order to indicate vividly the necessity of a quicker succession, or the close connection between two actions:

    cape hoc argentum atque defer,

    Ter. Heaut. 4, 7, 3:

    abi domum ac deos comprecare,

    id. Ad. 4, 5, 65:

    tace modo ac sequere hac,

    id. ib. 2, 4, 16:

    Accipe carmina atque hanc sine tempora circum hederam tibi serpere,

    Verg. E. 8, 12; id. G. 1, 40; 3, 65; 4, 330:

    Da auxilium, pater, atque haec omina firma,

    id. A. 2, 691; 3, 89; 3, 250; 3, 639; 4, 424; 9, 90; 10, 624; 11, 370.—
    b.
    In the order of thought, and so, and thus, and therefore.
    (α).
    Absol.:

    si nunc de tuo jure concessisses paululum, Atque adulescenti morigerasses,

    and so, Ter. Ad. 2, 2, 10.—
    (β).
    With ita or sic:

    Ventum deinde ad multo angustiorem rupem, atque ita rectis saxis, etc.,

    Liv. 21, 36; Plin. 10, 58, 79, § 158:

    ac sic prope innumerabiles species reperiuntur,

    Quint. 12, 10, 67.—
    c.
    Connecting conclusion and condition, so, then (cf. at, II. F.):

    non aliter quam qui adverso vix flumine lembum Remigiis subigit, si bracchia forte remisit, Atque illum praeceps prono rapit alveus amni,

    Verg. G. 1, 203 (here explained by statim by Gell. 10, 29, and by Servius, but thus its connective force is wholly lost; cf. also Forbig ad h. l. for still another explanation).—
    6.
    (As supra, I. c.) To annex a thought of more importance:

    Satisne videtur declarasse Dionysius nihil esse ei beatum, cui semper aliqui terror impendeat? atque ei ne integrum quidem erat, ut ad justitiam remigraret,

    Cic. Tusc. 5, 21, 62; id. Tull. 4:

    hoc enim spectant leges, hoc volunt, incolumem esse civium conjunctionem, quam qui dirimunt, eos morte... coercent. Atque hoc multo magis efficit ipsa naturae ratio,

    id. Off. 3, 5, 23; id. Fam. 6, 1, 4: hac spe lapsus Induciomarus... exsules damnatosque tota Gallia magnis praemiis ad se allicere coepit;

    ac tantam sibi jam iis rebus in Gallia auctoritatem comparaverat, ut, etc.,

    Caes. B. G. 5, 55 fin.; Nep. Hann. 13, 2; Quint. 1, 10, 16.—Hence also in answers, in order to confirm a question or assertion:

    Sed videone ego Pamphilippum cum fratre Epignomo? Atque is est,

    And he it is, Yes, it is he, Plaut. Stich. 4, 2, 4; so id. Truc. 1, 2, 24: Th. Mihin malum minitare? Ca. Atque edepol non minitabor, sed dabo, id. Curc. 4, 4, 15: Ch. Egon formidulosus? nemost hominum, qui vivat, minus. Th. Atque ita opust, Ter. Eun. 4, 6, 20.—
    7.
    In expressing a wish, atque utinam:

    Veritus sum arbitros, atque utinam memet possim obliscier! Att., Trag. Rel. p. 160 Rib.: videmus enim fuisse quosdam, qui idem ornate ac graviter, idem versute et subtiliter dicerent. Atque utinam in Latinis talis oratoris simulacrum reperire possemus!

    Cic. Or. 7, 22; so id. Rep. 3, 5, 8:

    Atque utinam pro decore etc.,

    Liv. 21, 41, 13:

    Atque utinam ex vobis unus etc.,

    Verg. E. 10, 35; id. A. 1, 575:

    Atque utinam... Ille vir in medio fiat amore lapis!

    Prop. 2, 9, 47; 3, 6, 15; 3, 7, 25; 3, 8, 19 al.—
    8.
    To connect an adversative clause, and often fully with tamen, and yet, notwithstanding, nevertheless.
    a.
    Absol.: Mihi quidem hercle non fit veri simile;

    atque ipsis commentum placet,

    Ter. And. 1, 3, 20 Ruhnk. (atque pro tamen, Don.):

    ego quia non rediit filius, quae cogito!... Atque ex me hic natus non est, sed ex fratre,

    id. Ad. 1, 1, 15 (Quasi dicat, ex me non est, et sic afficior: quid paterer si genuissem? Don.; cf. Acron. ap. Charis. p. 204 P.); Cic. Off. 3, 11, 48 Beier; id. Mur. 34, 71 Matth.:

    ceterum ex aliis negotiis, quae ingenio exercentur, in primis magno usui est memoria rerum gestarum... Atque ego credo fore qui, etc.,

    and yet I believe, Sall. J. 4, 1 and 3 Corte; id. C. 51, 35:

    observare principis egressum in publicum, insidere vias examina infantium futurusque populus solebat. Labor parentibus erat ostentare parvulos... Ac plerique insitis precibus surdas principis aures obstrepebant,

    Plin. Pan. 26.—
    b.
    With tamen:

    nihil praeterea est magnopere dicendum. Ac tamen, ne cui loco non videatur esse responsum, etc.,

    Cic. Fin. 2, 27, 85:

    discipulos dissimilis inter se ac tamen laudandos,

    id. de Or. 3, 10, 35; id. Rep. 1, 7, 12:

    Atque in his tamen tribus generibus etc.,

    id. Off. 3, 33, 118; id. Pis. 1, 3; 13, 30; id. Prov. Cons. 7, 16; 7, 15 fin. (cf. in reference to the last four passages Wund. Varr. Lectt. p. lviii. sq.):

    ac tamen initia fastigii etc.,

    Tac. A. 3, 29; 3, 56; 12, 56;

    14, 21: pauciores cum pluribus certasse, ac tamen fusos Germanos,

    id. H. 5, 16.—
    9.
    To connect a minor affirmative proposition (the assumptio or propositio minor of logical lang.) in syllogisms, now, but, but now (while atqui is used to connect either an affirmative or negative minor premiss: v. atqui): Scaptius quaternas postulabat. Metui, si impetrasset, ne tu ipse me amare desineres;

    ... Atque hoc tempore ipso impingit mihi epistulam etc.,

    Cic. Att. 6, 1, 6.—Sometimes the conclusion is to be supplied:

    nisi qui naturas hominum, penitus perspexerit, dicendo, quod volet, perficere non poterit. Atque totus hic locus philosophorum putatur proprius (conclusion: ergo oratorem philosophiam cognoscere oportet),

    Cic. de Or. 1, 12, 53 and 54.—
    10.
    In introducing a purpose (freq. in Cic.).
    a.
    A negative purpose, and esp. in anticipating an objection:

    Ac ne sine causa videretur edixisse,

    Cic. Phil. 3, 9, 24:

    Ac ne forte hoc magnum ac mirabile esse videatur,

    id. de Or. 2, 46, 191; so id. Fam. 5, 12, 30:

    Ac ne saepius dicendum sit,

    Cels. 8, 1:

    Ac ne forte roges, quo me duce, quo lare tuter,

    Hor. Ep. 1, 1, 13:

    Ac ne forte putes,

    id. ib. 2, 1, 208:

    Ac ne forte putes etc.,

    Ov. R. Am. 465 (Merkel, Et).—
    b.
    A positive purpose:

    Atque ut ejus diversa studia in dissimili ratione perspicere possitis, nemo etc.,

    Cic. Cat. 2, 5, 9:

    Atque ut omnes intellegant me etc.... dico etc.,

    id. Imp. Pomp. 8, 20; 2, 4; id. Clu. 14, 43; id. Sull. 2, 5; id. de Or. 3, 11, 40:

    Atque ut C. Flaminium relinquam etc.,

    id. Leg. 3, 9, 20; id. Fin. 3, 2, 4.—
    11.
    a.. In continuing a thought in assertions or narration, and, now, and now, Plaut. Aul. prol. 18: audistis, cum pro se diceret, genus orationis, etc.,... perspexistis. Atque in eo non solum ingenium ejus videbatis, etc., Cic. Cael. 19, 45; so id. de Or. 3, 32, 130; 2, 7, 27; 3, 10, 39 al.; Caes. B. G. 2, 29; Nep. Ages. 7, 3; 8, 1, Eum. 10, 3 Bremi; Tac. A. 14, 64; 15, 3; Verg. A. 9, 1; Sil. 4, 1 al.: ac si, sublato illo, depelli a vobis omne periculum judicarem, now if I, etc., Cic. Cat. 2, 2, 3:

    atque si etiam hoc natura praescribit, etc.,

    id. Off. 3, 6, 27; so Quint. 10, 1, 26; 10, 2, 8.—
    b.
    In introducing parentheses:

    vulgo credere, Penino (atque inde nomen et jugo Alpium inditum) transgressum,

    Liv. 21, 38:

    omne adfectus genus (atque ea maxime jucundam et ornatam faciunt orationem) de luxuria, etc.,

    Quint. 4, 3, 15 MSS., where Halm after Spalding reads et quae. —
    c.
    At the conclusion of a discourse (not infreq. in Cic.): Atque in primis duabus dicendi partibus qualis esset, summatim breviterque descripsimus, And thus have we, then, briefly described, etc., Cic. Or. 15, 50:

    Ac de primo quidem officii fonte diximus,

    id. Off. 1, 6, 19:

    Ac de inferenda quidem injuria satis dictum est,

    id. ib. 1, 8, 27; id. Inv. 2, 39, 115 al.—
    V.
    In particular connections and phrases.
    A.
    Unus atque alter, one and the other; alius atque alius, one and another; now this, now that:

    unae atque alterae scalae,

    Sall. J. 60, 7:

    quarum (coclearum) cum unam atque alteram, dein plures peteret,

    id. ib. 93, 2:

    unum atque alterum lacum integer perfluit,

    Tac. H. 5, 6:

    dilatisque alia atque alia de causa comitiis,

    Liv. 8, 23, 17; Col. 9, 8, 10:

    alius atque alius,

    Tac. H. 1, 46; 1, 50 (v. alius, II. D.).—Also separated by several words:

    aliud ejus subinde atque aliud facientes initium,

    Sen. Ep. 32, 2.—
    B.
    Etiam atque etiam. again and again:

    temo Stellas cogens etiam atque etiam Noctis sublime iter, Enn., Trag. Rel. p. 39 Rib.: etiam atque etiam cogita,

    Ter. Eun. 1, 1, 11:

    etiam atque etiam considera,

    Cic. Div. in Caecil. 14, 46:

    monitos eos etiam atque etiam volo,

    id. Cat. 2, 12, 27.—So, semel atque iterum, Cic. Font. 26; id. Clu. 49; Tac. Or. 17; and:

    iterum atque iterum,

    Verg. A. 8, 527; Hor. S. 1, 10, 39.—
    C.
    Huc atque illuc, hither and thither, Cic. Q. Rosc. 37; id. de Or. 1, 40, 184; Verg. A. 9, 57; Ov. M. 2, 357; 10, 376; Tac. Agr. 10; id. H. 1, 85.—
    D.
    Longe atque late, far and wide, Cic. Marcell. 29:

    atque eccum or atque eccum video, in colloquial lang.: Heus vocate huc Davom. Atque eccum,

    but here he is, Ter. And. 3, 3, 48:

    Audire vocem visa sum modo militis. Atque eccum,

    and here he is, id. Eun. 3, 2, 2; so id. Hec. 4, 1, 8.—
    E.
    Atque omnia, in making an assertion general, and so generally:

    Atque in eis omnibus, quae sunt actionis, inest quaedam vis a natura data,

    Cic. de Or. 3, 59, 223:

    quorum (verborum) descriptus ordo alias alia terminatione concluditur, atque omnia illa et prima et media verba spectare debent ad ultimum,

    id. Or. 59, 200; id. de Or. 2, 64, 257: commoda civium non divellere, atque omnes aequitate eadem continere, and so rather, etc., id. Off. 2, 23, 83:

    nihil acerbum esse, nihil crudele, atque omnia plena clementiae, humanitatis,

    id. ad Q. Fr. 1, 1, 8:

    Atque omnis vitae ratio sic constat, ut, quae probamus in aliis, facere ipsi velimus,

    Quint. 10, 2, 2.—
    F.
    With other conjunctions.
    1.
    After et:

    equidem putabam virtutem hominibus instituendo et persuadendo, non minis et vi ac metu tradi,

    Cic. de Or. 1, 58, 247:

    Magnifica vero vox et magno viro ac sapiente digna,

    id. Off. 3, 1, 1; id. Cael. 13:

    vanus aspectus et auri fulgor atque argenti,

    Tac. Agr. 32.:

    denuntiarent, ut ab Saguntinis abstineret et Carthaginem in Africam traicerent ac sociorum querimonias deferrent,

    Liv. 21, 6, 4:

    ubi et fratrem consilii ac periculi socium haberem,

    id. 21, 41, 2:

    et uti liter demum ac Latine perspicueque,

    Quint. 8, 3, 3:

    Nam et subtili plenius aliquid atque subtilius et vehementi remissius atque vehementius invenitur,

    id. 12, 10, 67. —
    2.
    After que, as in Gr. te kai: litterisque ac laudibus aeternare, Varr. ap. Non. p. 75, 20:

    submoverique atque in castra redigi,

    Liv. 26, 10:

    terrorem caedemque ac fugam fecere,

    id. 21, 52:

    mus Sub terris posuitque domos atque horrea fecit,

    Verg. G. 1, 182; 3, 434; id. A. 8, 486.—
    3.
    Before et:

    caelum ipsum ac mare et silvas circum spectantes,

    Tac. Agr. 32.—
    4.
    After neque (only in the poets and post - Aug. prose):

    nec clavis nec canis atque calix,

    Mart. 1, 32, 4: naturam Oceani atque aestus [p. 192] neque quaerere hujus operis est, ac multi retulere, Tac. Agr. 10:

    mediocritatem pristinam neque dissimulavit umquam ac frequenter etiam prae se tulit,

    Suet. Vesp. 12.—
    G.
    Atque repeated, esp. in arch. Lat.: Scio solere plerisque hominibus in rebus secundis atque prolixis atque prosperis animum excellere atque superbiam atque ferociam augescere atque crescere, Cato ap. Gell. 7, 3: Dicere possum quibus villae atque aedes aedificatae atque expolitae maximo opere citro atque ebore atque pavimentis Poenicis stent, Cato ap. Fest. p. 242 Mull.:

    atque ut C. Flamininum atque ea, quae jam prisca videntur, propter vetustatem relinquam,

    Cic. Leg. 3, 9, 20:

    omnem dignitatem tuam in virtute atque in rebus gestis atque in tua gravitate positam existimare,

    id. Fam. 1, 5, 8.—Esp. freq. in enumerations in the poets:

    Haec atque illa dies atque alia atque alia,

    Cat. 68, 152:

    Mavortia tellus Atque Getae atque Hebrus,

    Verg. G. 4, 463:

    Clioque et Beroe atque Ephyre Atque Opis et Asia,

    id. ib. 4, 343.—And sometimes forming a double connective, both— and = et—et:

    Multus ut in terras deplueretque lapis: Atque tubas atque arma ferunt crepitantia caelo Audita,

    Tib. 2, 5, 73:

    complexa sui corpus miserabile nati Atque deos atque astra vocat crudelia mater,

    Verg. E. 5, 23; Sil. 1, 93; v. Forbig ad Verg. l. l.
    ► Atque regularly stands at the beginning of its sentence or clause or before the word it connects, but in poetry it sometimes, like et and at, stands:
    a.
    In the second place:

    Jamque novum terrae stupeant lucescere solem, Altius atque cadant imbres,

    Verg. E. 6, 38 Rib., ubi v. Forbig.:

    Accipite ergo animis atque haec mea figite dicta,

    id. A. 3, 250, and 10, 104 (animis may, however, here be taken with Accipite, as in id. ib. 5, 304):

    Esto beata, funus atque imagines Ducant triumphales tuum,

    Hor. Epod. 8, 11; id. S. 1, 5, 4; 1, 6, 111; 1, 7, 12 (ubi v. Fritzsche).—
    b.
    In the third place:

    quod pubes hedera virente Gaudeant pulla magis atque myrto,

    Hor. C. 1, 25, 18; cf. at fin. (Vid. more upon this word in Hand, Turs. I. pp. 452-513.)

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > ac

  • 7 adque

    atque or āc (atque is used before vowels and consonants, ac, in class. lang., only before consonants; v. infra, I.), conj. [at has regularly in the compound atque a continuative, as in atqui it has an adversative force; pr. and further, and besides, and also; cf. in Gr. pros de, pros de eti, eti kai, eti de, and te kai; v. at init., and for the change of form atque, ac, cf. neque, nec; in MSS. and inscriptions sometimes written adque, and sometimes by confusion atqui ], a copulative particle, and also, and besides, and even, and (indicating a close internal connection between single words or whole clauses; while et designates an external connection of diff. objects with each other, v. et; syn.: et, -que, autem, praeterea, porro, ad hoc, ad haec).
    I.
    In joining single words, which is its most common use.
    A.
    In gen. (The following representation is based on a collection of all the instances of the use of atque and ac in Cic. Imp. Pomp., Phil. 2, Tusc. 1, and Off. 1; in Caes. B. G. 1 and 2; in Sall. C.; and in Liv. 21; and wherever in the account either author or work is not cited, there atque or ac does not occur.)
    1.
    The form atque.
    a.
    Before vowels and h. —Before a (very freq.):

    sociorum atque amicorum,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 2, 6; 3, 7; id. Phil. 2, 13, 33; id. Tusc. 1, 34, 122; Caes. B. G. 1, 2; 1, 18; 1, 26; 2, 14; Sall. C. 5, 8; 7, 5; Liv. 21, 3; 21, 12.—Before e (very freq.):

    deposci atque expeti,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 2, 5; 6, 16; 10, 28; id. Phil, 2, 21, 51; 2, 21, 52; id. Tusc. 1, 20, 46; Caes. B. G. 1, 6; 1, 15; 1, 18; 2, 19; Sall. C. 14, 6; 49, 4; Liv. 21, 4; 21, 37.—Before i (very freq.):

    excitare atque inflammare,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 2, 6; 3, 7; 7, 18; id. Phil. 2, 15, 37; 2, 21, 50; id. Tusc. 1, 20, 46; 1, 40, 97; Caes. B. G. 1, 17; 1, 20; 1, 22; 2, 1 bis; Sall. C. 2, 3; 3, 5; 14, 4; Liv. 21, 4; 21, 6; 21, 10.—Before o (freq. in Cic.):

    honestissimus atque ornatissimus,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 7, 17; 8, 21; 11, 31; id. Off. 1, 25, 86; 1, 27, 94; Caes. B. G. 1, 40; 2, 14; Sall. C. 10, 6; Liv. 21, 8.—Before u (very rare), Cic. Imp. Pomp. 3, 7; 5, 11; 6, 15; Caes. B. G. 1, 26; 2, 20; Sall. C. 31, 6; 42, 1.—Before h (not infreq.):

    Sertorianae atque Hispaniensis,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 4, 10; 7, 19; id. Tusc. 1, 28, 69; id. Off. 1, 24, 87; Caes. B. G. 1, 19; 2, 9; 2, 10; Sall. C. 6, 1; 12, 2; Liv. 21, 37.—
    b.
    Before consonants.—Before b (very rare):

    Gallorum atque Belgarum,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 6; so,

    Cassius atque Brutus,

    Tac. A. 3, 76.—Before c (infreq. in Cic., freq. in Sall.):

    in portubus atque custodiis,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 6, 16; 8, 21; id. Phil. 2, 8, 18; id. Tusc. 1, 18, 42; id. Off. 1, 25, 88; Sall. C. 2, 3; 7, 4; 16, 3; 26, 4; 29, 3.—Before d (infreq.):

    superatam esse atque depressam,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 8, 21; id. Phil. 2, 44, 114: id. Off. 1, 6, 19; 1, 25, 85; 1, 33, 119; Sall. C. 4, 1; 20, 7; 20, 10.—Before f (infreq.):

    vitiis atque flagitiis,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 30, 72; id. Off. 1, 28, 98; 1, 28, 100; Caes. B. G. 1, 2; Sall. C. 1, 4; 2, 9; 11, 2.— Before g (very rare):

    dignitate atque gloria,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 4, 11; 5, 12:

    virtute atque gloria,

    Sall. C. 3, 2; 61, 9.—Before j (very rare):

    labore atque justitia,

    Sall. C. 10, 1; 29, 3.—Before l (rare):

    hilari atque laeto,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 42, 100; id. Off. 1, 19, 64; Sall. C. 14, 3; 21, 2; 28, 4.—Before m (infreq. in Cic., once in Caes.):

    multae atque magnae,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 9, 23; 17, 50; id. Phil. 2, 39, 100; id. Off. 1, 29, 103; 1, 31, 110; Caes. B. G. 1, 34; Sall. C. 18, 4; 31, 7; 34, 1; 51, 1.—Before n (infreq.):

    adventu atque nomine,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 5, 13; 20, 60; id. Off. 1, 28, 101; Sall. C. 2, 2 bis. —Before p (infreq. in Cic.):

    magna atque praeclara,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 4, 10; 11, 31; 16, 48; id. Off. 1, 44, 156; Sall. C. 4, 1; 4, 4; 16, 2; 20, 3.—Before q (does not occur).—Before r (rare):

    se conlegit atque recreavit,

    Cic. Phil. 2, 24, 58.— Before s (rare in Cic.):

    provinciarum atque sociorum,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 1, 24, 71; id. Off. 1, 9, 30; 1, 21, 72; Sall. C. 2, 5; 2, 7; 6, 1.— Before t (infreq.):

    parietum atque tectorum,

    Cic. Phil. 2, 28, 69; id. Tusc. 1, 24, 57; id. Off. 1, 35, 126; Sall. C. 42, 2; 50, 3; 51, 38.—Before v (infreq.):

    gravis atque vehemens,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 9, 23; 9, 25; id. Tusc. 1, 23, 54; Sall. C. 1, 1; 12, 3; 45, 4; Liv. 21, 4; 21, 30.—
    2.
    The form ac before consonants.—Before b (very rare):

    sentientes ac bene meritos,

    Cic. Off. 1, 41, 149:

    feri ac barbari,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 31 and 33.—Before c (very rare):

    liberis ac conjugibus,

    Liv. 21, 30:

    Romae ac circa urbem,

    id. 21, 62.—Before d (freq. in Cic.):

    periculum ac discrimen,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 5, 12; 9, 23; 12, 33; id. Tusc. 1, 17, 40; 1, 28, 69; id. Off. 1, 14, 42:

    usus ac disciplina,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 40; 2, 31; Sall. C. 5, 4; 5, 8; 28, 1; Liv. 21, 10; 21, 18; 21, 19.—Before f (infreq.):

    opima est ac fertilis,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 6, 14; 7, 19; id. Tusc. 1, 1, 2; 1, 27, 66; id. Off. 1, 29, 103:

    potentissimos ac firmissimos,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 3; 1, 48; 2, 12;

    2, 13: pessuma ac flagitiosissima,

    Sall. C. 5, 9; Liv. 21, 17; 21, 20.—Before g (does not occur).—Before j (very rare):

    nobilitatis ac juventutis,

    Cic. Phil. 2, 15, 37.—Before l (not infreq. in Liv.), Cic. Imp. Pomp. 4, 9; 23, 66; id. Phil. 2, 22, 54; Caes. B. G. 1, 12; 1, 23; 2, 23; Liv. 21, 13; 21, 14; 21, 35.—Before m (not infreq. in Cic.):

    terrore ac metu,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 9, 23; 18, 54 bis; 20, 59; id. Tusc. 1, 40, 95; id. Off. 1, 30, 106; Caes. B. G. 1, 39; 2, 14; Sall. C. 2, 4; 10, 1; Liv. 21, 8; 21, 60.—Before n (not infreq. in Cic.):

    insedit ac nimis inveteravit,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 3, 7:

    gentes ac nationes,

    id. ib. 11, 31; 12, 35 bis; id. Phil. 2, 21, 50; id. Tusc. 1, 21, 48; Caes. B. G. 1, 20; 2, 28; Liv. 21, 32.—Before p (not infreq. in Cic., Caes., and Liv.):

    celeberrimum ac plenissimum,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 12, 33; 12, 35; 13, 36; id. Phil. 2, 15, 39; id. Tusc. 1, 17, 41; id. Off. 1, 20, 68; Caes. B. G. 1, 18; 1, 20; 2, 13; 2, 19; Sall. C. 5, 9; Liv. 21, 25; 21, 34; 21, 35.—Before q (does not occur).—Before r (infreq.):

    firmamenti ac roboris,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 4, 10; 8, 21; 15, 45; id. Off. 1, 5, 15; Caes. B. G. 1, 25; Liv. 21, 41; 21, 44.—Before s (freq. in Cic. and Liv., infreq. in Caes.):

    vectigalibus ac sociis,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 2, 4; 4, 10; 11, 30; id. Phil. 2, 27, 66; Caes. B. G. 1, 25; 1, 31; 1, 33; 2, 24; Liv. 21, 4; 21, 33 bis; 21, 36.—Before t (infreq. in Cic., freq. in Liv.):

    tantis rebus ac tanto bello,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 10, 27 bis; 19, 56; 20, 59; Caes. B. G. 1, 26; 1, 39; 2, 6; Liv. 21, 7 ter; 21, 10; 21, 14; 21, 25.—Before v (not in Cic., only once in Caes. and Sall., but freq. in Liv.):

    armatos ac victores,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 40:

    inconsulte ac veluti etc.,

    Sall. C. 42, 2:

    opera ac vineae,

    Liv. 21, 7; 21, 22; 21, 40; 21, 43. —(So in the phrases treated below: atque adeo, atque alter or alius, atque eccum, atque eo, atque etiam, atque illuc, atque is or hic, atque iterum, atque omnia, atque ut, atque late, atque sic, atque velut, but ac ne, ac si, and ac tamen).—With simul:

    Britannorum acies in speciem simul ac terrorem editioribus locis constiterat,

    Tac. Agr. 35:

    in se simul atque in Herculem,

    id. G. 34:

    suos prosequitur simul ac deponit,

    id. ib. 30; so,

    sociis pariter atque hostibus,

    id. H. 4, 73:

    innocentes ac noxios juxta cadere,

    id. A. 1, 48.—Hence, sometimes syn. with et—et, ut—ita, aeque ac; both—and, as—so, as well—as, as well as: hodie sero ac nequiquam [p. 190] voles, Ter. Heaut. 2, 3, 103 (cf. Cic. Quinct. 25, 79:

    verum et sero et nequidquam pudet): copia sententiarum atque verborum,

    Cic. Cael. 19, 45:

    omnia honesta atque inhonesta,

    Sall. C. 30, 4:

    nobiles atque ignobiles,

    id. ib. 20, 7:

    caloris ac frigoris patientia par,

    Liv. 21, 4; 6, 41; Vell. 2, 127:

    vir bonus et prudens dici delector ego ac tu,

    Hor. Ep. 1, 16, 32.—
    B.
    Esp.
    a.
    In a hendiadys:

    utinam isto animo atque virtute in summa re publica versari quam in municipali maluisset,

    with this virtuous feeling, Cic. Leg. 3, 16, 36:

    de conplexu ejus ac sinu,

    of his bosom embrace, id. Cat. 2, 10, 22:

    me eadem, quae ceteros, fama atque invidia vexabat, i. e. invidiosa fama,

    Sall. C. 3 fin.:

    clamore atque adsensu,

    shout of applause, Liv. 21, 3.—
    b.
    In joining to the idea of a preceding word one more important, and indeed, and even, and especially (v. Kritz ad Sall. J. 4, 3).
    (α).
    Absol.: Pa. Nempe tu istic ais esse erilem concubinam? Sc. Atque arguo me etc., yea and I maintain that I etc., Plaut. Mil. 2, 3, 66: Ph. Tun vidisti? Sc. Atque his quidem oculis, id. ib. 2, 4, 15: Ps. Ecquid habet is homo aceti in pectore? Ch. Atque acidissimi, id. Ps. 2, 4, 49; so id. Bacch. 3, 6, 9; id. Men. 1, 2, 40: Py. Cognoscitne (ea)? Ch. Ac memoriter, Ter. Eun. 5, 3, 6:

    Faciam boni tibi aliquid pro ista re ac lubens,

    and with a good will, id. Heaut. 4, 5, 15:

    rem difficilem (dii immortales) atque omnium difficillimam,

    and indeed, Cic. Or. 16, 52:

    magna diis immortalibus habenda est gratia atque huic ipsi Jovi Statori, etc.,

    and especially, id. Cat. 1, 5, 11:

    hebeti ingenio atque nullo,

    and in fact, id. Tusc. 5, 15, 45:

    ex plurimis periculis et insidiis atque ex media morte,

    and even, id. Cat. 4, 9:

    fratre meo atque eodem propinquo suo interfecto,

    and at the same time, Sall. J. 14, 11:

    intra moenia atque in sinu urbis,

    id. C. 52, 35.—
    (β).
    With adeo, and that too, and even:

    intra moenia atque adeo in senatu,

    Cic. Cat. 1, 2, 5:

    qui in urbe remanserunt atque adeo qui contra urbis salutem etc.,

    id. ib. 2, 12, 27:

    insto atque urgeo, insector, posco atque adeo flagito crimen,

    id. Planc. 19 fin.:

    non petentem atque adeo etiam absentem,

    Liv. 10, 5.—And with autem also added:

    atque adeo autem quor etc.,

    Ter. Eun. 5, 4, 42.—
    (γ).
    With etiam:

    id jam populare atque etiam plausibile factum est,

    and also, Cic. Div. in Caecil. 3, 8:

    ne Verginio commeatum dent atque etiam in custodia habeant,

    Liv. 3, 46.—
    (δ).
    With the dem. pron. hic, is:

    negotium magnum est navigare atque id mense Quintili,

    and besides, and that, and that too, Cic. Att. 5, 12; 1, 14:

    maximis defixis trabibus atque eis praeacutis,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 27:

    Asseres pedum XII. cuspidibus praefixis atque hi maximis ballistis missi,

    id. ib. 2, 2:

    duabus missis subsidio cohortibus a Caesare, atque his primis legionum duarum,

    id. B. G. 5, 15; id. B. C. 3, 70:

    flumen uno omnino loco pedibus atque hoc aegre transiri potest,

    id. B. G. 5, 18:

    ad celeritatem onerandi subductionesque paulo facit humiliores... atque id eo magis, quod, etc.,

    id. ib. 5, 1; cf. without id (perh. to avoid the repetition of the pron.): qua (sc. virtute) nostri milites facile superabant, atque eo magis, quod, etc., and that the more because etc., id. ib. 3, 8 fin.:

    dicendi artem apta trepidatione occultans atque eo validior,

    Tac. H. 1, 69; 2, 37; id. A. 4, 22; 4, 46.—
    II.
    In comparisons.
    A.
    Of equality (Rudd. II. p. 94; Zumpt, § 340); with par, idem, item, aequus, similis, juxta, talis, totidem, etc., as: et nota, quod ex hujus modi structura Graeca (sc. homoios kai, etc.) frequenter Latini ac et atque in significatione similitudinis accipiunt, Prisc. pp. 1192 and 1193 P.; cf. Gell. 10, 29; Lidd. and Scott, s. v. kai, III.:

    si parem sententiam hic habet ac formam,

    Plaut. Mil. 4, 6, 36: quom opulenti loquuntur pariter atque ignobiles, Enn. ap. Gell. 11, 4:

    Ecastor pariter hoc atque alias res soles,

    Plaut. Men. 5, 1, 52:

    pariter nunc opera me adjuves ac re dudum opitulata es,

    Ter. Phorm. 5, 3, 3:

    neque enim mihi par ratio cum Lucilio est ac tecum fuit,

    Cic. N. D. 3, 1, 3:

    parique eum atque illos imperio esse jussit,

    Nep. Dat. 3, 5:

    magistrum equitum pari ac dictatorem imperio fugavit,

    id. Hann. 5, 3:

    pariter patribus ac plebi carus,

    Liv. 2, 33: nam et vita est eadem et animus te erga idem ac fuit, Ter. Heaut. 2, 3, 24:

    In hanc argumentationes ex eisdem locis sumendae sunt atque in causam negotialem,

    Cic. Inv. 2, 23, 70:

    equi quod alii sunt ad rem militarem idonei, alii ad vecturam... non item sunt spectandi atque habendi,

    Varr. R. R. 2, 7, 15; id. L. L. 10, § 74 Mull.:

    cum ex provincia populi Romani aequam partem tu tibi sumpseris atque populo Romano miseris,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 19:

    Modo ne in aequo (jure) hostes apud vos sint ac nos socii,

    Liv. 39, 37 (exs. with aeque; v. aeque, d); Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 83 fin.:

    et simili jure tu ulcisceris patrui mortem atque ille persequeretur fratris sui, si, etc.,

    id. Rab. Perd. 5; id. Phil. 1, 4; id. Agr. 1, 4 fin.:

    similem pavorem inde ac fugam fore, ac bello Gallico fuerit,

    Liv. 6, 28; Col. 5, 7, 3:

    contendant, se juxta hieme atque aestate bella gerere posse,

    Liv. 5, 6; cf. Drak. ad Liv. 1, 54, 9:

    faxo eum tali mactatum, atque hic est, infortunio,

    Ter. Phorm. 5, 9, 39; Cic. Vatin. 4, 10:

    cum totidem navibus atque erat profectus,

    Nep. Milt. 7, 4.—
    B.
    Of difference; with alius and its derivv., with dissimile, contra, contrarius, secus, etc., than:

    illi sunt alio ingenio atque tu,

    other than, different from, Plaut. Ps. 4, 7, 35 al.; v. the passages under alius, I. B. a:

    aliter tuum amorem atque est accipis,

    Ter. Heaut. 2, 3, 23 al.; v. the passages under aliter, 1. a.; cf.

    also aliorsum, II., and aliusmodi: quod est non dissimile atque ire in Solonium,

    Cic. Att. 2, 3:

    simulacrum in excelso collocare et, contra atque ante fuerat, ad orientem convertere,

    id. Cat. 3, 8, 20:

    vides, omnia fere contra ac dicta sint evenisse,

    id. Div. 2, 24 fin.; id. Verr. 2, 1, 46:

    qui versantur retro, contrario motu atque caelum,

    id. Rep. 6, 17, 17:

    membra paulo secus a me atque ab illo partita,

    id. de Or. 3, 30, 119:

    cujus ego salutem non secus ac meam tueri debeo,

    id. Planc. 1 fin. al.; v. contra, contrarius, secus, etc.—
    C.
    Sometimes, in cases of equality or difference, atque with ut or ac with si (with aliter affirm. Cic. appears to connect only atque ut, not ac si;

    once, however, non aliter, ac si,

    Cic. Att. 13, 51;

    v. aliter, 1. b.): pariter hoc fit atque ut alia facta sunt,

    Plaut. Am. 4, 1, 11:

    nec fallaciam Astutiorem ullus fecit poeta atque Ut haec est fabre facta a nobis,

    id. Cas. 5, 1, 6 sqq.:

    quod iste aliter atque ut edixerat decrevisset,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 46:

    et qui suos casus aliter ferunt atque ut auctores aliis ipsi fuerunt, etc.,

    id. Tusc. 3, 30, 73:

    si mentionem fecerint, quo aliter ager possideretur atque ut ex legibus Juliis,

    id. Att. 2, 18, 2; 16, 13, c; cf. Wopk. Lect. Tull. 1, 15, p. 118; Dig. 43, 13, 11:

    Egnatii absentis rem ut tueare, aeque a te peto ac si mea negotia essent,

    just as if, Cic. Fam. 13, 43:

    tu autem similiter facis ac si me roges, etc.,

    id. N. D. 3, 3, 8:

    reliquis officiis, juxta ac si meus frater esset, sustentavit,

    id. Post. Red. in Sen. 8, 20:

    quod dandum est amicitiae, large dabitur a me non secus ac si meus esset frater,

    id. Mur. 4 fin.:

    haec sunt, tribuni, consilia vestra, non, hercule, dissimilia, ac si quis, etc.,

    Liv. 5, 5 fin. al. —
    D.
    More rare with nimis, in partem, pro eo, etc.;

    in Plaut. also with mutare or demutare = aliud esse: nimis bellus, atque ut esse maxume optabam, locus,

    Plaut. Bacch. 4, 4, 73:

    haud centensumam Partem dixi atque, otium rei si sit, possim expromere,

    id. Mil. 3, 1, 168: sane quam pro eo ac debui graviter molesteque tuli, just as was my duty, Sulp. ap. Cic. Fam. 4, 5:

    debeo sperare, omnes deos, qui huic urbi praesident, pro eo mihi, ac mereor, relaturos gratiam esse,

    Cic. Cat. 4, 2:

    pro eo, ac si concessum sit, concludere oportebit argumentationem,

    id. Inv. 1, 32, 54:

    non possum ego non aut proxime atque ille aut etiam aeque laborare,

    nearly the same as he, id. Fam. 9, 13, 2:

    neque se luna quoquam mutat atque uti exorta est semel,

    Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 118:

    num quid videtur demutare atque ut quidem Dixi?

    id. Mil. 4, 3, 37.—
    E.
    Sometimes the word indicating comparison (aeque, tantopere, etc.) is to be supplied from the connection (in the class. per. perh. used only once by Cassius in epist. style):

    nebula haud est mollis atque hujus est,

    Plaut. Cas. 4, 4, 21:

    quem esse amicum ratus sum atque ipsus sum mihi,

    id. Bacch. 3, 6, 20:

    quae suco caret atque putris pumex,

    Priap. 32, 7 (Mull., est putusque): digne ac mereor commendatus esse, Cass. ap. Cic. Fam. 12, 13; Dig. 2, 14, 4; 19, 2, 54.—
    F.
    Poet. or in post-Aug. prose with comparatives (for quam), than:

    amicior mihi nullus vivit atque is est,

    Plaut. Merc. 5, 2, 56:

    non Apollinis magis verum atque hoc responsum est,

    Ter. And. 4, 2, 15 Ruhnk.:

    Illi non minus ac tibi Pectore uritur intimo Flamma,

    Cat. 61, 172:

    haud minus ac jussi faciunt,

    Verg. A. 3, 561:

    Non tuus hoc capiet venter plus ac meus,

    Hor. S. 1, 1, 46 Bentl. and Heind. (cf. infra:

    nihilo plus accipias quam Qui nil portarit): qui peccas minus atque ego,

    id. ib. 2, 7, 96:

    Artius atque hedera procera adstringitur ilex,

    id. Epod. 15, 5; Suet. Caes. 14 Ruhnk. —
    G.
    In the comparison of two periods of time, most freq. with simul (v. examples under simul); ante- or post-class. with principio, statim:

    principio Atque animus ephebis aetate exiit,

    as soon as, Plaut. Merc. 1, 1, 40:

    judici enim, statim atque factus est, omnium rerum officium incumbit,

    Dig. 21, 1, 25:

    quamvis, statim atque intercessit, mulier competierat,

    ib. 16, 1, 24.—
    III.
    To connect a negative clause which explains or corrects what precedes; hence sometimes with potius (class.; in Cic. very freq., but rare in the poets), and not, and not rather.
    a.
    Absol.:

    Decipiam ac non veniam,

    Ter. Heaut. 4, 4, 6:

    si fidem habeat,... ac non id metuat, ne etc.,

    id. Eun. 1, 2, 60:

    perparvam vero controversiam dicis, ac non eam, quae dirimat omnia,

    Cic. Leg. 1, 20, 54:

    quasi nunc id agatur, quis ex tanta multitudine occiderit, ac non hoc quaeratur, eum, etc.,

    id. Rosc. Am. 33:

    si (mundum) tuum ac non deorum immortalium domicilium putes, nonne plane desipere videare?

    id. N. D. 2, 6, 17:

    nemo erat, qui illum reum ac non miliens condemnatum arbitraretur,

    id. Att. 1, 16:

    si hoc dissuadere est, ac non disturbare ac pervertere,

    id. Agr. 2, 37, 101:

    si res verba desideraret ac non pro se ipsa loqueretur,

    id. Fam. 3, 2 fin.: hoc te exspectare tempus tibi turpe est ac non ei rei sapientia tua te occurrere, Serv. ap. Cic. Fam. 4, 5, 6:

    velut destituti ac non qui ipsi destituissent,

    Liv. 8, 27; 7, 3 fin.:

    si mihi mea sententia proferenda ac non disertissimorum,

    Tac. Or. 1.—
    b.
    With potius:

    Quam ob rem scriba deducet, ac non potius mulio, qui advexit?

    Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 79 (B. and K., et):

    quis (eum) ita aspexit, ut perditum civem, ac non potius ut importunissimum hostem?

    id. Cat. 2, 6, 12.— Pliny the elder commonly employs in this sense atque non, not ac non:

    concremasse ea (scrinia) optuma fide atque non legisse,

    Plin. 7, 25, 26, § 94; 22, 24, 50, § 108; 29, 2, 9, § 29; 27, 9, 55, § 78; 31, 7, 39, § 73 et saep. —
    IV.
    In connecting clauses and beginning periods.
    1.
    In gen., and, and so, and even, and too: Pamph. Antiquam adeo tuam venustatem obtines. Bacch. Ac tu ecastor morem antiquom atque ingenium obtines, And you too, Ter. Hec. 5, 4, 20:

    atque illi (philosopho) ordiri placet etc.,

    Cic. de Or. 3, 47, 183: Africanus indigens mei? Minime hercle. Ac ne ego quidem illius, And I indeed not, etc., id. Lael. 9, 30; id. Fin. 5, 11, 33:

    cum versus facias, te ipsum percontor, etc.... Atque ego cum Graecos facerem, natus mare citra, Versiculos, etc.,

    Hor. S. 1, 10, 31:

    multa quippe et diversa angebant: validior per Germaniam exercitus, etc.... quos igitur anteferret? ac (i. e. similiter angebat), ne postpositi contumelia incenderentur,

    Tac. A. 1, 47:

    Minime, minime, inquit Secundus, atque adeo vellem maturius intervenisses,

    Tac. Or. 14:

    ac similiter in translatione, etc.,

    Quint. 3, 6, 77.—
    2.
    In adducing new arguments of similar force in favor of any assertion or making further statements about a subject, etc.; cf. Beier ad Cic. Off. 3, 11, 487.
    a.
    Absol.:

    maxima est enim vis vetustatis et consuetudinis: atque in ipso equo, cujus modo mentionem feci, si, etc.,

    and furthermore, and moreover, Cic. Lael. 19, 68: Atque, si natura confirmatura jus non erit, virtutes omnes tollentur, id. Leg. 1, 15, 42 B. and K. —
    b.
    Often with etiam:

    Atque alias etiam dicendi virtutes sequitur,

    Cic. Or. 40, 139:

    Atque hoc etiam animadvertendum non esse omnia etc.,

    id. de Or. 2, 61, 251; so id. Off. 1, 26, 90; id. N. D. 2, 11, 30; Col. 2, 2, 3.—
    c.
    Sometimes with quoque:

    Atque occidi quoque Potius quam cibum praehiberem,

    Plaut. Ps. 1, 3, 133; so Cic. N. D. 2, 12, 32; Col. 2, 13, 3, and Cels. 2, 3; 3, 22.—
    d.
    And even with quoque etiam: Atque ego [p. 191] quoque etiam, qui Jovis sum filius, Contagione etc., Plaut. Am. prol. 30.—
    3.
    In narration:

    aegre submoventes obvios intrare portam, qui adducebant Philopoemenem, potuerunt: atque conferta turba iter reliquum clauserat,

    Liv. 39, 49; 5, 21 fin.:

    completur caede, quantum inter castra murosque vacui fuit: ac rursus nova laborum facies,

    Tac. H. 3, 30; cf. Caes. B. C. 2, 28 fin. and 2, 29 init. —
    4.
    In introducing comparisons, atque ut, atque velut (mostly poet., esp. in epic poetry):

    Atque ut perspicio, profecto etc.,

    Plaut. Capt. 3, 4, 53:

    ac veluti magno in populo cum saepe coorta est Seditio.... Sic cunctus pelagi cecidit fragor, etc.,

    Verg. A. 1, 148; so id. G. 4, 170; id. A. 2, 626; 4, 402; 4, 441; 6, 707; 9, 59; 10, 405; 10, 707; 10, 803; 11, 809; 12, 365; 12, 521; 12, 684; 12, 715;

    12, 908: Inclinare meridiem Sentis ac, veluti stet volucris dies, Parcis deripere etc.,

    Hor. C. 3, 28, 6; Val. Fl. 6, 664;

    and so, Ac velut in nigro jactatis turbine nautis, etc.... Tale fuit nobis Manius auxilium,

    Cat. 68, 63 (for which Sillig and Muller read:

    Hic velut, etc.): Atque ut magnas utilitates adipiscimur, etc.,

    Cic. Off. 2, 5, 16:

    Atque ut hujus mores veros amicos parere non potuerunt, sic etc.,

    id. Lael. 15, 54.—
    5.
    In connecting two acts or events.
    a.
    In the order of time, and then; hence the ancient grammarians assume in it the notion of quick succession, and explain it, though improperly, as syn. with statim, ilico, without any accompanying copulative, v. Gell. 10, 29; Non. p. 530, 1 sq. (only in the poets and histt.): Atque atque accedit muros Romana juventus (the repetition of the atque represents the approach step by step), Enn. ap. Gell. and Non. l. l. (Ann. v. 527 Mull.): Quo imus una;

    ad prandium? Atque illi tacent,

    And then they are silent, Plaut. Capt. 3, 1, 19:

    Ubi cenamus? inquam, atque illi abnuunt,

    and upon this they shake their head, id. ib. 3, 1, 21; id. Ep. 2, 2, 33:

    dum circumspecto atque ego lembum conspicor,

    id. Bacch. 2, 3, 45; so id. Merc. 2, 1, 32; 2, 1, 35; id. Most. 5, 1, 9:

    lucernam forte oblitus fueram exstinguere: Atque ille exclamat derepente maximum,

    and then he suddenly exclaims, id. ib. 2, 2, 57: cui fidus Achates It comes... atque illi Misenum in litore sicco Ut venere, vident, etc., and as they thus came, etc., Verg. A. 6, 162:

    dixerat, atque illi sese deus obtulit ultro,

    Stat. Th. 9, 481; 12, 360; Liv. 26, 39, 16; Tac. H. 3, 17:

    tum Otho ingredi castra ausus: atque illum tribuni centurionesque circumsistunt,

    id. ib. 1, 82. —Sometimes with two imperatives, in order to indicate vividly the necessity of a quicker succession, or the close connection between two actions:

    cape hoc argentum atque defer,

    Ter. Heaut. 4, 7, 3:

    abi domum ac deos comprecare,

    id. Ad. 4, 5, 65:

    tace modo ac sequere hac,

    id. ib. 2, 4, 16:

    Accipe carmina atque hanc sine tempora circum hederam tibi serpere,

    Verg. E. 8, 12; id. G. 1, 40; 3, 65; 4, 330:

    Da auxilium, pater, atque haec omina firma,

    id. A. 2, 691; 3, 89; 3, 250; 3, 639; 4, 424; 9, 90; 10, 624; 11, 370.—
    b.
    In the order of thought, and so, and thus, and therefore.
    (α).
    Absol.:

    si nunc de tuo jure concessisses paululum, Atque adulescenti morigerasses,

    and so, Ter. Ad. 2, 2, 10.—
    (β).
    With ita or sic:

    Ventum deinde ad multo angustiorem rupem, atque ita rectis saxis, etc.,

    Liv. 21, 36; Plin. 10, 58, 79, § 158:

    ac sic prope innumerabiles species reperiuntur,

    Quint. 12, 10, 67.—
    c.
    Connecting conclusion and condition, so, then (cf. at, II. F.):

    non aliter quam qui adverso vix flumine lembum Remigiis subigit, si bracchia forte remisit, Atque illum praeceps prono rapit alveus amni,

    Verg. G. 1, 203 (here explained by statim by Gell. 10, 29, and by Servius, but thus its connective force is wholly lost; cf. also Forbig ad h. l. for still another explanation).—
    6.
    (As supra, I. c.) To annex a thought of more importance:

    Satisne videtur declarasse Dionysius nihil esse ei beatum, cui semper aliqui terror impendeat? atque ei ne integrum quidem erat, ut ad justitiam remigraret,

    Cic. Tusc. 5, 21, 62; id. Tull. 4:

    hoc enim spectant leges, hoc volunt, incolumem esse civium conjunctionem, quam qui dirimunt, eos morte... coercent. Atque hoc multo magis efficit ipsa naturae ratio,

    id. Off. 3, 5, 23; id. Fam. 6, 1, 4: hac spe lapsus Induciomarus... exsules damnatosque tota Gallia magnis praemiis ad se allicere coepit;

    ac tantam sibi jam iis rebus in Gallia auctoritatem comparaverat, ut, etc.,

    Caes. B. G. 5, 55 fin.; Nep. Hann. 13, 2; Quint. 1, 10, 16.—Hence also in answers, in order to confirm a question or assertion:

    Sed videone ego Pamphilippum cum fratre Epignomo? Atque is est,

    And he it is, Yes, it is he, Plaut. Stich. 4, 2, 4; so id. Truc. 1, 2, 24: Th. Mihin malum minitare? Ca. Atque edepol non minitabor, sed dabo, id. Curc. 4, 4, 15: Ch. Egon formidulosus? nemost hominum, qui vivat, minus. Th. Atque ita opust, Ter. Eun. 4, 6, 20.—
    7.
    In expressing a wish, atque utinam:

    Veritus sum arbitros, atque utinam memet possim obliscier! Att., Trag. Rel. p. 160 Rib.: videmus enim fuisse quosdam, qui idem ornate ac graviter, idem versute et subtiliter dicerent. Atque utinam in Latinis talis oratoris simulacrum reperire possemus!

    Cic. Or. 7, 22; so id. Rep. 3, 5, 8:

    Atque utinam pro decore etc.,

    Liv. 21, 41, 13:

    Atque utinam ex vobis unus etc.,

    Verg. E. 10, 35; id. A. 1, 575:

    Atque utinam... Ille vir in medio fiat amore lapis!

    Prop. 2, 9, 47; 3, 6, 15; 3, 7, 25; 3, 8, 19 al.—
    8.
    To connect an adversative clause, and often fully with tamen, and yet, notwithstanding, nevertheless.
    a.
    Absol.: Mihi quidem hercle non fit veri simile;

    atque ipsis commentum placet,

    Ter. And. 1, 3, 20 Ruhnk. (atque pro tamen, Don.):

    ego quia non rediit filius, quae cogito!... Atque ex me hic natus non est, sed ex fratre,

    id. Ad. 1, 1, 15 (Quasi dicat, ex me non est, et sic afficior: quid paterer si genuissem? Don.; cf. Acron. ap. Charis. p. 204 P.); Cic. Off. 3, 11, 48 Beier; id. Mur. 34, 71 Matth.:

    ceterum ex aliis negotiis, quae ingenio exercentur, in primis magno usui est memoria rerum gestarum... Atque ego credo fore qui, etc.,

    and yet I believe, Sall. J. 4, 1 and 3 Corte; id. C. 51, 35:

    observare principis egressum in publicum, insidere vias examina infantium futurusque populus solebat. Labor parentibus erat ostentare parvulos... Ac plerique insitis precibus surdas principis aures obstrepebant,

    Plin. Pan. 26.—
    b.
    With tamen:

    nihil praeterea est magnopere dicendum. Ac tamen, ne cui loco non videatur esse responsum, etc.,

    Cic. Fin. 2, 27, 85:

    discipulos dissimilis inter se ac tamen laudandos,

    id. de Or. 3, 10, 35; id. Rep. 1, 7, 12:

    Atque in his tamen tribus generibus etc.,

    id. Off. 3, 33, 118; id. Pis. 1, 3; 13, 30; id. Prov. Cons. 7, 16; 7, 15 fin. (cf. in reference to the last four passages Wund. Varr. Lectt. p. lviii. sq.):

    ac tamen initia fastigii etc.,

    Tac. A. 3, 29; 3, 56; 12, 56;

    14, 21: pauciores cum pluribus certasse, ac tamen fusos Germanos,

    id. H. 5, 16.—
    9.
    To connect a minor affirmative proposition (the assumptio or propositio minor of logical lang.) in syllogisms, now, but, but now (while atqui is used to connect either an affirmative or negative minor premiss: v. atqui): Scaptius quaternas postulabat. Metui, si impetrasset, ne tu ipse me amare desineres;

    ... Atque hoc tempore ipso impingit mihi epistulam etc.,

    Cic. Att. 6, 1, 6.—Sometimes the conclusion is to be supplied:

    nisi qui naturas hominum, penitus perspexerit, dicendo, quod volet, perficere non poterit. Atque totus hic locus philosophorum putatur proprius (conclusion: ergo oratorem philosophiam cognoscere oportet),

    Cic. de Or. 1, 12, 53 and 54.—
    10.
    In introducing a purpose (freq. in Cic.).
    a.
    A negative purpose, and esp. in anticipating an objection:

    Ac ne sine causa videretur edixisse,

    Cic. Phil. 3, 9, 24:

    Ac ne forte hoc magnum ac mirabile esse videatur,

    id. de Or. 2, 46, 191; so id. Fam. 5, 12, 30:

    Ac ne saepius dicendum sit,

    Cels. 8, 1:

    Ac ne forte roges, quo me duce, quo lare tuter,

    Hor. Ep. 1, 1, 13:

    Ac ne forte putes,

    id. ib. 2, 1, 208:

    Ac ne forte putes etc.,

    Ov. R. Am. 465 (Merkel, Et).—
    b.
    A positive purpose:

    Atque ut ejus diversa studia in dissimili ratione perspicere possitis, nemo etc.,

    Cic. Cat. 2, 5, 9:

    Atque ut omnes intellegant me etc.... dico etc.,

    id. Imp. Pomp. 8, 20; 2, 4; id. Clu. 14, 43; id. Sull. 2, 5; id. de Or. 3, 11, 40:

    Atque ut C. Flaminium relinquam etc.,

    id. Leg. 3, 9, 20; id. Fin. 3, 2, 4.—
    11.
    a.. In continuing a thought in assertions or narration, and, now, and now, Plaut. Aul. prol. 18: audistis, cum pro se diceret, genus orationis, etc.,... perspexistis. Atque in eo non solum ingenium ejus videbatis, etc., Cic. Cael. 19, 45; so id. de Or. 3, 32, 130; 2, 7, 27; 3, 10, 39 al.; Caes. B. G. 2, 29; Nep. Ages. 7, 3; 8, 1, Eum. 10, 3 Bremi; Tac. A. 14, 64; 15, 3; Verg. A. 9, 1; Sil. 4, 1 al.: ac si, sublato illo, depelli a vobis omne periculum judicarem, now if I, etc., Cic. Cat. 2, 2, 3:

    atque si etiam hoc natura praescribit, etc.,

    id. Off. 3, 6, 27; so Quint. 10, 1, 26; 10, 2, 8.—
    b.
    In introducing parentheses:

    vulgo credere, Penino (atque inde nomen et jugo Alpium inditum) transgressum,

    Liv. 21, 38:

    omne adfectus genus (atque ea maxime jucundam et ornatam faciunt orationem) de luxuria, etc.,

    Quint. 4, 3, 15 MSS., where Halm after Spalding reads et quae. —
    c.
    At the conclusion of a discourse (not infreq. in Cic.): Atque in primis duabus dicendi partibus qualis esset, summatim breviterque descripsimus, And thus have we, then, briefly described, etc., Cic. Or. 15, 50:

    Ac de primo quidem officii fonte diximus,

    id. Off. 1, 6, 19:

    Ac de inferenda quidem injuria satis dictum est,

    id. ib. 1, 8, 27; id. Inv. 2, 39, 115 al.—
    V.
    In particular connections and phrases.
    A.
    Unus atque alter, one and the other; alius atque alius, one and another; now this, now that:

    unae atque alterae scalae,

    Sall. J. 60, 7:

    quarum (coclearum) cum unam atque alteram, dein plures peteret,

    id. ib. 93, 2:

    unum atque alterum lacum integer perfluit,

    Tac. H. 5, 6:

    dilatisque alia atque alia de causa comitiis,

    Liv. 8, 23, 17; Col. 9, 8, 10:

    alius atque alius,

    Tac. H. 1, 46; 1, 50 (v. alius, II. D.).—Also separated by several words:

    aliud ejus subinde atque aliud facientes initium,

    Sen. Ep. 32, 2.—
    B.
    Etiam atque etiam. again and again:

    temo Stellas cogens etiam atque etiam Noctis sublime iter, Enn., Trag. Rel. p. 39 Rib.: etiam atque etiam cogita,

    Ter. Eun. 1, 1, 11:

    etiam atque etiam considera,

    Cic. Div. in Caecil. 14, 46:

    monitos eos etiam atque etiam volo,

    id. Cat. 2, 12, 27.—So, semel atque iterum, Cic. Font. 26; id. Clu. 49; Tac. Or. 17; and:

    iterum atque iterum,

    Verg. A. 8, 527; Hor. S. 1, 10, 39.—
    C.
    Huc atque illuc, hither and thither, Cic. Q. Rosc. 37; id. de Or. 1, 40, 184; Verg. A. 9, 57; Ov. M. 2, 357; 10, 376; Tac. Agr. 10; id. H. 1, 85.—
    D.
    Longe atque late, far and wide, Cic. Marcell. 29:

    atque eccum or atque eccum video, in colloquial lang.: Heus vocate huc Davom. Atque eccum,

    but here he is, Ter. And. 3, 3, 48:

    Audire vocem visa sum modo militis. Atque eccum,

    and here he is, id. Eun. 3, 2, 2; so id. Hec. 4, 1, 8.—
    E.
    Atque omnia, in making an assertion general, and so generally:

    Atque in eis omnibus, quae sunt actionis, inest quaedam vis a natura data,

    Cic. de Or. 3, 59, 223:

    quorum (verborum) descriptus ordo alias alia terminatione concluditur, atque omnia illa et prima et media verba spectare debent ad ultimum,

    id. Or. 59, 200; id. de Or. 2, 64, 257: commoda civium non divellere, atque omnes aequitate eadem continere, and so rather, etc., id. Off. 2, 23, 83:

    nihil acerbum esse, nihil crudele, atque omnia plena clementiae, humanitatis,

    id. ad Q. Fr. 1, 1, 8:

    Atque omnis vitae ratio sic constat, ut, quae probamus in aliis, facere ipsi velimus,

    Quint. 10, 2, 2.—
    F.
    With other conjunctions.
    1.
    After et:

    equidem putabam virtutem hominibus instituendo et persuadendo, non minis et vi ac metu tradi,

    Cic. de Or. 1, 58, 247:

    Magnifica vero vox et magno viro ac sapiente digna,

    id. Off. 3, 1, 1; id. Cael. 13:

    vanus aspectus et auri fulgor atque argenti,

    Tac. Agr. 32.:

    denuntiarent, ut ab Saguntinis abstineret et Carthaginem in Africam traicerent ac sociorum querimonias deferrent,

    Liv. 21, 6, 4:

    ubi et fratrem consilii ac periculi socium haberem,

    id. 21, 41, 2:

    et uti liter demum ac Latine perspicueque,

    Quint. 8, 3, 3:

    Nam et subtili plenius aliquid atque subtilius et vehementi remissius atque vehementius invenitur,

    id. 12, 10, 67. —
    2.
    After que, as in Gr. te kai: litterisque ac laudibus aeternare, Varr. ap. Non. p. 75, 20:

    submoverique atque in castra redigi,

    Liv. 26, 10:

    terrorem caedemque ac fugam fecere,

    id. 21, 52:

    mus Sub terris posuitque domos atque horrea fecit,

    Verg. G. 1, 182; 3, 434; id. A. 8, 486.—
    3.
    Before et:

    caelum ipsum ac mare et silvas circum spectantes,

    Tac. Agr. 32.—
    4.
    After neque (only in the poets and post - Aug. prose):

    nec clavis nec canis atque calix,

    Mart. 1, 32, 4: naturam Oceani atque aestus [p. 192] neque quaerere hujus operis est, ac multi retulere, Tac. Agr. 10:

    mediocritatem pristinam neque dissimulavit umquam ac frequenter etiam prae se tulit,

    Suet. Vesp. 12.—
    G.
    Atque repeated, esp. in arch. Lat.: Scio solere plerisque hominibus in rebus secundis atque prolixis atque prosperis animum excellere atque superbiam atque ferociam augescere atque crescere, Cato ap. Gell. 7, 3: Dicere possum quibus villae atque aedes aedificatae atque expolitae maximo opere citro atque ebore atque pavimentis Poenicis stent, Cato ap. Fest. p. 242 Mull.:

    atque ut C. Flamininum atque ea, quae jam prisca videntur, propter vetustatem relinquam,

    Cic. Leg. 3, 9, 20:

    omnem dignitatem tuam in virtute atque in rebus gestis atque in tua gravitate positam existimare,

    id. Fam. 1, 5, 8.—Esp. freq. in enumerations in the poets:

    Haec atque illa dies atque alia atque alia,

    Cat. 68, 152:

    Mavortia tellus Atque Getae atque Hebrus,

    Verg. G. 4, 463:

    Clioque et Beroe atque Ephyre Atque Opis et Asia,

    id. ib. 4, 343.—And sometimes forming a double connective, both— and = et—et:

    Multus ut in terras deplueretque lapis: Atque tubas atque arma ferunt crepitantia caelo Audita,

    Tib. 2, 5, 73:

    complexa sui corpus miserabile nati Atque deos atque astra vocat crudelia mater,

    Verg. E. 5, 23; Sil. 1, 93; v. Forbig ad Verg. l. l.
    ► Atque regularly stands at the beginning of its sentence or clause or before the word it connects, but in poetry it sometimes, like et and at, stands:
    a.
    In the second place:

    Jamque novum terrae stupeant lucescere solem, Altius atque cadant imbres,

    Verg. E. 6, 38 Rib., ubi v. Forbig.:

    Accipite ergo animis atque haec mea figite dicta,

    id. A. 3, 250, and 10, 104 (animis may, however, here be taken with Accipite, as in id. ib. 5, 304):

    Esto beata, funus atque imagines Ducant triumphales tuum,

    Hor. Epod. 8, 11; id. S. 1, 5, 4; 1, 6, 111; 1, 7, 12 (ubi v. Fritzsche).—
    b.
    In the third place:

    quod pubes hedera virente Gaudeant pulla magis atque myrto,

    Hor. C. 1, 25, 18; cf. at fin. (Vid. more upon this word in Hand, Turs. I. pp. 452-513.)

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > adque

  • 8 atque

    atque or āc (atque is used before vowels and consonants, ac, in class. lang., only before consonants; v. infra, I.), conj. [at has regularly in the compound atque a continuative, as in atqui it has an adversative force; pr. and further, and besides, and also; cf. in Gr. pros de, pros de eti, eti kai, eti de, and te kai; v. at init., and for the change of form atque, ac, cf. neque, nec; in MSS. and inscriptions sometimes written adque, and sometimes by confusion atqui ], a copulative particle, and also, and besides, and even, and (indicating a close internal connection between single words or whole clauses; while et designates an external connection of diff. objects with each other, v. et; syn.: et, -que, autem, praeterea, porro, ad hoc, ad haec).
    I.
    In joining single words, which is its most common use.
    A.
    In gen. (The following representation is based on a collection of all the instances of the use of atque and ac in Cic. Imp. Pomp., Phil. 2, Tusc. 1, and Off. 1; in Caes. B. G. 1 and 2; in Sall. C.; and in Liv. 21; and wherever in the account either author or work is not cited, there atque or ac does not occur.)
    1.
    The form atque.
    a.
    Before vowels and h. —Before a (very freq.):

    sociorum atque amicorum,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 2, 6; 3, 7; id. Phil. 2, 13, 33; id. Tusc. 1, 34, 122; Caes. B. G. 1, 2; 1, 18; 1, 26; 2, 14; Sall. C. 5, 8; 7, 5; Liv. 21, 3; 21, 12.—Before e (very freq.):

    deposci atque expeti,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 2, 5; 6, 16; 10, 28; id. Phil, 2, 21, 51; 2, 21, 52; id. Tusc. 1, 20, 46; Caes. B. G. 1, 6; 1, 15; 1, 18; 2, 19; Sall. C. 14, 6; 49, 4; Liv. 21, 4; 21, 37.—Before i (very freq.):

    excitare atque inflammare,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 2, 6; 3, 7; 7, 18; id. Phil. 2, 15, 37; 2, 21, 50; id. Tusc. 1, 20, 46; 1, 40, 97; Caes. B. G. 1, 17; 1, 20; 1, 22; 2, 1 bis; Sall. C. 2, 3; 3, 5; 14, 4; Liv. 21, 4; 21, 6; 21, 10.—Before o (freq. in Cic.):

    honestissimus atque ornatissimus,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 7, 17; 8, 21; 11, 31; id. Off. 1, 25, 86; 1, 27, 94; Caes. B. G. 1, 40; 2, 14; Sall. C. 10, 6; Liv. 21, 8.—Before u (very rare), Cic. Imp. Pomp. 3, 7; 5, 11; 6, 15; Caes. B. G. 1, 26; 2, 20; Sall. C. 31, 6; 42, 1.—Before h (not infreq.):

    Sertorianae atque Hispaniensis,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 4, 10; 7, 19; id. Tusc. 1, 28, 69; id. Off. 1, 24, 87; Caes. B. G. 1, 19; 2, 9; 2, 10; Sall. C. 6, 1; 12, 2; Liv. 21, 37.—
    b.
    Before consonants.—Before b (very rare):

    Gallorum atque Belgarum,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 6; so,

    Cassius atque Brutus,

    Tac. A. 3, 76.—Before c (infreq. in Cic., freq. in Sall.):

    in portubus atque custodiis,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 6, 16; 8, 21; id. Phil. 2, 8, 18; id. Tusc. 1, 18, 42; id. Off. 1, 25, 88; Sall. C. 2, 3; 7, 4; 16, 3; 26, 4; 29, 3.—Before d (infreq.):

    superatam esse atque depressam,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 8, 21; id. Phil. 2, 44, 114: id. Off. 1, 6, 19; 1, 25, 85; 1, 33, 119; Sall. C. 4, 1; 20, 7; 20, 10.—Before f (infreq.):

    vitiis atque flagitiis,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 30, 72; id. Off. 1, 28, 98; 1, 28, 100; Caes. B. G. 1, 2; Sall. C. 1, 4; 2, 9; 11, 2.— Before g (very rare):

    dignitate atque gloria,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 4, 11; 5, 12:

    virtute atque gloria,

    Sall. C. 3, 2; 61, 9.—Before j (very rare):

    labore atque justitia,

    Sall. C. 10, 1; 29, 3.—Before l (rare):

    hilari atque laeto,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 42, 100; id. Off. 1, 19, 64; Sall. C. 14, 3; 21, 2; 28, 4.—Before m (infreq. in Cic., once in Caes.):

    multae atque magnae,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 9, 23; 17, 50; id. Phil. 2, 39, 100; id. Off. 1, 29, 103; 1, 31, 110; Caes. B. G. 1, 34; Sall. C. 18, 4; 31, 7; 34, 1; 51, 1.—Before n (infreq.):

    adventu atque nomine,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 5, 13; 20, 60; id. Off. 1, 28, 101; Sall. C. 2, 2 bis. —Before p (infreq. in Cic.):

    magna atque praeclara,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 4, 10; 11, 31; 16, 48; id. Off. 1, 44, 156; Sall. C. 4, 1; 4, 4; 16, 2; 20, 3.—Before q (does not occur).—Before r (rare):

    se conlegit atque recreavit,

    Cic. Phil. 2, 24, 58.— Before s (rare in Cic.):

    provinciarum atque sociorum,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 1, 24, 71; id. Off. 1, 9, 30; 1, 21, 72; Sall. C. 2, 5; 2, 7; 6, 1.— Before t (infreq.):

    parietum atque tectorum,

    Cic. Phil. 2, 28, 69; id. Tusc. 1, 24, 57; id. Off. 1, 35, 126; Sall. C. 42, 2; 50, 3; 51, 38.—Before v (infreq.):

    gravis atque vehemens,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 9, 23; 9, 25; id. Tusc. 1, 23, 54; Sall. C. 1, 1; 12, 3; 45, 4; Liv. 21, 4; 21, 30.—
    2.
    The form ac before consonants.—Before b (very rare):

    sentientes ac bene meritos,

    Cic. Off. 1, 41, 149:

    feri ac barbari,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 31 and 33.—Before c (very rare):

    liberis ac conjugibus,

    Liv. 21, 30:

    Romae ac circa urbem,

    id. 21, 62.—Before d (freq. in Cic.):

    periculum ac discrimen,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 5, 12; 9, 23; 12, 33; id. Tusc. 1, 17, 40; 1, 28, 69; id. Off. 1, 14, 42:

    usus ac disciplina,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 40; 2, 31; Sall. C. 5, 4; 5, 8; 28, 1; Liv. 21, 10; 21, 18; 21, 19.—Before f (infreq.):

    opima est ac fertilis,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 6, 14; 7, 19; id. Tusc. 1, 1, 2; 1, 27, 66; id. Off. 1, 29, 103:

    potentissimos ac firmissimos,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 3; 1, 48; 2, 12;

    2, 13: pessuma ac flagitiosissima,

    Sall. C. 5, 9; Liv. 21, 17; 21, 20.—Before g (does not occur).—Before j (very rare):

    nobilitatis ac juventutis,

    Cic. Phil. 2, 15, 37.—Before l (not infreq. in Liv.), Cic. Imp. Pomp. 4, 9; 23, 66; id. Phil. 2, 22, 54; Caes. B. G. 1, 12; 1, 23; 2, 23; Liv. 21, 13; 21, 14; 21, 35.—Before m (not infreq. in Cic.):

    terrore ac metu,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 9, 23; 18, 54 bis; 20, 59; id. Tusc. 1, 40, 95; id. Off. 1, 30, 106; Caes. B. G. 1, 39; 2, 14; Sall. C. 2, 4; 10, 1; Liv. 21, 8; 21, 60.—Before n (not infreq. in Cic.):

    insedit ac nimis inveteravit,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 3, 7:

    gentes ac nationes,

    id. ib. 11, 31; 12, 35 bis; id. Phil. 2, 21, 50; id. Tusc. 1, 21, 48; Caes. B. G. 1, 20; 2, 28; Liv. 21, 32.—Before p (not infreq. in Cic., Caes., and Liv.):

    celeberrimum ac plenissimum,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 12, 33; 12, 35; 13, 36; id. Phil. 2, 15, 39; id. Tusc. 1, 17, 41; id. Off. 1, 20, 68; Caes. B. G. 1, 18; 1, 20; 2, 13; 2, 19; Sall. C. 5, 9; Liv. 21, 25; 21, 34; 21, 35.—Before q (does not occur).—Before r (infreq.):

    firmamenti ac roboris,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 4, 10; 8, 21; 15, 45; id. Off. 1, 5, 15; Caes. B. G. 1, 25; Liv. 21, 41; 21, 44.—Before s (freq. in Cic. and Liv., infreq. in Caes.):

    vectigalibus ac sociis,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 2, 4; 4, 10; 11, 30; id. Phil. 2, 27, 66; Caes. B. G. 1, 25; 1, 31; 1, 33; 2, 24; Liv. 21, 4; 21, 33 bis; 21, 36.—Before t (infreq. in Cic., freq. in Liv.):

    tantis rebus ac tanto bello,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 10, 27 bis; 19, 56; 20, 59; Caes. B. G. 1, 26; 1, 39; 2, 6; Liv. 21, 7 ter; 21, 10; 21, 14; 21, 25.—Before v (not in Cic., only once in Caes. and Sall., but freq. in Liv.):

    armatos ac victores,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 40:

    inconsulte ac veluti etc.,

    Sall. C. 42, 2:

    opera ac vineae,

    Liv. 21, 7; 21, 22; 21, 40; 21, 43. —(So in the phrases treated below: atque adeo, atque alter or alius, atque eccum, atque eo, atque etiam, atque illuc, atque is or hic, atque iterum, atque omnia, atque ut, atque late, atque sic, atque velut, but ac ne, ac si, and ac tamen).—With simul:

    Britannorum acies in speciem simul ac terrorem editioribus locis constiterat,

    Tac. Agr. 35:

    in se simul atque in Herculem,

    id. G. 34:

    suos prosequitur simul ac deponit,

    id. ib. 30; so,

    sociis pariter atque hostibus,

    id. H. 4, 73:

    innocentes ac noxios juxta cadere,

    id. A. 1, 48.—Hence, sometimes syn. with et—et, ut—ita, aeque ac; both—and, as—so, as well—as, as well as: hodie sero ac nequiquam [p. 190] voles, Ter. Heaut. 2, 3, 103 (cf. Cic. Quinct. 25, 79:

    verum et sero et nequidquam pudet): copia sententiarum atque verborum,

    Cic. Cael. 19, 45:

    omnia honesta atque inhonesta,

    Sall. C. 30, 4:

    nobiles atque ignobiles,

    id. ib. 20, 7:

    caloris ac frigoris patientia par,

    Liv. 21, 4; 6, 41; Vell. 2, 127:

    vir bonus et prudens dici delector ego ac tu,

    Hor. Ep. 1, 16, 32.—
    B.
    Esp.
    a.
    In a hendiadys:

    utinam isto animo atque virtute in summa re publica versari quam in municipali maluisset,

    with this virtuous feeling, Cic. Leg. 3, 16, 36:

    de conplexu ejus ac sinu,

    of his bosom embrace, id. Cat. 2, 10, 22:

    me eadem, quae ceteros, fama atque invidia vexabat, i. e. invidiosa fama,

    Sall. C. 3 fin.:

    clamore atque adsensu,

    shout of applause, Liv. 21, 3.—
    b.
    In joining to the idea of a preceding word one more important, and indeed, and even, and especially (v. Kritz ad Sall. J. 4, 3).
    (α).
    Absol.: Pa. Nempe tu istic ais esse erilem concubinam? Sc. Atque arguo me etc., yea and I maintain that I etc., Plaut. Mil. 2, 3, 66: Ph. Tun vidisti? Sc. Atque his quidem oculis, id. ib. 2, 4, 15: Ps. Ecquid habet is homo aceti in pectore? Ch. Atque acidissimi, id. Ps. 2, 4, 49; so id. Bacch. 3, 6, 9; id. Men. 1, 2, 40: Py. Cognoscitne (ea)? Ch. Ac memoriter, Ter. Eun. 5, 3, 6:

    Faciam boni tibi aliquid pro ista re ac lubens,

    and with a good will, id. Heaut. 4, 5, 15:

    rem difficilem (dii immortales) atque omnium difficillimam,

    and indeed, Cic. Or. 16, 52:

    magna diis immortalibus habenda est gratia atque huic ipsi Jovi Statori, etc.,

    and especially, id. Cat. 1, 5, 11:

    hebeti ingenio atque nullo,

    and in fact, id. Tusc. 5, 15, 45:

    ex plurimis periculis et insidiis atque ex media morte,

    and even, id. Cat. 4, 9:

    fratre meo atque eodem propinquo suo interfecto,

    and at the same time, Sall. J. 14, 11:

    intra moenia atque in sinu urbis,

    id. C. 52, 35.—
    (β).
    With adeo, and that too, and even:

    intra moenia atque adeo in senatu,

    Cic. Cat. 1, 2, 5:

    qui in urbe remanserunt atque adeo qui contra urbis salutem etc.,

    id. ib. 2, 12, 27:

    insto atque urgeo, insector, posco atque adeo flagito crimen,

    id. Planc. 19 fin.:

    non petentem atque adeo etiam absentem,

    Liv. 10, 5.—And with autem also added:

    atque adeo autem quor etc.,

    Ter. Eun. 5, 4, 42.—
    (γ).
    With etiam:

    id jam populare atque etiam plausibile factum est,

    and also, Cic. Div. in Caecil. 3, 8:

    ne Verginio commeatum dent atque etiam in custodia habeant,

    Liv. 3, 46.—
    (δ).
    With the dem. pron. hic, is:

    negotium magnum est navigare atque id mense Quintili,

    and besides, and that, and that too, Cic. Att. 5, 12; 1, 14:

    maximis defixis trabibus atque eis praeacutis,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 27:

    Asseres pedum XII. cuspidibus praefixis atque hi maximis ballistis missi,

    id. ib. 2, 2:

    duabus missis subsidio cohortibus a Caesare, atque his primis legionum duarum,

    id. B. G. 5, 15; id. B. C. 3, 70:

    flumen uno omnino loco pedibus atque hoc aegre transiri potest,

    id. B. G. 5, 18:

    ad celeritatem onerandi subductionesque paulo facit humiliores... atque id eo magis, quod, etc.,

    id. ib. 5, 1; cf. without id (perh. to avoid the repetition of the pron.): qua (sc. virtute) nostri milites facile superabant, atque eo magis, quod, etc., and that the more because etc., id. ib. 3, 8 fin.:

    dicendi artem apta trepidatione occultans atque eo validior,

    Tac. H. 1, 69; 2, 37; id. A. 4, 22; 4, 46.—
    II.
    In comparisons.
    A.
    Of equality (Rudd. II. p. 94; Zumpt, § 340); with par, idem, item, aequus, similis, juxta, talis, totidem, etc., as: et nota, quod ex hujus modi structura Graeca (sc. homoios kai, etc.) frequenter Latini ac et atque in significatione similitudinis accipiunt, Prisc. pp. 1192 and 1193 P.; cf. Gell. 10, 29; Lidd. and Scott, s. v. kai, III.:

    si parem sententiam hic habet ac formam,

    Plaut. Mil. 4, 6, 36: quom opulenti loquuntur pariter atque ignobiles, Enn. ap. Gell. 11, 4:

    Ecastor pariter hoc atque alias res soles,

    Plaut. Men. 5, 1, 52:

    pariter nunc opera me adjuves ac re dudum opitulata es,

    Ter. Phorm. 5, 3, 3:

    neque enim mihi par ratio cum Lucilio est ac tecum fuit,

    Cic. N. D. 3, 1, 3:

    parique eum atque illos imperio esse jussit,

    Nep. Dat. 3, 5:

    magistrum equitum pari ac dictatorem imperio fugavit,

    id. Hann. 5, 3:

    pariter patribus ac plebi carus,

    Liv. 2, 33: nam et vita est eadem et animus te erga idem ac fuit, Ter. Heaut. 2, 3, 24:

    In hanc argumentationes ex eisdem locis sumendae sunt atque in causam negotialem,

    Cic. Inv. 2, 23, 70:

    equi quod alii sunt ad rem militarem idonei, alii ad vecturam... non item sunt spectandi atque habendi,

    Varr. R. R. 2, 7, 15; id. L. L. 10, § 74 Mull.:

    cum ex provincia populi Romani aequam partem tu tibi sumpseris atque populo Romano miseris,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 19:

    Modo ne in aequo (jure) hostes apud vos sint ac nos socii,

    Liv. 39, 37 (exs. with aeque; v. aeque, d); Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 83 fin.:

    et simili jure tu ulcisceris patrui mortem atque ille persequeretur fratris sui, si, etc.,

    id. Rab. Perd. 5; id. Phil. 1, 4; id. Agr. 1, 4 fin.:

    similem pavorem inde ac fugam fore, ac bello Gallico fuerit,

    Liv. 6, 28; Col. 5, 7, 3:

    contendant, se juxta hieme atque aestate bella gerere posse,

    Liv. 5, 6; cf. Drak. ad Liv. 1, 54, 9:

    faxo eum tali mactatum, atque hic est, infortunio,

    Ter. Phorm. 5, 9, 39; Cic. Vatin. 4, 10:

    cum totidem navibus atque erat profectus,

    Nep. Milt. 7, 4.—
    B.
    Of difference; with alius and its derivv., with dissimile, contra, contrarius, secus, etc., than:

    illi sunt alio ingenio atque tu,

    other than, different from, Plaut. Ps. 4, 7, 35 al.; v. the passages under alius, I. B. a:

    aliter tuum amorem atque est accipis,

    Ter. Heaut. 2, 3, 23 al.; v. the passages under aliter, 1. a.; cf.

    also aliorsum, II., and aliusmodi: quod est non dissimile atque ire in Solonium,

    Cic. Att. 2, 3:

    simulacrum in excelso collocare et, contra atque ante fuerat, ad orientem convertere,

    id. Cat. 3, 8, 20:

    vides, omnia fere contra ac dicta sint evenisse,

    id. Div. 2, 24 fin.; id. Verr. 2, 1, 46:

    qui versantur retro, contrario motu atque caelum,

    id. Rep. 6, 17, 17:

    membra paulo secus a me atque ab illo partita,

    id. de Or. 3, 30, 119:

    cujus ego salutem non secus ac meam tueri debeo,

    id. Planc. 1 fin. al.; v. contra, contrarius, secus, etc.—
    C.
    Sometimes, in cases of equality or difference, atque with ut or ac with si (with aliter affirm. Cic. appears to connect only atque ut, not ac si;

    once, however, non aliter, ac si,

    Cic. Att. 13, 51;

    v. aliter, 1. b.): pariter hoc fit atque ut alia facta sunt,

    Plaut. Am. 4, 1, 11:

    nec fallaciam Astutiorem ullus fecit poeta atque Ut haec est fabre facta a nobis,

    id. Cas. 5, 1, 6 sqq.:

    quod iste aliter atque ut edixerat decrevisset,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 46:

    et qui suos casus aliter ferunt atque ut auctores aliis ipsi fuerunt, etc.,

    id. Tusc. 3, 30, 73:

    si mentionem fecerint, quo aliter ager possideretur atque ut ex legibus Juliis,

    id. Att. 2, 18, 2; 16, 13, c; cf. Wopk. Lect. Tull. 1, 15, p. 118; Dig. 43, 13, 11:

    Egnatii absentis rem ut tueare, aeque a te peto ac si mea negotia essent,

    just as if, Cic. Fam. 13, 43:

    tu autem similiter facis ac si me roges, etc.,

    id. N. D. 3, 3, 8:

    reliquis officiis, juxta ac si meus frater esset, sustentavit,

    id. Post. Red. in Sen. 8, 20:

    quod dandum est amicitiae, large dabitur a me non secus ac si meus esset frater,

    id. Mur. 4 fin.:

    haec sunt, tribuni, consilia vestra, non, hercule, dissimilia, ac si quis, etc.,

    Liv. 5, 5 fin. al. —
    D.
    More rare with nimis, in partem, pro eo, etc.;

    in Plaut. also with mutare or demutare = aliud esse: nimis bellus, atque ut esse maxume optabam, locus,

    Plaut. Bacch. 4, 4, 73:

    haud centensumam Partem dixi atque, otium rei si sit, possim expromere,

    id. Mil. 3, 1, 168: sane quam pro eo ac debui graviter molesteque tuli, just as was my duty, Sulp. ap. Cic. Fam. 4, 5:

    debeo sperare, omnes deos, qui huic urbi praesident, pro eo mihi, ac mereor, relaturos gratiam esse,

    Cic. Cat. 4, 2:

    pro eo, ac si concessum sit, concludere oportebit argumentationem,

    id. Inv. 1, 32, 54:

    non possum ego non aut proxime atque ille aut etiam aeque laborare,

    nearly the same as he, id. Fam. 9, 13, 2:

    neque se luna quoquam mutat atque uti exorta est semel,

    Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 118:

    num quid videtur demutare atque ut quidem Dixi?

    id. Mil. 4, 3, 37.—
    E.
    Sometimes the word indicating comparison (aeque, tantopere, etc.) is to be supplied from the connection (in the class. per. perh. used only once by Cassius in epist. style):

    nebula haud est mollis atque hujus est,

    Plaut. Cas. 4, 4, 21:

    quem esse amicum ratus sum atque ipsus sum mihi,

    id. Bacch. 3, 6, 20:

    quae suco caret atque putris pumex,

    Priap. 32, 7 (Mull., est putusque): digne ac mereor commendatus esse, Cass. ap. Cic. Fam. 12, 13; Dig. 2, 14, 4; 19, 2, 54.—
    F.
    Poet. or in post-Aug. prose with comparatives (for quam), than:

    amicior mihi nullus vivit atque is est,

    Plaut. Merc. 5, 2, 56:

    non Apollinis magis verum atque hoc responsum est,

    Ter. And. 4, 2, 15 Ruhnk.:

    Illi non minus ac tibi Pectore uritur intimo Flamma,

    Cat. 61, 172:

    haud minus ac jussi faciunt,

    Verg. A. 3, 561:

    Non tuus hoc capiet venter plus ac meus,

    Hor. S. 1, 1, 46 Bentl. and Heind. (cf. infra:

    nihilo plus accipias quam Qui nil portarit): qui peccas minus atque ego,

    id. ib. 2, 7, 96:

    Artius atque hedera procera adstringitur ilex,

    id. Epod. 15, 5; Suet. Caes. 14 Ruhnk. —
    G.
    In the comparison of two periods of time, most freq. with simul (v. examples under simul); ante- or post-class. with principio, statim:

    principio Atque animus ephebis aetate exiit,

    as soon as, Plaut. Merc. 1, 1, 40:

    judici enim, statim atque factus est, omnium rerum officium incumbit,

    Dig. 21, 1, 25:

    quamvis, statim atque intercessit, mulier competierat,

    ib. 16, 1, 24.—
    III.
    To connect a negative clause which explains or corrects what precedes; hence sometimes with potius (class.; in Cic. very freq., but rare in the poets), and not, and not rather.
    a.
    Absol.:

    Decipiam ac non veniam,

    Ter. Heaut. 4, 4, 6:

    si fidem habeat,... ac non id metuat, ne etc.,

    id. Eun. 1, 2, 60:

    perparvam vero controversiam dicis, ac non eam, quae dirimat omnia,

    Cic. Leg. 1, 20, 54:

    quasi nunc id agatur, quis ex tanta multitudine occiderit, ac non hoc quaeratur, eum, etc.,

    id. Rosc. Am. 33:

    si (mundum) tuum ac non deorum immortalium domicilium putes, nonne plane desipere videare?

    id. N. D. 2, 6, 17:

    nemo erat, qui illum reum ac non miliens condemnatum arbitraretur,

    id. Att. 1, 16:

    si hoc dissuadere est, ac non disturbare ac pervertere,

    id. Agr. 2, 37, 101:

    si res verba desideraret ac non pro se ipsa loqueretur,

    id. Fam. 3, 2 fin.: hoc te exspectare tempus tibi turpe est ac non ei rei sapientia tua te occurrere, Serv. ap. Cic. Fam. 4, 5, 6:

    velut destituti ac non qui ipsi destituissent,

    Liv. 8, 27; 7, 3 fin.:

    si mihi mea sententia proferenda ac non disertissimorum,

    Tac. Or. 1.—
    b.
    With potius:

    Quam ob rem scriba deducet, ac non potius mulio, qui advexit?

    Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 79 (B. and K., et):

    quis (eum) ita aspexit, ut perditum civem, ac non potius ut importunissimum hostem?

    id. Cat. 2, 6, 12.— Pliny the elder commonly employs in this sense atque non, not ac non:

    concremasse ea (scrinia) optuma fide atque non legisse,

    Plin. 7, 25, 26, § 94; 22, 24, 50, § 108; 29, 2, 9, § 29; 27, 9, 55, § 78; 31, 7, 39, § 73 et saep. —
    IV.
    In connecting clauses and beginning periods.
    1.
    In gen., and, and so, and even, and too: Pamph. Antiquam adeo tuam venustatem obtines. Bacch. Ac tu ecastor morem antiquom atque ingenium obtines, And you too, Ter. Hec. 5, 4, 20:

    atque illi (philosopho) ordiri placet etc.,

    Cic. de Or. 3, 47, 183: Africanus indigens mei? Minime hercle. Ac ne ego quidem illius, And I indeed not, etc., id. Lael. 9, 30; id. Fin. 5, 11, 33:

    cum versus facias, te ipsum percontor, etc.... Atque ego cum Graecos facerem, natus mare citra, Versiculos, etc.,

    Hor. S. 1, 10, 31:

    multa quippe et diversa angebant: validior per Germaniam exercitus, etc.... quos igitur anteferret? ac (i. e. similiter angebat), ne postpositi contumelia incenderentur,

    Tac. A. 1, 47:

    Minime, minime, inquit Secundus, atque adeo vellem maturius intervenisses,

    Tac. Or. 14:

    ac similiter in translatione, etc.,

    Quint. 3, 6, 77.—
    2.
    In adducing new arguments of similar force in favor of any assertion or making further statements about a subject, etc.; cf. Beier ad Cic. Off. 3, 11, 487.
    a.
    Absol.:

    maxima est enim vis vetustatis et consuetudinis: atque in ipso equo, cujus modo mentionem feci, si, etc.,

    and furthermore, and moreover, Cic. Lael. 19, 68: Atque, si natura confirmatura jus non erit, virtutes omnes tollentur, id. Leg. 1, 15, 42 B. and K. —
    b.
    Often with etiam:

    Atque alias etiam dicendi virtutes sequitur,

    Cic. Or. 40, 139:

    Atque hoc etiam animadvertendum non esse omnia etc.,

    id. de Or. 2, 61, 251; so id. Off. 1, 26, 90; id. N. D. 2, 11, 30; Col. 2, 2, 3.—
    c.
    Sometimes with quoque:

    Atque occidi quoque Potius quam cibum praehiberem,

    Plaut. Ps. 1, 3, 133; so Cic. N. D. 2, 12, 32; Col. 2, 13, 3, and Cels. 2, 3; 3, 22.—
    d.
    And even with quoque etiam: Atque ego [p. 191] quoque etiam, qui Jovis sum filius, Contagione etc., Plaut. Am. prol. 30.—
    3.
    In narration:

    aegre submoventes obvios intrare portam, qui adducebant Philopoemenem, potuerunt: atque conferta turba iter reliquum clauserat,

    Liv. 39, 49; 5, 21 fin.:

    completur caede, quantum inter castra murosque vacui fuit: ac rursus nova laborum facies,

    Tac. H. 3, 30; cf. Caes. B. C. 2, 28 fin. and 2, 29 init. —
    4.
    In introducing comparisons, atque ut, atque velut (mostly poet., esp. in epic poetry):

    Atque ut perspicio, profecto etc.,

    Plaut. Capt. 3, 4, 53:

    ac veluti magno in populo cum saepe coorta est Seditio.... Sic cunctus pelagi cecidit fragor, etc.,

    Verg. A. 1, 148; so id. G. 4, 170; id. A. 2, 626; 4, 402; 4, 441; 6, 707; 9, 59; 10, 405; 10, 707; 10, 803; 11, 809; 12, 365; 12, 521; 12, 684; 12, 715;

    12, 908: Inclinare meridiem Sentis ac, veluti stet volucris dies, Parcis deripere etc.,

    Hor. C. 3, 28, 6; Val. Fl. 6, 664;

    and so, Ac velut in nigro jactatis turbine nautis, etc.... Tale fuit nobis Manius auxilium,

    Cat. 68, 63 (for which Sillig and Muller read:

    Hic velut, etc.): Atque ut magnas utilitates adipiscimur, etc.,

    Cic. Off. 2, 5, 16:

    Atque ut hujus mores veros amicos parere non potuerunt, sic etc.,

    id. Lael. 15, 54.—
    5.
    In connecting two acts or events.
    a.
    In the order of time, and then; hence the ancient grammarians assume in it the notion of quick succession, and explain it, though improperly, as syn. with statim, ilico, without any accompanying copulative, v. Gell. 10, 29; Non. p. 530, 1 sq. (only in the poets and histt.): Atque atque accedit muros Romana juventus (the repetition of the atque represents the approach step by step), Enn. ap. Gell. and Non. l. l. (Ann. v. 527 Mull.): Quo imus una;

    ad prandium? Atque illi tacent,

    And then they are silent, Plaut. Capt. 3, 1, 19:

    Ubi cenamus? inquam, atque illi abnuunt,

    and upon this they shake their head, id. ib. 3, 1, 21; id. Ep. 2, 2, 33:

    dum circumspecto atque ego lembum conspicor,

    id. Bacch. 2, 3, 45; so id. Merc. 2, 1, 32; 2, 1, 35; id. Most. 5, 1, 9:

    lucernam forte oblitus fueram exstinguere: Atque ille exclamat derepente maximum,

    and then he suddenly exclaims, id. ib. 2, 2, 57: cui fidus Achates It comes... atque illi Misenum in litore sicco Ut venere, vident, etc., and as they thus came, etc., Verg. A. 6, 162:

    dixerat, atque illi sese deus obtulit ultro,

    Stat. Th. 9, 481; 12, 360; Liv. 26, 39, 16; Tac. H. 3, 17:

    tum Otho ingredi castra ausus: atque illum tribuni centurionesque circumsistunt,

    id. ib. 1, 82. —Sometimes with two imperatives, in order to indicate vividly the necessity of a quicker succession, or the close connection between two actions:

    cape hoc argentum atque defer,

    Ter. Heaut. 4, 7, 3:

    abi domum ac deos comprecare,

    id. Ad. 4, 5, 65:

    tace modo ac sequere hac,

    id. ib. 2, 4, 16:

    Accipe carmina atque hanc sine tempora circum hederam tibi serpere,

    Verg. E. 8, 12; id. G. 1, 40; 3, 65; 4, 330:

    Da auxilium, pater, atque haec omina firma,

    id. A. 2, 691; 3, 89; 3, 250; 3, 639; 4, 424; 9, 90; 10, 624; 11, 370.—
    b.
    In the order of thought, and so, and thus, and therefore.
    (α).
    Absol.:

    si nunc de tuo jure concessisses paululum, Atque adulescenti morigerasses,

    and so, Ter. Ad. 2, 2, 10.—
    (β).
    With ita or sic:

    Ventum deinde ad multo angustiorem rupem, atque ita rectis saxis, etc.,

    Liv. 21, 36; Plin. 10, 58, 79, § 158:

    ac sic prope innumerabiles species reperiuntur,

    Quint. 12, 10, 67.—
    c.
    Connecting conclusion and condition, so, then (cf. at, II. F.):

    non aliter quam qui adverso vix flumine lembum Remigiis subigit, si bracchia forte remisit, Atque illum praeceps prono rapit alveus amni,

    Verg. G. 1, 203 (here explained by statim by Gell. 10, 29, and by Servius, but thus its connective force is wholly lost; cf. also Forbig ad h. l. for still another explanation).—
    6.
    (As supra, I. c.) To annex a thought of more importance:

    Satisne videtur declarasse Dionysius nihil esse ei beatum, cui semper aliqui terror impendeat? atque ei ne integrum quidem erat, ut ad justitiam remigraret,

    Cic. Tusc. 5, 21, 62; id. Tull. 4:

    hoc enim spectant leges, hoc volunt, incolumem esse civium conjunctionem, quam qui dirimunt, eos morte... coercent. Atque hoc multo magis efficit ipsa naturae ratio,

    id. Off. 3, 5, 23; id. Fam. 6, 1, 4: hac spe lapsus Induciomarus... exsules damnatosque tota Gallia magnis praemiis ad se allicere coepit;

    ac tantam sibi jam iis rebus in Gallia auctoritatem comparaverat, ut, etc.,

    Caes. B. G. 5, 55 fin.; Nep. Hann. 13, 2; Quint. 1, 10, 16.—Hence also in answers, in order to confirm a question or assertion:

    Sed videone ego Pamphilippum cum fratre Epignomo? Atque is est,

    And he it is, Yes, it is he, Plaut. Stich. 4, 2, 4; so id. Truc. 1, 2, 24: Th. Mihin malum minitare? Ca. Atque edepol non minitabor, sed dabo, id. Curc. 4, 4, 15: Ch. Egon formidulosus? nemost hominum, qui vivat, minus. Th. Atque ita opust, Ter. Eun. 4, 6, 20.—
    7.
    In expressing a wish, atque utinam:

    Veritus sum arbitros, atque utinam memet possim obliscier! Att., Trag. Rel. p. 160 Rib.: videmus enim fuisse quosdam, qui idem ornate ac graviter, idem versute et subtiliter dicerent. Atque utinam in Latinis talis oratoris simulacrum reperire possemus!

    Cic. Or. 7, 22; so id. Rep. 3, 5, 8:

    Atque utinam pro decore etc.,

    Liv. 21, 41, 13:

    Atque utinam ex vobis unus etc.,

    Verg. E. 10, 35; id. A. 1, 575:

    Atque utinam... Ille vir in medio fiat amore lapis!

    Prop. 2, 9, 47; 3, 6, 15; 3, 7, 25; 3, 8, 19 al.—
    8.
    To connect an adversative clause, and often fully with tamen, and yet, notwithstanding, nevertheless.
    a.
    Absol.: Mihi quidem hercle non fit veri simile;

    atque ipsis commentum placet,

    Ter. And. 1, 3, 20 Ruhnk. (atque pro tamen, Don.):

    ego quia non rediit filius, quae cogito!... Atque ex me hic natus non est, sed ex fratre,

    id. Ad. 1, 1, 15 (Quasi dicat, ex me non est, et sic afficior: quid paterer si genuissem? Don.; cf. Acron. ap. Charis. p. 204 P.); Cic. Off. 3, 11, 48 Beier; id. Mur. 34, 71 Matth.:

    ceterum ex aliis negotiis, quae ingenio exercentur, in primis magno usui est memoria rerum gestarum... Atque ego credo fore qui, etc.,

    and yet I believe, Sall. J. 4, 1 and 3 Corte; id. C. 51, 35:

    observare principis egressum in publicum, insidere vias examina infantium futurusque populus solebat. Labor parentibus erat ostentare parvulos... Ac plerique insitis precibus surdas principis aures obstrepebant,

    Plin. Pan. 26.—
    b.
    With tamen:

    nihil praeterea est magnopere dicendum. Ac tamen, ne cui loco non videatur esse responsum, etc.,

    Cic. Fin. 2, 27, 85:

    discipulos dissimilis inter se ac tamen laudandos,

    id. de Or. 3, 10, 35; id. Rep. 1, 7, 12:

    Atque in his tamen tribus generibus etc.,

    id. Off. 3, 33, 118; id. Pis. 1, 3; 13, 30; id. Prov. Cons. 7, 16; 7, 15 fin. (cf. in reference to the last four passages Wund. Varr. Lectt. p. lviii. sq.):

    ac tamen initia fastigii etc.,

    Tac. A. 3, 29; 3, 56; 12, 56;

    14, 21: pauciores cum pluribus certasse, ac tamen fusos Germanos,

    id. H. 5, 16.—
    9.
    To connect a minor affirmative proposition (the assumptio or propositio minor of logical lang.) in syllogisms, now, but, but now (while atqui is used to connect either an affirmative or negative minor premiss: v. atqui): Scaptius quaternas postulabat. Metui, si impetrasset, ne tu ipse me amare desineres;

    ... Atque hoc tempore ipso impingit mihi epistulam etc.,

    Cic. Att. 6, 1, 6.—Sometimes the conclusion is to be supplied:

    nisi qui naturas hominum, penitus perspexerit, dicendo, quod volet, perficere non poterit. Atque totus hic locus philosophorum putatur proprius (conclusion: ergo oratorem philosophiam cognoscere oportet),

    Cic. de Or. 1, 12, 53 and 54.—
    10.
    In introducing a purpose (freq. in Cic.).
    a.
    A negative purpose, and esp. in anticipating an objection:

    Ac ne sine causa videretur edixisse,

    Cic. Phil. 3, 9, 24:

    Ac ne forte hoc magnum ac mirabile esse videatur,

    id. de Or. 2, 46, 191; so id. Fam. 5, 12, 30:

    Ac ne saepius dicendum sit,

    Cels. 8, 1:

    Ac ne forte roges, quo me duce, quo lare tuter,

    Hor. Ep. 1, 1, 13:

    Ac ne forte putes,

    id. ib. 2, 1, 208:

    Ac ne forte putes etc.,

    Ov. R. Am. 465 (Merkel, Et).—
    b.
    A positive purpose:

    Atque ut ejus diversa studia in dissimili ratione perspicere possitis, nemo etc.,

    Cic. Cat. 2, 5, 9:

    Atque ut omnes intellegant me etc.... dico etc.,

    id. Imp. Pomp. 8, 20; 2, 4; id. Clu. 14, 43; id. Sull. 2, 5; id. de Or. 3, 11, 40:

    Atque ut C. Flaminium relinquam etc.,

    id. Leg. 3, 9, 20; id. Fin. 3, 2, 4.—
    11.
    a.. In continuing a thought in assertions or narration, and, now, and now, Plaut. Aul. prol. 18: audistis, cum pro se diceret, genus orationis, etc.,... perspexistis. Atque in eo non solum ingenium ejus videbatis, etc., Cic. Cael. 19, 45; so id. de Or. 3, 32, 130; 2, 7, 27; 3, 10, 39 al.; Caes. B. G. 2, 29; Nep. Ages. 7, 3; 8, 1, Eum. 10, 3 Bremi; Tac. A. 14, 64; 15, 3; Verg. A. 9, 1; Sil. 4, 1 al.: ac si, sublato illo, depelli a vobis omne periculum judicarem, now if I, etc., Cic. Cat. 2, 2, 3:

    atque si etiam hoc natura praescribit, etc.,

    id. Off. 3, 6, 27; so Quint. 10, 1, 26; 10, 2, 8.—
    b.
    In introducing parentheses:

    vulgo credere, Penino (atque inde nomen et jugo Alpium inditum) transgressum,

    Liv. 21, 38:

    omne adfectus genus (atque ea maxime jucundam et ornatam faciunt orationem) de luxuria, etc.,

    Quint. 4, 3, 15 MSS., where Halm after Spalding reads et quae. —
    c.
    At the conclusion of a discourse (not infreq. in Cic.): Atque in primis duabus dicendi partibus qualis esset, summatim breviterque descripsimus, And thus have we, then, briefly described, etc., Cic. Or. 15, 50:

    Ac de primo quidem officii fonte diximus,

    id. Off. 1, 6, 19:

    Ac de inferenda quidem injuria satis dictum est,

    id. ib. 1, 8, 27; id. Inv. 2, 39, 115 al.—
    V.
    In particular connections and phrases.
    A.
    Unus atque alter, one and the other; alius atque alius, one and another; now this, now that:

    unae atque alterae scalae,

    Sall. J. 60, 7:

    quarum (coclearum) cum unam atque alteram, dein plures peteret,

    id. ib. 93, 2:

    unum atque alterum lacum integer perfluit,

    Tac. H. 5, 6:

    dilatisque alia atque alia de causa comitiis,

    Liv. 8, 23, 17; Col. 9, 8, 10:

    alius atque alius,

    Tac. H. 1, 46; 1, 50 (v. alius, II. D.).—Also separated by several words:

    aliud ejus subinde atque aliud facientes initium,

    Sen. Ep. 32, 2.—
    B.
    Etiam atque etiam. again and again:

    temo Stellas cogens etiam atque etiam Noctis sublime iter, Enn., Trag. Rel. p. 39 Rib.: etiam atque etiam cogita,

    Ter. Eun. 1, 1, 11:

    etiam atque etiam considera,

    Cic. Div. in Caecil. 14, 46:

    monitos eos etiam atque etiam volo,

    id. Cat. 2, 12, 27.—So, semel atque iterum, Cic. Font. 26; id. Clu. 49; Tac. Or. 17; and:

    iterum atque iterum,

    Verg. A. 8, 527; Hor. S. 1, 10, 39.—
    C.
    Huc atque illuc, hither and thither, Cic. Q. Rosc. 37; id. de Or. 1, 40, 184; Verg. A. 9, 57; Ov. M. 2, 357; 10, 376; Tac. Agr. 10; id. H. 1, 85.—
    D.
    Longe atque late, far and wide, Cic. Marcell. 29:

    atque eccum or atque eccum video, in colloquial lang.: Heus vocate huc Davom. Atque eccum,

    but here he is, Ter. And. 3, 3, 48:

    Audire vocem visa sum modo militis. Atque eccum,

    and here he is, id. Eun. 3, 2, 2; so id. Hec. 4, 1, 8.—
    E.
    Atque omnia, in making an assertion general, and so generally:

    Atque in eis omnibus, quae sunt actionis, inest quaedam vis a natura data,

    Cic. de Or. 3, 59, 223:

    quorum (verborum) descriptus ordo alias alia terminatione concluditur, atque omnia illa et prima et media verba spectare debent ad ultimum,

    id. Or. 59, 200; id. de Or. 2, 64, 257: commoda civium non divellere, atque omnes aequitate eadem continere, and so rather, etc., id. Off. 2, 23, 83:

    nihil acerbum esse, nihil crudele, atque omnia plena clementiae, humanitatis,

    id. ad Q. Fr. 1, 1, 8:

    Atque omnis vitae ratio sic constat, ut, quae probamus in aliis, facere ipsi velimus,

    Quint. 10, 2, 2.—
    F.
    With other conjunctions.
    1.
    After et:

    equidem putabam virtutem hominibus instituendo et persuadendo, non minis et vi ac metu tradi,

    Cic. de Or. 1, 58, 247:

    Magnifica vero vox et magno viro ac sapiente digna,

    id. Off. 3, 1, 1; id. Cael. 13:

    vanus aspectus et auri fulgor atque argenti,

    Tac. Agr. 32.:

    denuntiarent, ut ab Saguntinis abstineret et Carthaginem in Africam traicerent ac sociorum querimonias deferrent,

    Liv. 21, 6, 4:

    ubi et fratrem consilii ac periculi socium haberem,

    id. 21, 41, 2:

    et uti liter demum ac Latine perspicueque,

    Quint. 8, 3, 3:

    Nam et subtili plenius aliquid atque subtilius et vehementi remissius atque vehementius invenitur,

    id. 12, 10, 67. —
    2.
    After que, as in Gr. te kai: litterisque ac laudibus aeternare, Varr. ap. Non. p. 75, 20:

    submoverique atque in castra redigi,

    Liv. 26, 10:

    terrorem caedemque ac fugam fecere,

    id. 21, 52:

    mus Sub terris posuitque domos atque horrea fecit,

    Verg. G. 1, 182; 3, 434; id. A. 8, 486.—
    3.
    Before et:

    caelum ipsum ac mare et silvas circum spectantes,

    Tac. Agr. 32.—
    4.
    After neque (only in the poets and post - Aug. prose):

    nec clavis nec canis atque calix,

    Mart. 1, 32, 4: naturam Oceani atque aestus [p. 192] neque quaerere hujus operis est, ac multi retulere, Tac. Agr. 10:

    mediocritatem pristinam neque dissimulavit umquam ac frequenter etiam prae se tulit,

    Suet. Vesp. 12.—
    G.
    Atque repeated, esp. in arch. Lat.: Scio solere plerisque hominibus in rebus secundis atque prolixis atque prosperis animum excellere atque superbiam atque ferociam augescere atque crescere, Cato ap. Gell. 7, 3: Dicere possum quibus villae atque aedes aedificatae atque expolitae maximo opere citro atque ebore atque pavimentis Poenicis stent, Cato ap. Fest. p. 242 Mull.:

    atque ut C. Flamininum atque ea, quae jam prisca videntur, propter vetustatem relinquam,

    Cic. Leg. 3, 9, 20:

    omnem dignitatem tuam in virtute atque in rebus gestis atque in tua gravitate positam existimare,

    id. Fam. 1, 5, 8.—Esp. freq. in enumerations in the poets:

    Haec atque illa dies atque alia atque alia,

    Cat. 68, 152:

    Mavortia tellus Atque Getae atque Hebrus,

    Verg. G. 4, 463:

    Clioque et Beroe atque Ephyre Atque Opis et Asia,

    id. ib. 4, 343.—And sometimes forming a double connective, both— and = et—et:

    Multus ut in terras deplueretque lapis: Atque tubas atque arma ferunt crepitantia caelo Audita,

    Tib. 2, 5, 73:

    complexa sui corpus miserabile nati Atque deos atque astra vocat crudelia mater,

    Verg. E. 5, 23; Sil. 1, 93; v. Forbig ad Verg. l. l.
    ► Atque regularly stands at the beginning of its sentence or clause or before the word it connects, but in poetry it sometimes, like et and at, stands:
    a.
    In the second place:

    Jamque novum terrae stupeant lucescere solem, Altius atque cadant imbres,

    Verg. E. 6, 38 Rib., ubi v. Forbig.:

    Accipite ergo animis atque haec mea figite dicta,

    id. A. 3, 250, and 10, 104 (animis may, however, here be taken with Accipite, as in id. ib. 5, 304):

    Esto beata, funus atque imagines Ducant triumphales tuum,

    Hor. Epod. 8, 11; id. S. 1, 5, 4; 1, 6, 111; 1, 7, 12 (ubi v. Fritzsche).—
    b.
    In the third place:

    quod pubes hedera virente Gaudeant pulla magis atque myrto,

    Hor. C. 1, 25, 18; cf. at fin. (Vid. more upon this word in Hand, Turs. I. pp. 452-513.)

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > atque

  • 9 line

    A n
    1 ( mark) ligne f ; (shorter, thicker) trait m ; Art trait m ; Sport (on pitch, court) ligne f ; Math ligne f ; line and colour Art le trait et la couleur ; a straight/curved line une ligne droite/courbe ; a solid/broken line une ligne continue/discontinue ; a single/double line une ligne simple/double ; to draw ou rule a line tracer une ligne ; to draw a line down the middle of the page tracer une ligne verticale au milieu de la page ; to put a line through sth barrer qch ; to cross the line Sport franchir la ligne ; the starting/finishing line Sport la ligne de départ/d'arrivée ; above/below the line ( in bridge) (marqué) en points d'honneur/en points de marche ; the line AB ( in geometry) la droite AB ; the thin line of his mouth ses lèvres fines ;
    2 ( row) (of people, cars) file f (of de) ; ( of trees) rangée f (of de) ; (of footprints, hills) succession f (of de) ; in straight lines [plant, arrange, sit] en lignes droites ; to stand in a line faire la queue ; get into (a) line! faites la queue! ; to form a line [people] faire la queue ; [hills, houses, trees] être aligné ; please form a line mettez-vous en file s'il vous plaît ; she is fifth in line elle est la cinquième dans la file ; to be in line [buildings] être dans l'alignement ; put the desks in line alignez les bureaux ; to be in line with [shelving, cooker] être dans l'alignement de [cupboard] ; [mark, indicator] coïncider avec [number] ; to be out of line [picture] être de travers ;
    3 fig to be in line for promotion/a pay rise avoir des chances d'être promu/d'être augmenté ; to be in line for redundancy/takeover risquer d'être mis au chômage/d'être racheté ; to be next in line for promotion/execution être le prochain à être promu/exécuté ; in line for the post of bien placé pour obtenir le poste de ;
    4 surtout US ( queue) file f ; to stand in ou wait in line faire la queue (for pour) ;
    5 ( wrinkle) ( on face) ride f ; ( on hand) ligne f ;
    6 Archit, Sewing ( outline shape) ligne f (of de) ; the classical lines of the building la ligne classique du bâtiment ;
    7 ( boundary) frontière f ; an imaginary line between une frontière imaginaire entre ; to cross the state line passer la frontière de l'État ; to follow the line of the old walls suivre le tracé des anciens remparts ; there's a fine line between knowledge and pedantry de la culture à la pédanterie il n'y a qu'un pas ;
    8 ( rope) corde f ; Fishg ligne f ; to put the washing on the line étendre le linge ; a line of washing du linge étendu à sécher ; to throw sb a line lancer une corde à qn ; to cast one's line lancer sa ligne ; there was a fish at the end of the line il y avait un poisson qui mordait ;
    9 ( cable) Elec ligne f (électrique) ; the line had been cut Elec on avait coupé la ligne ; to bring the lines down Telecom abattre les lignes ; the lines are down Telecom les lignes ont été abattues ;
    10 Telecom ( connection) ligne f ; a bad line une mauvaise ligne ; outside line ligne f extérieure ; dial 9 to get an outside line faites le 9 pour appeler à l'extérieur ; to be on the line to sb être en ligne avec qn ; to get off the line ○ raccrocher ; at the other end of the line au bout du fil ; the lines will be open from 8.30 onwards vous pouvez nous appeler à partir de 8 h 30 ; the line is dead il n'y a pas de tonalité ; the line went dead la ligne a été coupée ;
    11 Transp Rail ( connection) ligne f (between entre) ; ( rails) voie f ; (shipping, air transport) ( company) compagnie f ; ( route) ligne f ; repairs to the line réparations sur la voie ; at every station along the line à chaque gare sur la ligne ; the London-Edinburgh line Rail la ligne Londres-Édimbourg ;
    12 ( in genealogy) lignée f ; the male/female line la lignée par les hommes/les femmes ; the Tudor line la maison des Tudor ; to found ou establish a line fonder une lignée ; the line died out la lignée s'est éteinte ; to come from a long line of scientists être issu d'une longue lignée de scientifiques ; to trace one's line back to sb retracer son ascendance jusqu'à qn ; to trace a line down to sb retracer une descendance jusqu'à qn ; to trace a line through sb retracer l'ascendance du côté de qn ; the title passes to the next in line le titre passe au suivant dans l'ordre de succession ; she is second in line to the throne elle est la deuxième dans l'ordre de succession au trône ;
    13 ( of text) ( in prose) ligne f ; ( in poetry) vers m ; ( of music) ligne f ; to give sb 100 lines donner 100 lignes à qn ; to start a new line aller à la ligne ; to miss a line sauter une ligne ; write a few lines about your hobbies décrivez vos passe-temps en quelques lignes ; just a line to say thank you juste un petit mot pour dire merci ; a line from une citation de [poem etc] ; a line of verse ou poetry un vers ; the famous opening lines la célèbre introduction ; he has all the best lines il a les meilleures répliques ; to learn one's lines Theat apprendre son texte ;
    14 ( conformity) to fall into line être d'accord ; to make sb fall into line faire marcher qn au pas ; to fall into line with [person] tomber d'accord avec [view] ; [group, body] être d'accord avec [practice, policy] ; China fell into line with the other powers la Chine s'est mise d'accord avec les autres puissances ; to bring sb into line ramener qn dans le rang ; to bring regional laws into line with federal laws harmoniser les lois régionales et les lois fédérales ; to bring working conditions into line with European standards aligner les conditions de travail sur les normes européennes ; to keep sb in line tenir qn en main ; his statement is out of line with their account sa déclaration ne concorde pas avec leur déposition ; our prices are out of line with those of our competitors nos prix ne s'accordent pas avec ceux de nos concurrents ; to be (way) out of line [objection, remark] être (tout à fait) déplacé ; you're way out of line ○ ! franchement, tu exagères! ;
    15 ○ ( piece of information) to have a line on sb/sth avoir des informations sur qn/qch ; to give sb a line on sb/sth donner un tuyau ○ à qn sur qn/qch ; to give sb a line about sth (story, excuse) raconter des bobards ○ à qn sur qch ; don't give me that line! ne me raconte pas ces histoires! ;
    16 ( stance) position f (on sur) ; something along these lines quelque chose dans le même genre ; our rivals had been thinking along the same lines nos concurrents avaient pensé aux mêmes choses ; to be on the right lines être sur la bonne voie ; the official line la position officielle ; ( approach) ligne f de conduite (with avec) ; to take a firm line with sb se montrer ferme avec qn ; I don't know what line to take je ne sais pas quelle ligne de conduite adopter ;
    17 Comm ( type of product) gamme f ; one of our most successful lines une gamme qui a beaucoup de succès ;
    18 Mil ( fortifications) ligne f ; ( position held) position f ; enemy lines lignes fpl ennemies ; they held their line ils ont conservé leurs positions ;
    19 Naut line ahead/abreast ligne de front/de file ;
    20 ( equator) the line la ligne ; to cross the line traverser la ligne ;
    21 ○ ( of cocaine) ligne ○ f (of de) ;
    22 TV ligne f.
    B in line with prep phr en accord avec [approach, policy, trend, teaching, requirement] ; to be in line with [statement, measure] être dans la ligne de [policy, view, recommendation] ; [figures, increase] être proportionnel à [inflation, trend] ; to increase/fall in line with augmenter/baisser proportionnellement à ; to vary in line with varier parallèlement à.
    C vtr
    1 ( add layer) doubler [garment] (with avec) ; tapisser [box, shelf, nest] (with de) ; to be lined with books être tapissé de livres ; to line the walls and ceilings tapisser les murs et les plafonds d'un papier d'apprêt ;
    2 ( stand along) [trees, spectators] border [route] ; to be lined with trees être bordé d'arbres ;
    3 ( mark) to be lined with être marqué par [worry, age].
    all along the line, right down the line sur toute la ligne ; somewhere along the line ( at point in time) à un certain moment ; ( at stage) quelque part ; something along those lines quelque chose dans ce goût ; to do a line with sb ○ sortir avec qn ; to be on the line [life, job] être en jeu.
    ■ line up:
    ▶ line up
    1 ( side by side) se mettre en rang (for pour) ; ( one behind the other) se mettre en file (for pour) ; to line up in rows se mettre en rangs ;
    2 ( take sides) to line up with sb/sth se ranger du côté de qn/qch ; to line up against sb/sth se regrouper contre qn/qch ;
    ▶ line up [sb], line [sb] up ( in row) faire s'aligner ; they lined us up ( in columns) ils nous ont fait former des colonnes ; to line people up against a wall aligner des gens contre un mur ;
    ▶ line [sth] up, line up [sth]
    1 ( align) aligner (with sur) ;
    2 ( organize) sélectionner [team] ; to have sb/sth lined up [candidate, work, project, activities] avoir qn/qch en vue ; what have you got lined up for us tonight? qu'est-ce que tu nous as prévu pour ce soir ○ ?

    Big English-French dictionary > line

  • 10 after

    af·ter [ʼɑ:ftəʳ, Am ʼæftɚ] prep
    1) ( later time) nach +dat;
    \after two weeks of vacationing nach zwei Wochen Ferien;
    he usually takes a nap \after lunch er macht nach dem Mittagessen normalerweise einen kurzen Mittagsschlaf;
    the day \after tomorrow übermorgen;
    the week \after next übernächste Woche;
    [a] quarter \after six (Am) [um] Viertel nach Sechs;
    \after hours nach Feierabend;
    \after the fact danach, hinterher
    to be \after sb/ sth hinter jdm/etw her sein
    3) ( following) nach +dat;
    the letter C comes \after B der Buchstabe C kommt nach B;
    \after you nach Ihnen
    4) ( because of) nach +dat;
    \after saying what he did, I'll never talk to him again nachdem was er gesagt hat, werde ich nie wieder ein Wort mit ihm wechseln;
    \after all schließlich
    5) ( behind) nach +dat;
    can you lock up \after you? können Sie zuschließen, wenn Sie gehen?;
    he shut the door \after them er schloss die Tür hinter ihnen;
    she stared \after him in disbelief sie sah ihm ungläubig nach
    6) ( in honour of) nach +dat;
    to name sb/sth \after sb/ sth jdn/etw nach jdm/etw [be]nennen;
    to be named \after sb nach jdm benannt sein
    7) ( similar to) nach +dat;
    to take \after sb nach jdm kommen;
    she takes \after her mother sie kommt nach ihrer Mutter
    8) ( about) nach +dat;
    he politely inquired \after his uncle's health er erkundigte sich höflich nach dem Befinden seines Onkels
    9) ( despite) trotz +dat;
    \after all his efforts, he still failed the driving test trotz all seiner Bemühungen fiel er durch die Führerscheinprüfung;
    \after all trotzdem
    10) ( in comparison to) verglichen mit +dat;
    their children seem small \after his ihre Kinder wirken klein verglichen mit seinen
    11) ( many in succession) nach +dat;
    hour \after hour Stunde um Stunde;
    she ate one piece of cake \after another sie aß ein Stück Kuchen nach dem anderen conj nachdem;
    I'll call you \after I take a shower ich rufe dich an, wenn [o sobald] ich geduscht habe;
    soon [or shortly] [or not long] \after sth kurz nachdem...;
    soon \after we joined the motorway, the car started to make a strange noise wir waren noch nicht lange auf der Autobahn, als der Motor seltsame Geräusche von sich gab;
    right [or straight] [or immediately] \after sth unmittelbar nachdem...;
    I went to the post office straight \after I left you ich bin direkt von dir zur Post gelaufen adv
    1) ( at a later time) danach;
    the day/week \after einen Tag/eine Woche danach [o darauf];
    shortly [or soon] \after kurz [o bald] danach [o darauf];
    he passed away and she died shortly \after zuerst starb er und kurze Zeit später folgte sie ihm in den Tod
    2) ( behind)
    marriage, house, baby - and what comes \after? Hochzeit, Haus, Kinder - und was kommt dann?;
    a mouse ran into the bushes and the cat ran \after eine Maus rannte in die Büsche und die Katze hinterher
    3) (fam: afterwards) danach, nachher;
    what are you going to do \after? was hast du nachher vor? adj
    inv ( liter) später;
    in \after years in späteren Jahren

    English-German students dictionary > after

  • 11 Biles, Sir John Harvard

    SUBJECT AREA: Ports and shipping
    [br]
    b. 1854 Portsmouth, England
    d. 27 October 1933 Scotland (?)
    [br]
    English naval architect, academic and successful consultant in the years when British shipbuilding was at its peak.
    [br]
    At the conclusion of his apprenticeship at the Royal Dockyard, Portsmouth, Biles entered the Royal School of Naval Architecture, South Kensington, London; as it was absorbed by the Royal Naval College, he graduated from Greenwich to the Naval Construction Branch, first at Pembroke and later at the Admiralty. From the outset of his professional career it was apparent that he had the intellectual qualities that would enable him to oversee the greatest changes in ship design of all time. He was one of the earliest proponents of the revolutionary work of the hydrodynamicist William Froude.
    In 1880 Biles turned to the merchant sector, taking the post of Naval Architect to J. \& G. Thomson (later John Brown \& Co.). Using Froude's Law of Comparisons he was able to design the record-breaking City of Paris of 1887, the ship that started the fabled succession of fast and safe Clyde bank-built North Atlantic liners. For a short spell, before returning to Scotland, Biles worked in Southampton. In 1891 Biles accepted the Chair of Naval Architecture at the University of Glasgow. Working from the campus at Gilmorehill, he was to make the University (the oldest school of engineering in the English-speaking world) renowned in naval architecture. His workload was legendary, but despite this he was admired as an excellent lecturer with cheerful ways which inspired devotion to the Department and the University. During the thirty years of his incumbency of the Chair, he served on most of the important government and international shipping committees, including those that recommended the design of HMS Dreadnought, the ordering of the Cunarders Lusitania and Mauretania and the lifesaving improvements following the Titanic disaster. An enquiry into the strength of destroyer hulls followed the loss of HMS Cobra and Viper, and he published the report on advanced experimental work carried out on HMS Wolf by his undergraduates.
    In 1906 he became Consultant Naval Architect to the India Office, having already set up his own consultancy organization, which exists today as Sir J.H.Biles and Partners. His writing was prolific, with over twenty-five papers to professional institutions, sundry articles and a two-volume textbook.
    [br]
    Principal Honours and Distinctions
    Knighted 1913. Knight Commander of the Indian Empire 1922. Master of the Worshipful Company of Shipwrights 1904.
    Bibliography
    1905, "The strength of ships with special reference to experiments and calculations made upon HMS Wolf", Transactions of the Institution of Naval Architects.
    1911, The Design and Construction of Ships, London: Griffin.
    Further Reading
    C.A.Oakley, 1973, History of a Facuity, Glasgow University.
    FMW

    Biographical history of technology > Biles, Sir John Harvard

  • 12 Ercker, Lazarus

    [br]
    b. c.1530 Annaberg, Saxony, Germany
    d. 1594 Prague, Bohemia
    [br]
    German chemist and metallurgist.
    [br]
    Educated at Wittenberg University during 1547–8, Ercker obtained in 1554, through one of his wife's relatives, the post of Assayer from the Elector Augustus at Dresden. From then on he took a succession of posts in mining and metallurgy. In 1555 he was Chief Consultant and Supervisor of all matters relating to mines, but for some unknown reason was demoted to Warden of the Mint at Annaberg. In 1558 he travelled to the Tyrol to study the mines in that region, and in the same year Prince Henry of Brunswick appointed him Warden, then Master, of the Mint at Goslar. Ercker later moved to Prague where, through another of his wife's relatives, he was appointed Control Tester at Kutna Hora. It was there that he wrote his best-known book, Die Beschreibung allfürnemisten mineralischen Ertz, which drew him to the attention of the Emperor Maximilian, who made him Courier for Mining and a clerk of the Supreme Court of Bohemia. The next Emperor, Rudolf II, a noted patron of science and alchemy, promoted Ercker to Chief Inspector of Mines and ennobled him in 1586 with the title Von Schreckenfels'. His second wife managed the mint at Kutna Hora and his two sons became assayers. These appointments gained him much experience of the extraction and refining of metals. This first bore fruit in a book on assaying, Probierbüchlein, printed in 1556, followed by one on minting, Münzbuch, in 1563. His main work, Die Beschreibung, was a systematic review of the methods of obtaining, refining and testing the alloys and minerals of gold, silver, copper, antimony, mercury and lead. The preparation of acids, salts and other compounds is also covered, and his apparatus is fully described and illustrated. Although Ercker used Agricola's De re metattica as a model, his own work was securely based on his practical experience. Die Beschreibung was the first manual of analytical and metallurgical chemistry and influenced later writers such as Glauber on assaying. After the first edition in Prague came four further editions in Frankfurt-am-Main.
    [br]
    Bibliography
    Die Beschreibung allfürnemisten mineralischen Ertz, Prague. 1556, Probierbuchlein.
    1563, Munzbuch.
    Further Reading
    P.R.Beierlein, 1955, Lazarus Ercker, Bergmann, Hüttenmann und Münzmeister im 16. Jahrhundert, Berlin (the best biography, although the chemical details are incomplete).
    J.R.Partington, 1961, History of Chemistry, London, Vol. II, pp. 104–7.
    E.V.Armstrong and H.Lukens, 1939, "Lazarus Ercker and his Probierbuch", J.Chem. Ed.
    16: 553–62.
    LRD

    Biographical history of technology > Ercker, Lazarus

  • 13 cuarto

    adj.
    fourth.
    adv.
    fourth, fourthly, in the fourth place.
    m.
    1 room, apartment, chamber, quarter.
    2 fourth, fourth part.
    3 apartment.
    pres.indicat.
    1st person singular (yo) present indicative of spanish verb: cuartar.
    * * *
    ► adjetivo (In 1 and 2, see also sexto,-a)
    1 (ordinal) fourth
    ■ llegó cuarto he arrived in fourth place, he came fourth
    ► nombre masculino,nombre femenino
    1 fourth
    ————————
    1 (parte) quarter
    2 (de animal) quarter
    3 (de ropa) quarter
    1 familiar (dinero) money sing, dough sing
    \
    de tres al cuarto familiar worthless, third-rate
    tres cuartos de lo mismo familiar almost exactly the same
    cuarto creciente first quarter
    cuarto de baño bathroom
    cuarto de estar living room
    cuarto menguante last quarter
    cuarto trasero (carne) hindquarter
    cuarto trastero junk room
    cuartos de final DEPORTE quarter finals
    cuatro cuartos familiar very little money sing
    * * *
    1. (f. - cuarta)
    noun adj.
    2. noun m.
    1) room
    2) quarter, fourth
    * * *
    1.
    ADJ [ordinal] fourth
    sexto 1.
    2. SM
    1) (=habitación) room; (=dormitorio) bedroom, room

    cuarto de aseo — toilet, cloakroom, bathroom (EEUU)

    cuarto de estar — living room, sitting room

    cuarto frío — (Culin) cold store

    cuarto oscuro — (Fot) darkroom; (=trastero) broom cupboard; Arg, Uru voting booth

    2) (=cuarta parte) quarter

    tres cuartos de lo mismo —

    su amigo es un inútil, y él... tres cuartos de lo mismo — his friend is useless, and he's not much better

    en otros países ocurre tres cuartos de lo mismo — it's the same story o it's more of the same in other countries

    3) [en la hora] quarter

    son las seis menos cuarto, es un cuarto para las seis — LAm it's a quarter to six

    tuvo su cuarto de hora, ahora nadie lo lleva — it had its day o it was all the rage, now nobody wears it anymore

    tardó tres cuartos de hora — it took him o he took three quarters of an hour

    4) [de animal] [de cerdo, vaca] joint

    un cuarto de pollo — a chicken quarter, a quarter chicken

    pl cuartos legs
    5) (=moneda) coin used in Spain in former times
    pl cuartos * (=dinero) dough * sing
    6) (Tip) quarto
    7)

    estar de cuarto — (Mil) to be on watch

    8) †† (=piso) small flat
    9) †† (=servidumbre) household, servants pl
    * * *
    I
    - ta adjetivo/pronombre
    b) ( partitivo)
    II
    1) ( habitación) room; ( dormitorio) room, bedroom
    2)
    a) ( cuarta parte) quarter

    de tres al cuarto — (fam) third-rate

    qué... ni qué ocho cuartos! — (fam)

    qué miedo ni qué ocho cuartos! — scared, my foot!

    tu hermana es una vaga... y tú, tres cuartos de lo mismo — your sister's bone-idle... and you're not much better (colloq)

    la una y cuarto — (a) quarter after (AmE) o (BrE) past one, one fifteen

    es un cuarto para las dos or (Esp, RPl) son las dos menos cuarto — it is a quarter to two

    tener su cuarto de hora — (AmS) to have had one's day

    3) (Impr) quarto
    4) (Esp fam) ( dinero)
    III
    - ta adjetivo (Col fam) < persona> generous and easygoing
    * * *
    I
    - ta adjetivo/pronombre
    b) ( partitivo)
    II
    1) ( habitación) room; ( dormitorio) room, bedroom
    2)
    a) ( cuarta parte) quarter

    de tres al cuarto — (fam) third-rate

    qué... ni qué ocho cuartos! — (fam)

    qué miedo ni qué ocho cuartos! — scared, my foot!

    tu hermana es una vaga... y tú, tres cuartos de lo mismo — your sister's bone-idle... and you're not much better (colloq)

    la una y cuarto — (a) quarter after (AmE) o (BrE) past one, one fifteen

    es un cuarto para las dos or (Esp, RPl) son las dos menos cuarto — it is a quarter to two

    tener su cuarto de hora — (AmS) to have had one's day

    3) (Impr) quarto
    4) (Esp fam) ( dinero)
    III
    - ta adjetivo (Col fam) < persona> generous and easygoing
    * * *
    cuarto1 (4º)
    = fourth (4th), quarter, quarto, fourthly.

    Ex: Further post-co-ordinate indexes covering in excess of 9999 documents can be compiled by starting a second and possibly a third or fourth set of cards.

    Ex: The old method of publication by syndicates of retail booksellers (who might also be wholesalers and/or printers) remained normal during the last quarter of the eighteenth century.
    Ex: A format is the number of times the printed sheet has been folded to make the leaves of a book, e.g., folio (one fold giving two leaves), quarto (two folds giving four leaves), etc.
    Ex: Fourthly, it legalized the application of future Community regulations to the United Kingdom.
    * 4º (cuarto) = 4th (fourth).
    * alumno de cuarto = fourth grader.
    * alumno de cuarto año = fourth grader.
    * alumno de cuarto curso = fourth grader.
    * alumno de cuarto grado = fourth grader.
    * cuarto de penique = farthing.
    * cuartos de final = quarter-finals.
    * encuadernado en cuarto = quarter-bound.
    * en cuarto lugar = fourthly.
    * tres cuartos (3/4) = three-quarters (3/4).
    * tres cuartos (3/4) = three-fourths (3/4).
    * una cuarta parte = one-quarter (1/4), one in four.
    * una cuarta parte de = a fourth of.
    * un cuarto = one-quarter (1/4), one in four.
    * un cuarto (1/4) = one fourth (1/4).
    * un cuarto de = a quarter of.

    cuarto2
    2 = room.

    Ex: The open-plan flexible library can be enonomical since overseeing is facilitated by the openness rather than be dividing the building into rooms or halls, thereby requiring less staff.

    * armario de cuarto de baño = bathroom cabinet.
    * cuarto de baño = bathroom.
    * cuarto de huéspedes = spare room, guest room.
    * cuarto de invitados = spare room, guest room.
    * cuarto de juegos = playroom.
    * cuarto de los juguetes = playroom.
    * cuarto oscuro = darkroom.
    * cuarto oscuro de fotografía = photographic darkroom.
    * cuarto para visitas = spare room, guest room.

    * * *
    cuarto1 -ta
    adjective / pronoun
    2
    (partitivo): la cuarta parte a quarter
    Compuesto:
    feminine fourth dimension
    A (habitación) room; (dormitorio) room, bedroom
    hacerle cuarto a algn ( Col fam); to cover (up) for sb
    Compuestos:
    ≈ downstairs lavatory o ( BrE) cloakroom, bathroom ( AmE)
    bathroom
    sewing room
    living room, parlor ( AmE), sitting room ( BrE)
    guest room, spare room
    ironing room
    ( Esp) guest room, spare room
    engine room
    maid's room
    cold store
    ( RPl) recess
    pasar a cuarto intermedio to adjourn, go into recess
    ( Fot) darkroom; ( RPl) ( Pol) ≈ polling booth
    lumber room, junk room
    B
    un cuarto de kilo or ( colloq) un cuarto kilo de jamón a quarter of ham, a quarter (of a) kilo of ham
    un cuarto de pollo a quarter chicken
    un cuarto de millón/siglo a quarter of a million/century
    de tres al cuarto ( fam); third-rate
    ¡qué … ni qué ocho cuartos! ( fam): ¡qué miedo ni qué ocho cuartos! scared, my foot!
    ¡qué vacaciones ni qué ocho cuartos! it was hardly what I'd call a vacation!
    tres cuartos de lo mismo ( fam): tu hermana es una vaga … y tú, tres cuartos de lo mismo your sister's bone-idle … and you're not much better ( colloq)
    nunca tengo tiempo para nada — a mí me pasa tres cuartos de lo mismo I never seem to have time to do anything — that makes two of us o you're not the only one
    un cuarto de hora a quarter of an hour
    las clases son de tres cuartos de hora the classes last three quarters of an hour
    una hora y (un) cuarto an hour and a quarter
    la una y cuarto (a) quarter after ( AmE) o ( BrE) past one, one fifteen
    son las dos menos cuartoor ( AmL exc RPI) es un cuarto para las dos it is a quarter to two
    tuvo su cuarto de hora a fines de los 60 he had his heyday in the late 60s
    C ( Impr) quarto
    en cuarto, 416 páginas quarto, 416 pages
    Compuestos:
    first quarter
    forequarter
    last quarter
    mpl quarterfinals (pl)
    hindquarter
    D
    ( Esp fam) (dinero): estoy sin un cuartoor no tengo ni un cuarto I haven't got a bean, I'm absolutely broke ( colloq)
    tiene muchos cuartos he's loaded ( colloq), he's rolling in money ( colloq)
    le pagan cuatro cuartos he gets paid peanuts o a pittance ( colloq)
    echar su cuarto a espadas ( Esp); to stick one's oar in ( colloq)
    cuarto3 -ta
    ( Col fam) ‹persona› generous and easygoing
    * * *

     

    cuarto 1
    ◊ -ta adjetivo/pronombre

    fourth;
    la cuarta parte a quarter;
    para ejemplos ver quinto
    cuarto 2 sustantivo masculino
    1 ( habitación) room;
    ( dormitorio) room, bedroom;

    cuarto de estar living room, parlor (AmE), sitting room (BrE);
    cuarto de (los) huéspedes guest room, spare room;
    cuarto trastero lumber room, junk room
    2


    un cuarto de pollo a quarter chicken;
    cuarto creciente/menguante first/last quarter;
    cuartos de final quarterfinals (pl)


    la una y cuarto (a) quarter after (AmE) o (BrE) past one, one fifteen;
    es un cuarto para las dos or (Esp, RPl) son las dos menos cuarto it is a quarter to two
    cuarto,-a
    I adjetivo & sustantivo masculino y femenino fourth
    II sustantivo masculino
    1 (habitación) room
    cuarto de baño, bathroom
    cuarto de estar, living room
    cuarto trastero, boxroom, storage room
    2 (cuarta parte) quarter
    cuarto de hora, quarter of an hour
    cuarto (de) kilo, a quarter of a kilo
    cuarto creciente/menguante, first/last quarter (of the moon)
    3 (de un animal) cuarto delantero, shoulderquarter
    cuarto trasero, hindquarter
    4 cuartos, fam (dinero) dough, money
    Dep cuartos de final, quarter finals
    III sustantivo femenino
    1 Mús (intervalo) cuarta disminuida/aumentada, diminished/augmented fourth
    2 Auto fourth (gear)
    ' cuarto' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    aseo
    - baño
    - cisterna
    - comunicarse
    - creciente
    - cuarta
    - desvestirse
    - estancia
    - hoy
    - iluminada
    - iluminado
    - lavabo
    - leonera
    - retrete
    - servicio
    - tocador
    - tres
    - viciar
    - airear
    - alzar
    - armario
    - chisme
    - desorden
    - encerrado
    - habitación
    - menos
    - sanitario
    - soledad
    - trasto
    - váter
    - wáter
    English:
    amiss
    - basin
    - bathroom
    - crescent
    - darkroom
    - disinfectant
    - fourth
    - lavatory
    - messy
    - modernize
    - nursery
    - of
    - playroom
    - quart
    - quarter
    - quarter-final
    - reverberate
    - room
    - roomful
    - shut away
    - study
    - stuffy
    - succession
    - tidy out
    - toilet
    - utility room
    - wander
    - adjoin
    - after
    - bath
    - bed
    - creep
    - den
    - fourthly
    - guest
    - mother
    - play
    - rank
    - self
    - shut
    - sirloin
    - spare
    - straight
    - two
    - utility
    * * *
    cuarto, -a
    ♦ núm
    fourth;
    la cuarta parte a quarter;
    RP Fam
    de cuarta fourth-rate
    cuarto árbitro [en fútbol] fourth official;
    la cuarta dimensión the fourth dimension;
    el cuarto poder [la prensa] the Fourth Estate;
    ver también octavo
    ♦ nm
    1. [parte] quarter;
    póngame un cuarto de merluza (I'd like) a quarter kilo of hake, please;
    Fam
    ni qué ocho cuartos: ¡qué fiesta ni qué ocho cuartos, tú te quedas en casa! I don't care whether there's a party or not, you're staying at home!;
    Fam
    ser tres cuartos de lo mismo to be exactly the same o no different;
    uno es aburrido, y el otro tres cuartos de lo mismo one is a bore and the other one is not much better
    cuarto creciente first quarter [of moon]; Dep cuartos de final quarter finals;
    cuarto menguante last quarter [of moon]
    2. [de hora] quarter;
    un cuarto de hora a quarter of an hour;
    tres cuartos de hora three quarters of an hour;
    son las dos y cuarto it's a quarter Br past o US after two;
    son las dos menos cuarto, Am [m5] es un cuarto para las dos it's a quarter to two;
    una hora y cuarto an hour and a quarter;
    Am
    ya pasó su cuarto de hora he's had his time in the sun, his glory days are over
    3. [curso universitario] fourth year
    4. [curso escolar] = fourth year of primary school, US ≈ fourth grade
    5. [de animal] quarter;
    los cuartos delanteros/traseros front quarters/hindquarters
    6. [habitación] room
    cuarto de aseo washroom, small bathroom;
    cuarto de baño bathroom;
    Col cuarto de chécheres junk o lumber room;
    cuarto de estar living-room;
    cuarto de juegos playroom, US rumpus room;
    cuarto oscuro [para revelar fotografía] darkroom;
    RP cuarto secreto [cabina electoral] voting booth;
    cuarto trastero lumber room
    7. [dinero]
    estar sin un cuarto to be broke;
    Fam
    cuartos dough, cash
    8. Dep [periodo] quarter
    9. RP cuarto intermedio [receso] recess, adjournment;
    la asamblea pasó a cuarto intermedio the meeting adjourned o went into recess;
    discutieron tres temas y pasaron a cuarto intermedio they discussed three topics and then adjourned
    * * *
    I adj fourth
    II m
    1 ( habitación) room
    2 ( parte), DEP quarter;
    cuarto de hora quarter of an hour;
    cuarto de kilo quarter of a kilo;
    las diez y cuarto (a) quarter after o Br past ten;
    las tres menos cuarto a quarter to three, quarter of three;
    de tres al cuarto fam third-rate;
    tres cuartos prenda three-quarter length
    3
    :
    cuartos pl pop dough sg fam, Br tb
    dosh sg fam ;
    estar sin un cuarto be broke fam
    * * *
    cuarto, -ta adj
    : fourth
    cuarto, -ta n
    : fourth (in a series)
    cuarto nm
    1) : quarter, fourth
    cuarto de galón: quart
    2) habitación: room
    * * *
    cuarto1 n
    ¡vete a tu cuarto! go to your room!
    2. (cuarta parte) quarter
    cuarto2 num fourth

    Spanish-English dictionary > cuarto

  • 14 près

    près [pʀε]
    adverb
    (dans l'espace, dans le temps) close
    • il habite assez/tout près he lives quite/very near or close
    • c'est plus/moins près que je ne croyais (espace) it's nearer than/further than I thought ; (temps) it's sooner than/further off than I thought
    • cela fait 100 € à peu de chose(s) près that comes to 100 euros, or as near as makes no difference
    • il voit mal/bien de près he can't see very well/he can see all right close to
    • être près de son argent or de ses sous (inf) to be tight-fisted
    • il est près de la cinquantaine he's nearly fifty► ne pas être près de + infinitif
    • je ne suis pas près de partir/de réussir at this rate, I'm not likely to be going/to succeed
    * * *
    pʀɛ
    1.

    la ville est tout près — it's no distance to the town, the town is close by

    2) fig

    10 kg, à quelques grammes près — 10 kg, give or take a few grammes

    ce roman est plutôt bon, à quelques détails près — this novel is quite good, apart from the odd detail

    à ceci or cela près que — except that

    à une voix près, le projet aurait été adopté — the project would have been adopted but for one vote

    prends ton temps, on n'est pas à cinq minutes près — take your time, five minutes won't make any difference

    précis au millimètre près — accurate to within a millimetre [BrE]


    2.
    près de locution prépositive
    1) ( dans l'espace) near

    être près du but — fig to be close to achieving one's goal

    elle est près de lui — ( à ses côtés) she's at his side

    2) ( dans le temps) near, nearly
    3) (par les idées, les sentiments) close (de to)
    4) ( presque) nearly, almost

    3.
    de près locution adverbiale closely

    surveiller quelqu'un/qch de près — to keep a close eye on somebody/sth

    vu de près, cela rassemble à... — seen from close quarters, it looks like...

    voir la mort de près — to look death in the face, to come close to death


    4.
    à peu près locution adverbiale ( presque)
    * * *
    pʀɛ adv
    1) (pas loin) near

    J'habite tout près. — I live nearby.

    Il habite près de la poste. — He lives near the post office.

    Assieds-toi près de moi. — Sit down next to me.

    Il a regardé la photo de près. — He looked closely at the photo.

    près de (= environ) — nearly

    Il y avait près de cinq cents spectateurs. — There were nearly 500 spectators.

    à qch près; à 1kg près — to within about 1kg

    On n'est pas à un jour près. — One day won't make any difference., One day either way won't make any difference.

    Il était près de le dénoncer. — He was on the point of informing on him.

    Je ne suis pas près de lui pardonner. — I'm not about to forgive him.

    * * *
    A adv
    1 ( non loin dans l'espace) close; la ville est tout près it's no distance to the town, the town is close by; ce n'est pas tout près it's quite a way; c'est plus près qu'on ne pense it's closer than you'd think; se raser de près to have a close shave;
    2 ( non loin dans le temps) les vacances sont tout près maintenant the vacation is nearly here ou upon us;
    3 fig cela pèse 10 kg, à quelques grammes près it weighs 10 kg, give or take a few grams; ce roman est plutôt bon, à quelques détails près this novel is quite good, apart from the odd detail; à ceci or cela près que except that; il m'a remboursé au centime près he paid me back to the very last penny; à une minute près, j'avais mon train/je battais mon record I was within a minute of catching my train/breaking my record; à une voix près, le projet aurait été adopté the project would have been adopted but for one vote; gagner/perdre à deux voix près to win/lose by two votes; elles sont semblables, à la couleur près they're the same but for the colourGB; prends ton temps, on n'est pas à cinq minutes près take your time, five minutes won't make any difference; ils ne sont plus à un vol près one more theft won't make any difference to them; je ne suis pas à un paquet de cigarettes près what does the odd packet of cigarettes matter?; précis au millimètre près accurate to within a millimetreGB; à une exception près with only one exception; à quelques exceptions près with a few rare exceptions.
    B près de loc prép
    1 ( dans l'espace) near; j'aimerais être près de toi I'd like to be with you; elle habite près d'ici she lives nearby ou near here; être près du but fig to be close to achieving one's goal; la balle est passée très près du cœur the bullet just missed the heart; près d'elle, un enfant jouait a child was playing near her ou beside her; elle est près de lui ( à ses côtés) she's with him;
    2 ( dans le temps) near, nearly; il est près de l'âge de la retraite he's near retirement age; il est près de minuit it's nearly midnight; elle est près de la cinquantaine she's nearly fifty; on est près des vacances maintenant the holidays are nearly here ou upon us; être près de faire to be about to do; je ne suis pas près de recommencer/d'y retourner I'm not about to do that again/to go back there again; être près de partir/sombrer to be about to leave/sink; le jour est près de se lever dawn is about to break; je suis près de penser/croire que I almost think/believe that; être près de réussir/de refuser/d'accepter to be about to succeed/to refuse/to accept, to be on the point of succeeding/of refusing/of accepting; ils étaient près de la victoire they were close to victory; le problème n'est pas près d'être résolu the problem is nowhere near solved;
    3 (par les idées, les sentiments) close; elle a toujours été très près de sa mère she has always been very close to her mother; ils sont très près l'un de l'autre they are very close; vivre près de la nature to live close to nature;
    4 ( presque) nearly, almost; cela coûte près de 1 000 euros it costs nearly ou almost 1,000 euros; il a cessé de fumer pendant près de 20 ans he didn't smoke for nearly 20 years; cela a nécessité près d'un an de travail it involved nearly a year's work; le chômage touche près de 3 millions de personnes unemployment affects nearly ou almost 3 million people; une toile de près de 2 m sur 3 a canvas measuring almost 2 m by 3; cela fait près d'un mois que j'attends I've been waiting close to ou for nearly a month.
    C de près loc adv closely; regarder de plus près to take a closer look; regarder/examiner qch de près to look at/to examine sth closely; observer/suivre qn de près to observe/to follow sb closely; surveiller qn/qch de près to keep a close eye on sb/sth; le coup de fusil a été tiré de très près the shot was fired at close range; voir de près to see clearly close up; vu de près, cela rassemble à… seen from close quarters, it looks like…; les examens/concurrents se suivent de près the exams/competitors are close together; les explosions se succédèrent de près the explosions came in close succession; être lié de près à qch to be closely linked with sth; s'intéresser de près à qch to take a close interest in sth; frôler de près la catastrophe to come close to disaster; ne pas y regarder de trop près not to look too closely; voir la mort de près to look death in the face, to come close to death; à y regarder de plus près on closer examination.
    D à peu près loc adv ( presque) la rue est à peu près vide the street is practically ou virtually empty; cela coûte à peu près 200 euros it costs about ou around 200 euros; il y a à peu près une heure qu'il est parti he left about an hour ago, it's about an hour since he left; un groupe d'à peu près 50 personnes a group of about ou some 50 people; je pense à peu près comme toi I think more or less the same as you; à peu près de la même façon in much the same way; à peu près semblables pretty much the same; cela désigne à peu près n'importe quoi it refers to just about anything; c'est à peu près tout that's about the size of it; c'est à peu près tout ce qu'on sait sur cette affaire that's just about all we know about this matter.
    [prɛ] adverbe
    1. [dans l'espace] near, close
    2. [dans le temps] near, close, soon
    jeudi c'est trop près, disons plutôt samedi Thursday is too soon, let's say Saturday
    ————————
    [prɛ] préposition
    ————————
    à... près locution correlative
    c'est parfait, à un détail près it's perfect but for ou except for one thing
    ————————
    à cela près que locution conjonctive
    à peu de choses près locution adverbiale
    à peu de choses près, il y en a cinquante there are fifty of them, more or less ou give or take a few
    ————————
    à peu près locution adverbiale
    1. [environ] about, around
    2. [plus ou moins] more or less
    ————————
    de près locution adverbiale
    at close range ou quarters
    b. (figuré) to look (very) closely at something, to look carefully into something
    cela ressemble, de près ou de loin, à une habile escroquerie however ou whichever way you look at it, it's a skilful piece of fraud
    tout ce qui touche, de près ou de loin à everything (which is) even remotely connected with
    ————————
    près de locution prépositionnelle
    1. [dans l'espace] near
    vêtements près du corps close-fitting ou tight-fitting clothes
    [affectivement, qualitativement] close to
    2. [dans le temps]
    je ne suis pas près d'oublier ça I'm not about to ou it'll be a long time before I forget that
    3. [environ, presque] nearly, almost

    Dictionnaire Français-Anglais > près

  • 15 БИБЛИОГРАФИЯ

    Мы приняли следующие сокращения для наиболее часто упоминаемых книг и журналов:
    IJP - International Journal of Psycho-analysis
    JAPA - Journal of the American Psychoanalytic Association
    SE - Standard Edition of the Complete Psychological Works of Sigmund Freud, ed. James Strachey (London: Hogarth Press and the Institute of Psycho-Analysis, 1953—74.)
    PSOC - Psychoanalytic Study of the Child (New Haven: Yale University Press)
    PQ - Psychoanalytic Quarterly
    WAF - The Writings of Anna Freud, ed. Anna Freud (New York: International Universities Press, 1966—74)
    PMC - Psychoanalysis The Major Concepts ed. Burness E. Moore and Bernard D. Fine (New Haven: Yale University Press)
    \
    О словаре: _about - Psychoanalytic Terms and Concepts
    \
    1. Abend, S. M. Identity. PMC. Forthcoming.
    2. Abend, S. M. (1974) Problems of identity. PQ, 43.
    3. Abend, S. M., Porder, M. S. & Willick, M. S. (1983) Borderline Patients. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    4. Abraham, K. (1916) The first pregenital stage of libido. Selected Papers. London, Hogarth Press, 1948.
    5. Abraham, K. (1917) Ejaculatio praecox. In: selected Papers. New York Basic Books.
    6. Abraham, K. (1921) Contributions to the theory of the anal character. Selected Papers. New York: Basic Books, 1953.
    7. Abraham, K. (1924) A Short study of the development of the libido, viewed in the light of mental disorders. In: Selected Papers. London: Hogarth Press, 1927.
    8. Abraham, K. (1924) Manic-depressive states and the pre-genital levels of the libido. In: Selected Papers. London: Hogarth Press, 1949.
    9. Abraham, K. (1924) Selected Papers. London: Hogarth Press, 1948.
    10. Abraham, K. (1924) The influence of oral erotism on character formation. Ibid.
    11. Abraham, K. (1925) The history of an impostor in the light of psychoanalytic knowledge. In: Clinical Papers and Essays on Psychoanalysis. New York: Basic Books, 1955, vol. 2.
    12. Abrams, S. (1971) The psychoanalytic unconsciousness. In: The Unconscious Today, ed. M. Kanzer. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    13. Abrams, S. (1981) Insight. PSOC, 36.
    14. Abse, D W. (1985) The depressive character In Depressive States and their Treatment, ed. V. Volkan New York: Jason Aronson.
    15. Abse, D. W. (1985) Hysteria and Related Mental Disorders. Bristol: John Wright.
    16. Ackner, B. (1954) Depersonalization. J. Ment. Sci., 100.
    17. Adler, A. (1924) Individual Psychology. New York: Harcourt, Brace.
    18. Akhtar, S. (1984) The syndrome of identity diffusion. Amer. J. Psychiat., 141.
    19. Alexander, F. (1950) Psychosomatic Medicine. New York: Norton.
    20. Allen, D. W. (1974) The Feat- of Looking. Charlottesvill, Va: Univ. Press of Virginia.
    21. Allen, D. W. (1980) Psychoanalytic treatment of the exhibitionist. In: Exhibitionist, Description, Assessment, and Treatment, ed. D. Cox. New York: Garland STPM Press.
    22. Allport, G. (1937) Personality. New York: Henry Holt.
    23. Almansi, R. J. (1960) The face-breast equation. JAPA, 6.
    24. Almansi, R. J. (1979) Scopophilia and object loss. PQ, 47.
    25. Altman, L. Z. (1969) The Dream in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    26. Altman, L. Z. (1977) Some vicissitudes of love. JAPA, 25.
    27. American Psychiatric Association. (1987) Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, 3d ed. revised. Washington, D. C.
    28. Ansbacher, Z. & Ansbacher, R. (1956) The Individual Psychology of Alfred Adler. New York: Basic Books.
    29. Anthony, E. J. (1981) Shame, guilt, and the feminine self in psychoanalysis. In: Object and Self, ed. S. Tuttman, C. Kaye & M. Zimmerman. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    30. Arlow. J. A. (1953) Masturbation and symptom formation. JAPA, 1.
    31. Arlow. J. A. (1959) The structure of the deja vu experience. JAPA, 7.
    32. Arlow. J. A. (1961) Ego psychology and the study of mythology. JAPA, 9.
    33. Arlow. J. A. (1963) Conflict, regression and symptom formation. IJP, 44.
    34. Arlow. J. A. (1966) Depersonalization and derealization. In: Psychoanalysis: A General Psychology, ed. R. M. Loewenstein, L. M. Newman, M. Schur & A. J. Solnit. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    35. Arlow. J. A. (1969) Fantasy, memory and reality testing. PQ, 38.
    36. Arlow. J. A. (1969) Unconscious fantasy and disturbances of mental experience. PQ, 38.
    37. Arlow. J. A. (1970) The psychopathology of the psychoses. IJP, 51.
    38. Arlow. J. A. (1975) The structural hypothesis. PQ, 44.
    39. Arlow. J. A. (1977) Affects and the psychoanalytic situation. IJP, 58.
    40. Arlow. J. A. (1979) Metaphor and the psychoanalytic situation. PQ, 48.
    41. Arlow. J. A. (1979) The genesis of interpretation. JAPA, 27 (suppl.).
    42. Arlow. J. A. (1982) Problems of the superego concept. PSOC, 37.
    43. Arlow. J. A. (1984) Disturbances of the sense of time. PQ, 53.
    44. Arlow. J. A. (1985) Some technical problems of countertransference. PQ, 54.
    45. Arlow, J. A. & Brenner, C. (1963) Psychoanalytic Concepts and the Structural Theory, New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    46. Arlow, J. A. & Brenner, C. (1969) The psychopathology of the psychoses. IJP, 50.
    47. Asch, S. S. (1966) Depression. PSOC, 21.
    48. Asch, S. S. (1976) Varieties of negative therapeutic reactions and problems of technique. JAPA, 24.
    49. Atkins, N. (1970) The Oedipus myth. Adolescence, and the succession of generations. JAPA, 18.
    50. Atkinson, J. W. & Birch, D. (1970) The Dynamics of Action. New York: Wiley.
    51. Bachrach, H. M. & Leaff, L. A. (1978) Analyzability. JAPA, 26.
    52. Bacon, C. (1956) A developmental theory of female homosexuality. In: Perversions,ed, S. Lorand & M. Balint. New York: Gramercy.
    53. Bak, R. C. (1953) Fetishism. JAPA. 1.
    54. Bak, R. C. (1968) The phallic woman. PSOC, 23.
    55. Bak, R. C. & Stewart, W. A. (1974) Fetishism, transvestism, and voyeurism. An American Handbook of Psychiatry, ed. S. Arieti. New York: Basic Books, vol. 3.
    56. Balint, A. (1949) Love for mother and mother-love. IJP, 30.
    57. Balter, L., Lothane, Z. & Spencer, J. H. (1980) On the analyzing instrument, PQ, 49.
    58. Basch, M. F. (1973) Psychoanalysis and theory formation. Ann. Psychoanal., 1.
    59. Basch, M. F. (1976) The concept of affect. JAPA, 24.
    60. Basch, M. F. (1981) Selfobject disorders and psychoanalytic theory. JAPA, 29.
    61. Basch, M. F. (1983) Emphatic understanding. JAPA. 31.
    62. Balldry, F. Character. PMC. Forthcoming.
    63. Balldry, F. (1983) The evolution of the concept of character in Freud's writings. JAPA. 31.
    64. Begelman, D. A. (1971) Misnaming, metaphors, the medical model and some muddles. Psychiatry, 34.
    65. Behrends, R. S. & Blatt, E. J. (1985) Internalization and psychological development throughout the life cycle. PSOC, 40.
    66. Bell, A. (1961) Some observations on the role of the scrotal sac and testicles JAPA, 9.
    67. Benedeck, T. (1949) The psychosomatic implications of the primary unit. Amer. J. Orthopsychiat., 19.
    68. Beres, C. (1958) Vicissitudes of superego functions and superego precursors in childhood. FSOC, 13.
    69. Beres, D. Conflict. PMC. Forthcoming.
    70. Beres, D. (1956) Ego deviation and the concept of schizophrenia. PSOC, 11.
    71. Beres, D. (1960) Perception, imagination and reality. IJP, 41.
    72. Beres, D. (1960) The psychoanalytic psychology of imagination. JAPA, 8.
    73. Beres, D. & Joseph, E. D. (1965) Structure and function in psychoanalysis. IJP, 46.
    74. Beres, D. (1970) The concept of mental representation in psychoanalysis. IJP, 51.
    75. Berg, M D. (1977) The externalizing transference. IJP, 58.
    76. Bergeret, J. (1985) Reflection on the scientific responsi bilities of the International Psychoanalytical Association. Memorandum distributed at 34th IPA Congress, Humburg.
    77. Bergman, A. (1978) From mother to the world outside. In: Grolnick et. al. (1978).
    78. Bergmann, M. S. (1980) On the intrapsychic function of falling in love. PQ, 49.
    79. Berliner, B. (1966) Psychodynamics of the depressive character. Psychoanal. Forum, 1.
    80. Bernfeld, S. (1931) Zur Sublimierungslehre. Imago, 17.
    81. Bibring, E. (1937) On the theory of the therapeutic results of psychoanalysis. IJP, 18.
    82. Bibring, E. (1941) The conception of the repetition compulsion. PQ, 12.
    83. Bibring, E. (1953) The mechanism of depression. In: Affective Disorders, ed. P. Greenacre. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    84. Bibring, E. (1954) Psychoanalysis and the dynamic psychotherapies. JAPA, 2.
    85. Binswanger, H. (1963) Positive aspects of the animus. Zьrich: Spring.
    86. Bion Francesca Abingdon: Fleetwood Press.
    87. Bion, W. R. (1952) Croup dynamics. IJP, 33.
    88. Bion, W. R. (1961) Experiences in Groups. London: Tavistock.
    89. Bion, W. R. (1962) A theory of thinking. IJP, 40.
    90. Bion, W. R. (1962) Learning from Experience. London: William Heinemann.
    91. Bion, W. R. (1963) Elements of Psychoanalysis. London: William Heinemann.
    92. Bion, W. R. (1965) Transformations. London: William Heinemann.
    93. Bion, W. R. (1970) Attention and Interpretation. London: Tavistock.
    94. Bion, W. R. (1985) All My Sins Remembered, ed. Francesca Bion. Adingdon: Fleetwood Press.
    95. Bird, B. (1972) Notes on transference. JAPA, 20.
    96. Blanck, G. & Blanck, R. (1974) Ego Psychology. New York: Columbia Univ. Press.
    97. Blatt, S. J. (1974) Levels of object representation in anaclitic and introjective depression. PSOC, 29.
    98. Blau, A. (1955) A unitary hypothesis of emotion. PQ, 24.
    99. Bleuler, E. (1911) Dementia Praecox or the Group of Schizophrenias. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1951.
    100. Blos, P. (1954) Prolonged adolescence. Amer. J. Orthopsychiat., 24.
    101. Blos, P. (1962) On Adolescence. New York: Free Press.
    102. Blos, P. (1972) The epigenesia of the adult neurosis. 27.
    103. Blos, P. (1979) Modification in the traditional psychoanalytic theory of adolescent development. Adolescent Psychiat., 8.
    104. Blos, P. (1984) Son and father. JAPA_. 32.
    105. Blum, G. S. (1963) Prepuberty and adolescence, In Studies ed. R. E. Grinder. New York: McMillan.
    106. Blum, H. P. Symbolism. FMC. Forthcoming.
    107. Blum, H. P. (1976) Female Psychology. JAPA, 24 (suppl.).
    108. Blum, H. P. (1976) Masochism, the ego ideal and the psychology of women. JAPA, 24 (suppl.).
    109. Blum, H. P. (1980) The value of reconstruction in adult psychoanalysis. IJP, 61.
    110. Blum, H. P. (1981) Forbidden quest and the analytic ideal. PQ, 50.
    111. Blum, H. P. (1983) Defense and resistance. Foreword. JAFA, 31.
    112. Blum, H. P., Kramer, Y., Richards, A. K. & Richards, A. D., eds. (1988) Fantasy, Myth and Reality: Essays in Honor of Jacob A. Arlow. Madison, Conn.: Int. Univ. Press.
    113. Boehm, F. (1930) The femininity-complex In men. IJP,11.
    114. Boesky, D. Structural theory. PMC. Forthcoming.
    115. Boesky, D. (1973) Deja raconte as a screen defense. PQ, 42.
    116. Boesky, D. (1982) Acting out. IJP, 63.
    117. Boesky, D. (1986) Questions about Sublimation In Psychoanalysis the Science of Mental Conflict, ed. A. D. Richards & M. S. Willick. Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.
    118. Bornstein, B. (1935) Phobia in a 2 1/2-year-old child. PQ, 4.
    119. Bornstein, B. (1951) On latency. PSOC, 6.
    120. Bornstein, M., ed. (1983) Values and neutrality in psychoanalysis. Psychoanal. Inquiry, 3.
    121. Bowlby, J. (1960) Grief and morning in infancy and early childhood. PSOC. 15.
    122. Bowlby, J. (1961) Process of mourning. IJP. 42.
    123. Bowlby, J. (1980) Attachment and Loss, vol. 3. New York: Basic Books.
    124. Bradlow, P. A. (1973) Depersonalization, ego splitting, non-human fantasy and shame. IJP, 54.
    125. Brazelton, T. B., Kozlowsky, B. & Main, M. (1974) The early motherinfant interaction. In: The Effect of the Infant on Its Caregiver, ed. M. Lewis & L. Rosenblum New York Wiley.
    126. Brenner, C. (1957) The nature and development of the concept of repression in Freud's writings. PSOC, 12.
    127. Brenner, C. (1959) The masochistic character. JAPA, 7.
    128. Brenner, C. (1973) An Elementary Textbook of Psycho-analysis. New York Int. Univ. Press.
    129. Brenner, C. (1974) On the nature and development of affects PQ, 43.
    130. Brenner, C. (1976) Psychoanalytic Technique and Psychic Conflict. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    131. Brenner, C. (1979) The Mind in Conflict. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    132. Brenner, C. (1979) Working alliance, therapeutic alliance and transference. JAPA, 27.
    133. Brenner, C. (1981) Defense and defense mechanisms. PQ, 50.
    134. Brenner, C. (1983) Defense. In: the Mind in Conflict. New York Int. Univ. Press.
    135. Bressler, B. (1965) The concept of the self. Psychoanalytic Review, 52.
    136. Breuer, J. & Freud, S. (1983—95) Studies on Hysteria. SE, 3.
    137. Breznitz, S., ed. (1983) The Denial of Stress. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    138. Brody, S. (1964) Passivity. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    139. Brown, H. (1970) Psycholinquistics. New York: Free Press.
    140. Bruner, J. S. (1964) The course of cognitive growth. Amer. Psychologist. 19.
    141. Bruner, J., Jolly, A. & Sylva, K. (1976) Play. New York Basic Books.
    142. Bruner, J. E., Olver, R. R. &Greenfield, P. M. (1966) Studies in Cognitive Growth. New York: Wiley.
    143. Buie, D H. (1981) Empathy. JAPA, 29.
    144. Burgner, M. & Edgeumble, R. (1972) Some problems in the conceptualization of early object relationships. PSOC, 27.
    145. Call, J. ed. (1979) Basic Handbook of Child Psychiatry. New York: Basic Books.
    146. Carroll, G. (1956) Language, Thought and Reality. Cambridge & London: M. I. T. Press & John Wiley.
    147. Cavenar, J. O. & Nash, J. L. (1976) The effects of Combat on the normal personality. Comprehensive Psychiat., 17.
    148. Chassequet-Smirgel, J. (1978) Reflections on the connection between perversion and sadism. IJP, 59.
    149. Chomsky, N. (1978) Language and unconscious knowledge. In: Psychoanalysis and Language, ed. J. H. Smith. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press, vol. 3.
    150. Clower, V. (1975) Significance of masturbation in female sexual development and function. In: Masturbation from Infancy to Senescence, ed. I. Marcus & J. Francis. New York: Int. Uni" Press.
    151. Coen, S. J. & Bradlow, P. A. (1982) Twin transference as a compromise formation. JAPA, 30.
    152. Compton, A. Object and relationships. PMC. Forthcoming.
    153. Cullen, W. (1777) First Lines of the Practice of Psysic. Edinburgh: Bell, Brandfute.
    154. Curtis, B. C. (1969) Psychoanalytic understanding and treatment of impotence. In: Sexual Function and Dysfunction, ed. P. J. Fink & V. B. O. Hummett. Philadelphia: F. A. Davis.
    155. Darwin, C. (1874) The Descent of Man. New York: Hurst.
    156. Davidoff-Hirsch, H. (1985) Oedipal and preoedipal phenomena. JAPA, 33.
    157. Davis, M. & Wallbridge, D. (1981) Boundary and Space. New York: Brunner-Mazel.
    158. Deutsch, H. (1932) Homosexuality in women. PQ, 1.
    159. Deutsch, H. (1934) Some forms of emotional disturbance and their relationship to schizophrenia. PQ, 11.
    160. Deutsch, H. (1937) Absence of grief. PQ, 6.
    161. Deutsch, H. (1942) Some forms of emotional disturbance and their relationship to schizophrenia. PQ, 11.
    162. Deutsch, H. (1955) The impostor. In: Neuroses and Character Types. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1965.
    163. Devereux, G. (1953) Why Oedipus killed Lains. IJP, 34.
    164. Dewald, P. (1982) Psychoanalytic perspectives On resistance. In: resistance, Psychodynamics. and Behavioral Approaches, ed. P. Wachtel. New York: Plenum Press.
    165. Dickes, R. (1963) Fetishistic behavior. JAPA. 11.
    166. Dickes, R. (1965) The defensive function of an altered state of consciousness. JAPA, 13.
    167. Dickes, R. (1967) Severe regressive disruption of the therapeutic alliance. JAPA, 15.
    168. Dickes, R. (1981) Sexual myths and misinformation. In: Understanding Human Behaviour in Health and Illness, ed. R. C. Simon & H. Pardes. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins.
    169. Dorpat, T. L. (1985) Denial and Defense in the Therapeutic Situation. New York: Jason Aronson.
    170. Downey, T. W. (1978) Transitional phenomena in the analysis of early adolescent males. PSOC, 33.
    171. Dunbar, F. (1954) Emotions and Bodily Functions. New York: Columbia Univ. Press.
    172. Easson, W. M. (1973) The earliest ego development, primitive memory traces, and the Isakower phenomenon. PQ, 42.
    173. Edelheit, H. (1971) Mythopoiesis and the primal scene. Psychoanal. Study Society, 5.
    174. Edgcumbe, R. & Burgner, M. (1972) Some problems in the conceptualization of early object relation ships, part I. PSOC, 27.
    175. Edgcumbe, R. & Burgner, M. (1975) The phallicnarcissistic phase. PSOC, 30.
    176. Eidelberg, L. (1960) A third contribution to the study of slips of the tongue. IJP, 41.
    177. Eidelberg, L. (1968) Encyclopedia of Psychoanalysis. New York: The Free Press; London: Collier-MacMillan.
    178. Eissler, K. R. (1953) The effect of the structure of the ego on psychoanalytic technique. JAPA, 1.
    179. Ellenberg, H. F. (1970) The Discovery of the Unconscious. New York: Basic Books.
    180. Emde, R. N. (1980) Toward a psychoanalytic theory of affect: I. & G. H. Pollock. Washington NYMH.
    181. Emde R., Gaensbaner, T. & Harmon R. (1976) Emotional Expression in Infancy. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    182. Erode R. & Harmon, R. J. (1972) Endogenous and exogenous smiling systems in early infancy. J. Amer. Acad. Child Psychiat., 11.
    183. Engel, G. L. (1962) Psychological Development in Health and Disease. New York Saunders.
    184. Engel, G. L. (1967) Psychoanalytic theory of somatic disorder. JAPA, 15.
    185. Engel, G. L. (1968) A reconsideration of the role of conversion in somatic disease. Compr. Psychiat., 94.
    186. English, H. B. & English, A. C. (1958) A comprehensive Dictionary of Psychological and Psychoanalytical Terms. New York: David McKay.
    187. Erard, R. (1983) New wine in old skins. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 10.
    188. Erdelyi, M. H. (1985) Psychoanalysis. New York: W. H. Freeman.
    189. Erikson, E. H. (1950) Childhood and Society. New York: Norton.
    190. Erikson, E. H. (1956) The concept of ego identity. JAPA, 4.
    191. Erikson, E. H. (1956) The problem of ego identity. JAPA, 4.
    192. Esman, A. H. (1973) The primal scene. PSOC, 28.
    193. Esman, A. H. (1975) The Psychology of Adolescence. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    194. Esman, A. H. (1979) Some reflections on boredom. JAPA, 27.
    195. Esman, A. H. (1983) The "stimulus barrier": a review and reconsideration. PSOC, 38.
    196. Fairbairn, W. R. D. (1952) Psychoanalytic Studies of the Personality. London: Routledge & Kegan Paul.
    197. Fairbairn, W. R. D. (1954) An Object-Relations Theory of the Personality. New York: Basic Books.
    198. Fairbairn, W. R. D. (1963) Synopsis of an Object-Relations theory of the personality. IJP, 44.
    199. Fawcett, J., Clark, D. C., Scheftner, W. H. & Hedecker, D. (1983) Differences between anhedonia and normal hedonic depressive states. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 40.
    200. Fenichel, O. (1934) On the psychology of boredom. Collected Papers. New York: Norton, 1953, vol. 1.
    201. Fenichel, O. (1941) Problems of Psychoanalytic Technique. Albany, N. Y.: Psychoanalytic Quaterly.
    202. Fenichel, O. (1945) Character disorders. In: The Psychoanalytic Theory of the Neurosis. New York: Norton.
    203. Fenichel, O. (1945) The Psychoanalytic Theory of Neurosis New York: Norton.
    204. Fenichel, O. (1954) Ego strength and ego weakness. Collected Papers. New York: Norton, vol. 2.
    205. Ferenczi, S. (1909) Introjection and transference. In: Sex in Psychoanalysis. New York: Basic Books.
    206. Ferenczi, S. (191617) Disease or patho-neurosis. The Theory and Technique of Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press, 1950.
    207. Ferenczi, S. (1925) Psychoanalysis of sexual habits. In: The Theory and Technique of Psychoanalysis. New York: Basic Books.
    208. Fine, B. D., Joseph, E. D. & Waldhorn, H. F., eds. (1971) Recollection and Reconstruction in Psychoanalysis. Monograph 4, Kris Study Group. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    209. Fink, G. (1967) Analysis of the Isakower phenomenon. JAPA, 15.
    210. Fink, P. J. (1970) Correlation between "actual" neurosis and the work of Masters and Johson. P. Q, 39.
    211. Finkenstein, L. (1975) Awe premature ejaculation. P. Q, 44.
    212. Firestein, S. K. (1978) A review of the literature. In: Termination in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    213. Fisher, C. et. al. (1957) A study of the preliminary stages of the construction of dreams and images. JAPA, 5.
    214. Fisher, C. et. al. (1968) Cycle of penile erection synchronous with dreaming (REM) sleep. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 12.
    215. Fliess, R. (1942) The metapsychology of the analyst. PQ, 12.
    216. Fliess, R. (1953) The Revival of Interest in the Dream. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    217. Fodor, N. & Gaynor, F. (1950) Freud: Dictionary of Psycho-analysis. New York: Philosophical Library.
    218. Fordham, M. (1969) Children as Individuals. London: Hodder & Stoughton.
    219. Fordham, M. (1976) The Self and Autism. London: Academic Press.
    220. Fraiberg, S. (1969) Object constancy and mental representation. PSOC, 24.
    221. Frank, A. Metapsychology. PMS. Forthcoming.
    222. Frank, A. & Muslin, H. (1967) The development of Freud's concept of primal repression. PSOC, 22.
    223. Frank, H. (1977) Dynamic patterns for failure in college students. Can. Psychiat. Ass. J., 22.
    224. French, T. & Fromm, E. (1964) Dream Interpretation. New York: Basic Books.
    225. Freud, A. (1936) The Ego and the Mechanisms of Defense. New York Int. Univ. Press.
    226. Freud, A. (1951) Observations on child development. PSOC, 6.
    227. Freud, A. (1952) The mutual influences in the development of ego and id. WAF, 4.
    228. Freud, A. (1958) Adolescence. WAF, 5.
    229. Freud, A. (1962) Assessment of childhood disturbances. PSOC, 17.
    230. Freud, A. (1962) Comments on psychic trauma. In: Furst (1967).
    231. Freud, A. (1963) The concept of developmental lines. PSOC, 18.
    232. Freud, A. (1965) Assessment of pathology, part 2. WAF, 6.
    233. Freud, A. (1965) Normality and Pathology in Childhood. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    234. Freud, A. (1970) The infantile neurosis. WAF, 7.
    235. Freud, A. (1971) Comments on aggression. IJP, 53.
    236. Freud, A. (1971) The infantile neurosis. PSOC, 26.
    237. Freud, A. (1981) Insight. PSOC, 36.
    238. Freud, S. (1887—1902) Letters to Wilhelm Fliess. New York: Basic Books, 1954.
    239. Freud, S. (1891) On the interpretation of the aphasias. SE, 3.
    240. Freud, S. (1893—95) Studies on hysteria. SE, 2.
    241. Freud, S. (1894) The neuropsychoses of defence. SE, 3.
    242. Freud, S. (1895) On the ground for detaching a particular syndrome from neurasthenia under the description "anxiety neurosis". SE, 3.
    243. Freud, S. (1895) Project for a scientific psychology. SE, 1.
    244. Freud, S. (1896) Draft K, Jameary 1, 1896, Neuroses of defense (A Christmas fairytale). In: Extracts from the Fliess papers (1892—99).
    245. Freud, S. (1896) Further remarks on the neuropsychosis of defense. SE, 3.
    246. Freud, S. (1896) Heredity and aetiology of neurosis. SE, 3.
    247. Freud, S. (1898) Sexuality in the aetiology of the neurosis. SE, 3.
    248. Freud, S. (1899) Screen memories. SE, 3.
    249. Freud, S. (1900) The interpretation of dreams. SE, 4—5.
    250. Freud, S. (1901) Childhood memories and screen memories SE, 6.
    251. Freud, S. (1901) On dreams. SE, 5.
    252. Freud, S. (1901) The psychopathology of everyday life. SE, 6.
    253. Freud, S. (1905) Fragments of an analysis of a case of hysteria. SE, 7.
    254. Freud, S. (1905) Jokes and their relation to the unconscious. SE, 8.
    255. Freud, S. (1905) Psysical (or mental) treatment. SE, 7.
    256. Freud, S. (1905) Three essays on the theory of sexuality. SE. 7.
    257. Freud, S. (1908) Character and anal erotism. SE, 9.
    258. Freud, S. (1908) On the sexual theories of children. SE, 9.
    259. Freud, S. (1908) Preface to Wilhelm Stekel's Nervous Anxiety-States and Their Treatment. SE, 9.
    260. Freud, S. (1909) Analysis of a phobia in a five-year-old boy. SE, 10.
    261. Freud, S. (1909) Family romances. SE, 9.
    262. Freud, S. (1909) Notes upon a case of obsessional neurosis. SE, 10.
    263. Freud, S. (1910) A special type of choice of object made by men. SE, 11.
    264. Freud, S. (1910) The autithentical meaning of primal words. SE, 11.
    265. Freud, S. (1910) The future prospects of psychoanalytic therapy. SE, 11.
    266. Freud, S. (1910) The psychoanalytic view of psychogenic disturbance of vision. SE, 11.
    267. Freud, S. (1911) Formulations on the two principles of mental functioning. SE, 12.
    268. Freud, S. (1911) Notes on a case of paranoia. SE, 12.
    269. Freud, S. (1911) Psychoanalytic notes on an autobiographical account of a case of paranoia. SE, 12.
    270. Freud, S. (1911—15) Papers on technique. SE, 12.
    271. Freud, S. (1912) Contribution to a discussion on masturbation. SE, 12.
    272. Freud, S. (1912) On the universal tendency to abasement in the sphere of love. SE, 11.
    273. Freud, S. (1912) The dynamics of transference. SE, 12.
    274. Freud, S. (1913) Editor's note The disposition to obsessional neurosis. SE, 12.
    275. Freud, S. (1913) On beginning the treatment. SE, 12.
    276. Freud, S. (1913) Totem and taboo. SE, 13.
    277. Freud, S. (1914) Fausse reconnaissance (deja reconte) in psychoanalytic treatment. SE, 13.
    278. Freud, S. (1914) Mourning and melancholia. SE, 15.
    279. Freud, S. (1914) Observations on transference love. SE, 12.
    280. Freud, S. (1914) On narcissism. SE. 14.
    281. Freud, S. (1914) On the history of the psychoanalytic movement. SE, 14.
    282. Freud, S. (1914) Remembering, repeating, and working-through. SE, 12.
    283. Freud, S. (1914—16) Some character types met with in psychoanalysis. (II) Those wrecked by success SE, 14.
    284. Freud, S. (1915) Das UnbewuЯte. Gesammelte Werke, 10.
    285. Freud, S. (1915) Instincts and their vicissitudes. SE, 14.
    286. Freud, S. (1915) Observation on transference-love. SE, I2.
    287. Freud, S. (1915) Repression. SE, 14.
    288. Freud, S. (1915) The unconscious. SE, 14.
    289. Freud, S. (1915—17) Introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 15 & 16.
    290. Freud, S. (1916) Introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 16.
    291. Freud, S. (1916) Some character types met with in psychoanalytic work. SE, 16.
    292. Freud, S. (1917) A metapsychological supplement to the theory of dreams. SE, 14.
    293. Freud, S. (1917) Introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 16.
    294. Freud, S. (1917) Mourning and melancholia. SE, 14.
    295. Freud, S. (1917) On transformations of instinct as exemplified in anal erotism. SE, 17.
    296. Freud, S. (1918) From the history of an infantile neurosis. SE, 17.
    297. Freud, S. (1919) "A child is being beaten". SE, 17.
    298. Freud, S. (1919) Lines of advance in psychoanalytic therapy. SE, 17.
    299. Freud, S. (1919) The uncanny. SE, 17.
    300. Freud, S. (1920) Beyond the pleasure principle. SE, 18.
    301. Freud, S. (1920) The Psychogenesis of a case of homosexuality in a woman. SE, 18.
    302. Freud, S. (1921) Group psychology and the analysis of the ego. SE, 18.
    303. Freud, S. (1923) The ego and the id. SE, 19.
    304. Freud, S. (1923) The infantile genital organization. SE, 19.
    305. Freud, S. (1924) A short account of psychoanalysis. SE, 19.
    306. Freud, S. (1924) Neurosis and psychosis. SE, 19.
    307. Freud, S. (1924) The dissolution of the Oedipus complex SE, 19.
    308. Freud, S. (1924) The economic problem of masochism. SE, 19.
    309. Freud, S. (1924) The loss of reality in neurosis and psychosis. SE, 19.
    310. Freud, S. (1925) Negation. SE, 19.
    311. Freud, S. (1925) Some psychical consequences of the anatomical distinction between the sexes. SE, 19.
    312. Freud, S. (1926) Inhibitions, symptoms and anxiety. SE, 20.
    313. Freud, S. (1926) The question of lay analysis. SE, 20.
    314. Freud, S. (1927) Fetishism. SE, 21.
    315. Freud, S. (1930) Civilization and its discontents. SE, 21.
    316. Freud, S. (1931) Female sexuality. SE, 21.
    317. Freud, S. (1931) Libidinal types. SE, 21.
    318. Freud, S. (1933) Femininity. SE, 22,.
    319. Freud, S. (1933) New introductory lectures on psycho-analysis. SE, 22.
    320. Freud, S. (1933) The psychology of women. New introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 22.
    321. Freud, S. (1936) A disturbance of memory on the Acropolis. SE, 22.
    322. Freud, S. (1937) Analysis terminable and interminable. SE, 23.
    323. Freud, S. (1937) Constructions in analysis. SE, 23.
    324. Freud, S. (1938) An outline on psychoanalysis. SE, 23.
    325. Freud, S. (1938) Splitting of the ego in the process of defense. SE, 23.
    326. Freud, S. (1939) Moses and monotheism. SE, 23.
    327. Freud, S. (1940) An outline of psychoanalysis. SE, 23.
    328. Frosch, J. (1966) A note on reality constancy. In: Psychoanalysis — A General Psychology, ed. R. M. Loewenstein, L. M. Newman, M. Schur & A. J. Solnit. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    329. Frosch, J. (1967) Delusional fixity sense of conviction and the psychotic conflict. IJP, 48.
    330. Frosch, J. (1977) The relation between acting out and disorders of impulse control. Psychiatry, 40.
    331. Frosch, J. (1980) Neurosis and psychosis. In: The Course of Life, ed. S. J. Greenspan & G. H. Pollock. Washington, D. C.: National Institute of Health, vol. 3.
    332. Frosch, J. (1983) The Psychotic Process. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    333. Furer, M. (1972) The history of the superego concept in psychoanalysis. In: Moral Value and the Superego concept in Psychoanalysis, ed. S. C. Fost. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    334. Furman, E. (1974) A Child s Parent Dies. New Heaven: Yale Univ. Press.
    335. Furman, E. (1980) Transference and externalization. PSOC, 35.
    336. Furst, S. Trauma. PMC, Forthcoming.
    337. Furst, S. (1967) Psychic trauma. In: Psychic Trauma, ed. S. S. Furst. New York: Basic Books.
    338. Furst, S. (1978) The stimulus barrier and the pathogenecity of trauma. IJP, 59.
    339. Gaddini, R. (1978) Transitional object and the psychosomatic symptom. In: Grolnich et. al. (1978).
    340. Galenson, E. & Roiphe, H. (1976) Some suggested revisions concerning early female development. JAPA, 24(5).
    341. Galenson, E. & Roiphe, H. (1980) The preoedipal development of the boy. JAPA, 28.
    342. Galenson, E. & Roiphe, H. (1981) Infantile Origins of Sexual Identity. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    343. Ganzarain, R. Group psychology. PMC. Forthcoming.
    344. Ganzarain, R. (1980) Psychotic-like anxieties and primitive defenses. Issues on Ego Psychology, 3(2).
    345. Ganzarain, R. (1988) A comparative study of Bion's concepts about groups. In: Object Relations Group Psychotherapy. Madison, Ct.: Int. Univ. Press.
    346. Gediman, H. K. (1971) The concept of the stimulus barrier. IJP, 52.
    347. Gedo, J. & Goldberg, A. (1973) Models of the Mind. Chicago & London: Univ. of Chicago Press.
    348. Geerts, A. E. & Prechardt, E., reporters (1978) Colloquium on "trauma". IJP, 59.
    349. Gero, G. (1943) The idea of psychogenesis in modern psychiatry and in psychoanalysis. Psychoanal. Rev., 30.
    350. Gill. M. M. (1963) Topography and Systems in Psychoanalytic Theory. Psychol. Issues, Monogr. 10. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    351. Gill. M. M. (1967) The primary process in motives and thought. In: Motives and Thought, ed. R. R. Holt. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    352. Gill. M. M. (1974) Psychoanalysis and psychotherapy. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 11.
    353. Gill, M. M & Rapaport, D. (1942) A case of amnesia and its bearing on the theory of memory. Character and Personality, 11.
    354. Gillespie, W. (1956) The general theory of Sexual perversion. IJP, 37.
    355. Glenn, J. (in press) A parameter. In: Annu. Psychoanal.
    356. Glenn, J. & Kaplan, E. H. (1968) Types of orgasm in women. JAPA, 16.
    357. Glower, E. (1929) The "screening" function of traumatic memories. IJP, 4.
    358. Glower, E. (1931) Sublimation, substitution, and social anxiety. IJP, 12.
    359. Glower, E. (1933) The relation of perversion-formation to the development of reality sense. IJP, 14.
    360. Glower, E. (1955) The terminal phase. In: The Technique of Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    361. Goldberg, A. (1975) The evolution of psychoanalytic concepts of depression. In: Depression and Human Existence, ed. E. J. Anthony & T. Benedeck. Boston: Little, Brown.
    362. Goldberg, A. ed. (1978) The Psychology of the Self. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    363. Goldberg, A. (1983) Self psychology and alternate perspectives on internalization. In: Reflections on Self Psychology, ed. J. Lichtenberg & S. Kaplan. Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.
    364. Green, A. (1978) Potential space in Psychoanalysis. In: Grolnich et. al. (1978).
    365. Greenacre, P. (1949) A contribution to the study of screen memories. FSOC, 3/4.
    366. Greenacre, P. (1950) General problems of acting out. PQ, 19.
    367. Greenacre, P. (1950) Special problems of early female sexual development. In: Trauma, Growth and Personality New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    368. Greenacre, P. (1952) Pregenital patterning. IJP, 33.
    369. Greenacre, P. (1953) Penis awe and its relation to penis envy. In: Drives, Affects, Behavior, ed. R. M. Loewenstein. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    370. Greenacre, P. (1956) Experiences of awe in childhood. PSOC,11.
    371. Greenacre, P. (1957) The childhood of the artist. PSOC, 12.
    372. Greenacre, P. (1958) The family romance of the artist. In: Emotional Growth. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1971, vol. 2.
    373. Greenacre, P. (1958) The relation of the impostor to the artist. In: Emotional Growth. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1971, vol. 1.
    374. Greenacre, P. (1968) Perversions. PSOC, 23.
    375. Greenacre, P. (1969) The fetish and the transitional object, part 1. PSOC, 24.
    376. Greenacre, P. (1970) The fetish and the transitional object, part 2. IJP 51, vol. 4.
    377. Greenacre, P. (1970) The transitional object and the fetish. In: Emotional Growth. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    378. Greenacre, P. (1972) Crowds and crisis. PSOC, 27.
    379. Greenacre, P. (1973) The primal scene and the sense of reality. PQ, 42.
    380. Greenacre, P. (1975) On reconstruction. JAPA, 21.
    381. Greenberg, J. R. & Mitchell, S. A. (1983) Object Relations in Psychoanalytic Theory. Cambridge: Harvard Univ. Press.
    382. Greenson, R. R. (1949) The psychology of apathy. PQ, 18.
    383. Greenson, R. R. (1953) On boredom. JAPA, 1.
    384. Greenson, R. R. (1960) Empathy and its vicissitudes. IJP, 41.
    385. Greenson, R. R. (1962) On enthusiasm. JAPA, 10.
    386. Greenson, R. R. (1965) The working alliance and the transference neurosis. PQ, 34.
    387. Greenson, R. R. (1967) The technique and Practice of Psycho-analysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    388. Greenson, R. R. (1978) Exploration in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    389. Greenspan, S. & Pollock, G., eds. (1980) The Course of Life. Vol. I. Washington, D. C.: U. S. Government Printing office.
    390. Grinberg, L., Sor, D. & Tabak de Bianchedi, E. (1975) Introduction to the Work of Bion, trans. A. Hahn. Scotland: Clunie Press.
    391. Grinker, E. R (1945) Psychiatric disorders in combat crews overseas and in returnees. Med. Clin. North. Amer., 29.
    392. Grinstein, A. (1983) Freud's Rules of Dream Interpretation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    393. Grolnick, S., Barkin, L. & Muensterberger, W., eds. (1978) Between Reality and Fantasy. New York: Jason Aronson.
    394. Grosskurth, P. (1986) Melanie Klein. New York: Alfred Knopf.
    395. Grossman, W. E. & Stewart, W. A. (1976) Penis envy. JAPA, 24 (5).
    396. Grotstein, J. S. (1981) Splitting and Projective Indentification. New York: Jason Aronson.
    397. Guntrip, H. (1961) Personality Structure and Human Interaction. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    398. Guntrip, H. (1968) Schizoid Phenomena, Object-Relations and the Self. London: Hogarth Press.
    399. Harley, M. (1967) Transference developments in a five-year old child. In: the Child Analyst at Work, ed. E. Geleerd. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    400. Harley, M. (1974) Analyst and Adolescent at Work. New York: Quadrangle.
    401. Harley, M. (1986) Child analysis, 1947—1984, a retrospective. PSOC, 41.
    402. Harre, R. and Lamb, R. (1983) The Encyclopedia Dictionary of Psychology. Cambridge: M. I. T. Press.
    403. Harrison, J. B. (1975) On the maternal origins of awe. PSOC, 30.
    404. Harrison, J. B. (1979) On Freud's view of the infant-mother relationship and of the oceanic feeling. JAPA, 27.
    405. Harrison, S. J. (1970) Is psychoanalysis "our science?". JAPA, 18.
    406. Hartmann, H. PSOC, 5.
    407. Hartmann, H. (1937) Ego Psychology and the Problem of Adaptation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    408. Hartmann, H. (1939) Ego Psychology and the Problem of Adaptation. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1958.
    409. Hartmann, H. (1939) Psychoanalysis and the concept of health. In: Hartmann (1964).
    410. Hartmann, H. (1947) On rational and irrational action. In: Essays on Ego Psychology. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1964.
    411. Hartmann, H. (1948) Comments on the theory of instinctual drives. PQ, 17.
    412. Hartmann, H. (1950) Comments on the psychoanalytic theory of the ego. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    413. Hartmann, H. (1951) Technical implications of ego psychology PQ, 20.
    414. Hartmann, H. (1952) The mutual influences in the development of ego and id. PSOC, 7.
    415. Hartmann, H. (1953) Contribution to the metapsychology of schizophrenia. In: Hartmann, PSOC, 8.
    416. Hartmann, H. (1953) The metapsychology of schizophrenia. PSOC, 8.
    417. Hartmann, H. (1955) Notes on the theory of sublimation. PSOC, 10.
    418. Hartmann, H. (1956) The development of the ego concept in Freud's work. IJP, 37.
    419. Hartmann, H. (1964) Essays in Ego Psychology. New York Int. Univ. Press.
    420. Hartmann, H. (1964) The development of the ego concept in Freud's work. IJP, 37.
    421. Hartmann, H., Kris, E. & Loewenstein, R. M. (1946) Comments in the formation of psychic structure. PSOC, 2.
    422. Hartmann, H., Kris, E. & Loewenstein, R. M. (1949) Notes on the theory of aggression. PSOC, 3/4.
    423. Hartmann, H. & Loewenstein, R. M. (1962) Notes on the superego. PSOC, 17.
    424. Hassler, A. D. (1960) Guideposts of migrating fish. Science, 122.
    425. Hastings, D. W. (1963) Impotence and Frigidity. Boston: Little, Brown.
    426. Heimann, P. (1952) Certain functions of introjection and projection in early infancy. In: Klein et al. (1952).
    427. Heimann, P. & Valenstein, A. F. (1962) Notes on the anal stage IJP, 43.
    428. Heimann, P. & Valenstein, A. F. (1972) The psychoanalytical concept of aggression. IJP, 53.
    429. Hendrick, I. (1958) Facts and Theories of Psychoanalysis, 3rd ed. New York: Alfred Knopf.
    430. Hill, M. (1982) Analysis of transference. In: Theory and Technique, vol. 1. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    431. Hoffer, W. (1949) Mouth, hand, and ego integration. PSOC, 3/4.
    432. Holder, A. (1982) Preoedipal contributions to the formation of the superego. PSOC, 37.
    433. Holt, R. R. (1964) The emergence of cognitive psychology JAPA, 12.
    434. Holt, R. R. (1967) Beyond vitalism and mechanism. In: Science and Psychoanalysis, ed. J. H. Masserman. Hew York: Grune & Stratton, vol. 2.
    435. Hook, S. (1959) Psychoanalysis, Scientific Method and Philosophy. New York: Grove Press.
    436. Horney, K. (1924) On the genesis of the castration complex in women. IJP, 5.
    437. Horney, K. (1926) The flight from womanhood. IJP, 7.
    438. Horowitz, M. J. (1972) Modes of representation of thought. JAFA, 20.
    439. Horowitz, M. J. (1979) States of Mind, 2d. ed. New York: Plenum, 1987, chap. 3.
    440. Hurvich, M. (1970) On the concept of reality testing. IJP, 51.
    441. Isaacs, S. (1952) The nature and function of phantasy. In: Klein et. al. (1952).
    442. Isakower, O. (1938) A contribution to the pathopsychology of phenomena associated with falling asleep. IJP, 19.
    443. Isakower, O. (1963) Minutes of the faculty meeting. New York Psychoanalytic Institute, Oct. 14—Nov. 20. A. Z. Pteffer, reporter.
    444. Isay, R. A. (1986) Homosexuality in homosexual and heterosexual men. In: The Psychology of Men, ed. G. Fogel, F. Lane & R. Liebert. New York: Basic Books.
    445. Jacobi, J. (1959) Complex (Archetype) Symbol in the Work of C. G. Jung. Princeton, N. J.: Princeton Univ. Press.
    446. Jacobs, T. J. (1986) Transference relationships, relationships between transferences and reconstruction. In: Psycho-analysis, the Science of Mental Conflict, ed. A. D. Richards & M. S. Willick. Hillsdale N. J.: Analytic Press.
    447. Jacobson, E. (1953) Contribution to the metapsychology of cyclothymic depression. In: Affective Disorders, ed. P. Greenacre. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    448. Jacobson, E. (1954) Contribution to the metapsychology of psychotic identifications. JAPA, 2.
    449. Jacobson, E. (1957) Normal and pathological moods. PSOC, 12.
    450. Jacobson, E. (1959) Depersonalization. JAPA, 7.
    451. Jacobson, E. (1964) The Self and the Object World. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    452. Jacobson, E. (1967) Psychotic Conflict and Reality. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    453. Jacobson, E. (1971) Depression. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    454. Jacobson, E. (1971) Depression: Comparative Studies of Normal, Neurotic and Psychotic Conditions. Madison, Conn.: Int. Univ. Press.
    455. Jacobson, E. (1971) Normal and pathological moods. In: Depression. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    456. Jacobson, E. (1975) The regulation of self-esteem. In: Depression and Human Existence. ed. E. J. Anthony & T. Benedeck. Boston: Little, Brown.
    457. Jaffe, A. (1971) The Myth of Meaning. New York: Putnam.
    458. Jaffe, D. S. (1970) Forgetting and remembering. P. Q, 39.
    459. Janet, Dr. Pierre (1924) Principles of Psychotherapy. New York: Macmillan.
    460. John, E. R. (1976) A model of consciousness. In: Consciousness and Self-Regulation, ed. G. E. Schwartz & D. Shapiro. New York: Plenum Press, 1976, vol. 1.
    461. Jones, E. (1908) Rationalization in everyday life J Abnorm. Psychol., 3: 161—169.
    462. Jones, E. (1918) Anal-erotic character traits. In: Papers on Psychoanalysis London— Balliere Tindall & Cox, 1948.
    463. Jones, E. (1931) The concept of a normal mind. In: Papers on Psychoanalysis, 5th ed., London. Bailliйre, Tindall & Cox, 1948.
    464. Jones, E. (1933) The phallic phase. IJP, 14.
    465. Jones, E. (1934) Editorial preface to the Collected Papers of Sigmund Freud, 4. London— Hogarth Press.
    466. Jones, E. (1941) Evolution and revolution. IJP, 22.
    467. Jones, E. (1949) Hamlet and Oedipus. New York: Norton.
    468. Jones, E. (1957) The life and work of Sigmund Freud, vol. 3. New York: Basic Books.
    469. Joseph, E. D. (1965) Regressive Ego Phenomena in Psychoanalysis. Monograph I, Kris Study Group. New York Int. Univ. Press.
    470. Joseph, E. D. (1966) Memory and conflict. PQ, 35.
    471. Joseph, E. D. & Wallerstein, R. S (1982) Psychotherapy. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    472. Jung, C. G. (1921—57) Collected Works of C. G. Jung Princeton, N. J.: Princeton Univ. Press.
    473. Jung, C. G. (1938) Psychological aspects of the mother archetype. In: Collected Works, vol. 9, pt. 1.
    474. Jung, C. G. (1957) Animus and Anima. Zurich: Spring.
    475. Jung, C. G. (1963) Memories Dreams, Reflections. New York Pantheon.
    476. Kamyer, M. (1985) Identification and its vicissitudes. IJP, 66.
    477. Kandell, E (1976) Cellular Basis of Behavior. San Francisco— W H. Freeman.
    478. Kanzer, M. (1948) The passing of the Oedipus complex' in Greek drama. IJP, 29.
    479. Kanzer, M. (1964) On interpreting the Oedipus plays Psychoanal Study Society, 3.
    480. Kanzer, M. (1981) Freud's "analytic pact". JAPA, 29.
    481. Kardiner, A. (1941) The Traumatic Neurosis of War New. York: Hoeber.
    482. Karma, L. (1981) A clinical report of penis envy. JAPA, 29.
    483. Karush, A., Daniels, C. E., Flood, C. & O'Connor, J. F. (1977) Psychotherapy in Chronic Ulcerative Colitis. Philadelphia: Sannders.
    484. Katan, A. (1972) The infant's first reaction to strangers. IJP, 53.
    485. Katan, M. (1940) The role of the word in mania. Bull. Phi la. Assn. Psychoanal., 22.
    486. Katz, J. (1963) On primary gain and secondary gain. PSOC, 18.
    487. Katz, J. (1985) Book review of Melanie Klein by Hanna Segal. New York: Viking Press. 1980 JAPA, 33 (suppl.).
    488. Kaywin, L. (1966) Problems of sublimation. JAPA, 14.
    489. Kernberg, O. F. (1966) Structural derivations of object relationships. IJP, 47.
    490. Kernberg, O. F. (1967) Borderline personality organization. JAPA, 15.
    491. Kernberg, O. F. (1975) Borderline Conditions and Pathological Narcissism. New York: Jason Aronson.
    492. Kernberg, O. F. (1976) Object Relations Theory and Clinical Psychoanalysis. New York: Jason Aronson.
    493. Kernberg, O. F. (1977) Boundaries and structure in love relations. JAPA, 25.
    494. Kernberg, O. F. (1980) Fairbairn's theory and challenge. In: Internal World and External Reality: Object Relations Theory Applied. New York: Jason Aronson.
    495. Kernberg, O. F. (1980) Internal World and External Reality. New York: Jason Aronson.
    496. Kernberg, O. F. (1984) Severe Personality Disorders. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.
    497. Kessler, J. W. (1970) Contributions of the mentally retarded toward a theory of cognitive development. In: Cognitive Studies, ed. J. Hellmuth. New York Brunner/Mazel.
    498. Kestenberg, J. S. (1967) Phases of adolescence. J. Amer. Acad. Child. Psychiat., 6.
    499. Khan, M. (1982) Introduction. In: D. W. Winnicott, Through Paediatrics to Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.
    500. Klein, G. S. (1966) The several grades of memory. In: Psychoanalysis. A General Psychology, pd. H. M. Lowenstein, L M. Newman, M. Schur & A. J. Solnit. New York Int. Univ. Press.
    501. Klein, M. (1932) The Psychoanalysis of Children London: Hogarth Press.
    502. Klein, M. (1946) Notes on some schizoid mechanisms IJP, 27.
    503. Klein, M. (1948) Contributions to Psychoanalysis, 1921—45. London: Hogarth Press.
    504. Klein, M. (1950) Narrative of a Child Analysis. New York Basic Books.
    505. Klein, M. (1957) Envy and Gratitude. New York: Basic Books.
    506. Klein, M. (1957) On identification. In: New Directions in Psychoanalysis, ed. M. Klein, P. Heimann & R. Money-Kyrle. New York: Basic Books.
    507. Klein, M. (1959) On the development of Mental functioning. In: Envy and Gratitude London: Delacorte Press, 1975.
    508. Klein, M., Heimann, P., Isaacs, S. & Riviere J. (eds.) (1952) Developments in Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.
    509. Knight, R. P. (1953) Borderline states. Bull. Menn. Clin., 17.
    510. Knight, R. P. (1972) Clinician and Therapist: Selected Papers of Robert P. Knight, ed. Stuart C. Miller. New York: Basic Books.
    511. Kohut, H. (1959) Introspection, empathy, and psycho-analysis. JAPA, 7.
    512. Kohut, H. (1971) The Analysis of the Self. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    513. Kohut, H. (1977) The Restoration of the Self. New York Int. Univ. Press.
    514. Kohut, H. (1978) The Search for the Self, ed. P. Ornstein. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    515. Kohut, H. (1984) How Does Analysis Cure? ed. A Goldben & P. Stepansky. Chicago: Univ. Chicago Press.
    516. Kohut, H. & Wolf, E. S. (1978) The disorders of the self and their treatment. IJP, 59.
    517. Krapf, E. E. (1961) The concept of normality and mental, health in psychoanalysis. IJP, 59.
    518. Kreisler, L. (1984) Fundamentals for a psychosomatic pathology of infants. In: Frontiers of Infant Psychiatry, ed. J. D. Call, E. Galenson & R. L. Tyson. New York: Basic Books, vol. 2.
    519. Kris, A. O. (1982) Free Association. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.
    520. Kris, A. O. (1984) The conflicts of ambivalence. PSOC, 39.
    521. Kris, E. (1951) Ego psychology and interpretation in psychoanalytic therapy. P. Q, 20.
    522. Kris, E. (1952) Psychoanalytic Exploration in Art. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    523. Kris, E. (1956) On some vicissitudes of insight in psychoanalysis. IJP, 37.
    524. Kris, E. (1956) The personal myth. JAPA, 4.
    525. Kris, E. (1956) The recovery of childhood memories in psychoanalysis. PSOC, 11.
    526. Krupuick, J. L. & Horowitz, M. J. (1981) Stress response syndromes. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 38.
    527. Krystal, H. ed. (1968) Massive Psychic Trauma. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    528. Krystal, H. (1978) Trauma and affects. PSOC, 33.
    529. Krystal, H. (1981) The hedonic element in affectivity. J. Psychoanal., 9.
    530. Krystal, H. (1982) Alexithymia and the affectiveness of psychoanalytic treatment. Int. J. Psychoanal. Psychother., 9.
    531. Kubie, L. S. (1947) The fallacious use of quantitative concepts in dynamic psychology. P. Q, 16.
    532. Kubie, L. S. (1962) The fallacious misuse of the concept of sublimation. PQ, 31.
    533. Kubie, L. S. (1972) Personal communication.
    534. Kubie, L. S. (1975) The language tools of psychoanalysis. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 2.
    535. Labov, W. (1972) Language in the Inner City. Philadelphia: Univ. Penn. Press.
    536. Lagache, D. (1953) Behavior and psychoanalytic experience In Drives. Affects, Behavior, ed. R. Loewenstein. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    537. Langer, S. K. (1962) Problems and techniques of psychoanalytic validation and progress. In: Psychoanalysis as Science, ed. E. Pumplan-Mindlin. Stanford: Stanford Univ. Press.
    538. Langer, W. (1958) The next assignment. Amer. Imago, 15.
    539. Langhlin, H. P. (1967) The Neurosis. Washington: Butterworth.
    540. Laplanche, J. & Pontalis, J. B. (1967) Vocabulaire de la Psychoanalyse. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France.
    541. Laplanche, J. & Pontalis, J. B. (1973) The Language of Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.
    542. Laplanche, J. & Pontalis, J. B. (1983) The Language of psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.
    543. Laseque, C. (1977) Les exhibitionnistes. L'Union Medicale, Froisieme Serie, 23.
    544. Leaff, L. A. (1971) Affect versus feeling. JAPA, 19.
    545. Leon, I. G. (1984) Psychoanalysis, Piaget and attachment. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 11.
    546. Lerner, H. E. (1976) Parental Mislabeling of female genitals as a determinant of penis envy and learning inhibitions in women. JAPA, 24 (suppl.).
    547. Levey, M. (1985) The concept structure in psychoanalysis. Annu. Psychoanal. 12—13.
    548. Levy, D. (1983) Wittgenstein on the form of psychoanalytic interpretation. Int. Rev. Psycho-anal., 10.
    549. Levy, S. T. (1984) Principles of Interpretaion. New York: Aronson.
    550. Levy, S. T. (1984) Psychoanalytic perspectives on emptiness. JAPA, 32.
    551. Levy, S. T. (1985) Empathy and psychoanalytic technique. JAPA, 33.
    552. Lewin, B. D. (1933) The body as phallus. PQ, 2.
    553. Lewin, B. D. (1946) Sleep, the mouth, and the dream screen. PQ, 15.
    554. Lewin, B. D. (1950) The Psychoanalysis of Elation. New York: Norton.
    555. Lewin, B. D. (1953) Reconslde ration of the dream screen. PQ, 22.
    556. Lewis, H. B. (1971) Shame and Guilt in Neurosis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    557. Lichtenberg, J., Bornstein, M. & Silver, D., eds. (1984) Empathy, vols. 1—2. Hillsdale & London: Analytic Press.
    558. Lichtenberg, J. D. & Kaplan, S. (1983) Reflections on Self Psychology. Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.
    559. Lichtenberg, J. D. & Slap, J. W. (1973) Notes on the concept of splitting and defense mechanism of splitting of representations. JAPA, 21.
    560. Lichtenstein, H. (1961) Identity and sexuality. JAPA, 9.
    561. Lichtenstein, H. (1970) Changing implications of the concept of psychosexual development. JAPA, 18.
    562. Lidz, T., Fleck, S. & Cornelison. A. R. (1965) Schizophrenia and the Family. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    563. Lifschutz, J. E. (1976) A critique of reporting and assessment in the training analysis. JAPA, 24.
    564. Limentani, A. (1979) The significance of transsexualism in relation to some basic psychoanalytic concepts. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 6.
    565. Loewald, H. W. (1951) Ego and reality. IJP, 32.
    566. Loewald, H. W. (1959) The waning of the Oedipus complex. JAPA, 27.
    567. Loewald, H. W. (1962) Internalization, separation, mourning, and the superego. PQ, 31.
    568. Loewald, H. W. (1971) Some considerations on repetition and repetition compulsion. IJP, 52.
    569. Loewald, H. W. (1973) On internalization. IJP, 54.
    570. Loewenstein, R. M. (1951—72) Practice and Precept in Psycho analytic Technique. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press, 1982.
    571. Loewenstein, R. M. (1951) The problem of interpretation. PQ, 20.
    572. Loewenstein, R. M. (1957) A contribution to the psychoanalytic theory of masochism. JAPA, 5.
    573. Loewenstein, R. M., Newman, L. M., Schur, M. & Solnit, A. J., eds. (1966) Psychoanalysis — A General Psychology. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    574. Lorand, S. (1950) Clinical Studies in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    575. Lowinger, J. (1976) Ego Development. San Francisco: Jossey Bass.
    576. Luria, A. R. (1978) The human brain and conscious activity. In: Consciousness and Self-Regulation, ed. G. E. Shwarta & D. Shapiro. New York: Plenum Press, 1978, vol. 2.
    577. Lustman, J. (1977) On splitting. PSOC, 32.
    578. Lynd, H. M. (1961) On Shame and the Search for Identity New York: Science Editions.
    579. Madow, Z. & Snow, L. H., eds. (1970) The Psychodynamic Implications of the Physiological Studies on Dreams. Springfield, III: Thomas.
    580. Mahler, M. S. (1952) On child psychosis and schizophrenia. PSOC, 7.
    581. Mahler, M. S. (1963) Thoughts and development and individuation. PSOC. 12.
    582. Mahler, M. S. (1966) Notes on the development of basic moods: the depressive affect in psychoanalysis. In: Psychoanalysis — A General Psychology, ed. R. M. Loewenstein, L. M. Newman, M. Schuz & A. J. Solnit. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    583. Mahler, M. S. (1968) On Human Symbiosis and the Vicissitudes of Individuation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    584. Mahler, M. S. (1975) Discussion on Bernard L. Pacella's paper. JAPA, 23.
    585. Mahler, M. S. (1975) On the current status of infantile neurosis. JAPA, 23.
    586. Mahler, M. S. (1979) Selected Papers of Margaret S. Mahler, vol. 2. New York: Jason Aronson.
    587. Mahler, M. S. & Purer, M. (1968) On Human Symbiosis and the Vicissitudes of Individuation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    588. Mahler, M. S. & Gosliner, B. J. (1955) On Symbiotic child psychosis. PSOC, 10.
    589. Mahler, M. S., Pine, F. & Bergman, A. (1975) The Psychological Birth of the Human Infant. New York: Basic Books.
    590. Mahony, P. (1979) The boundaries of free association. Psychoanal. Contemp. Thought, 2.
    591. Malcove, L. (1975) The analytic situation (and Panel discussion). J. Phila. Assn. Psychoanal., 2.
    592. Marcovitz, E. (1973) On confidentiality in psychoanalysis. Bull. Phila. Assn. Psychoanal., 23.
    593. Marcus, I. M. & Francis, J. J. (1975) Masturbation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    594. Marty, P. & de M'Uzan, M. (1963) La pensйe opйratoire. Rev. Psychoanaltique, 27 suppl.
    595. Masson, J. M. (1980) The Oceanic Feeling. Boston: D. Reidel Publishing Company.
    596. Masters, W. H. & Johnson, V. E. (1966) Human Sexual Response. Boston: Little, Brown.
    597. McDaugall, J. (1984) The "dis-affected" patient. PQ, 53.
    598. McDevitt, J. B. (1975) Separation-individuation and object constancy. JAPA, 23.
    599. Meehl, P. E. (1962) Hedonic capacity. Bull. Menn. Clin., 39.
    600. Meissner, W. H. (1978) The Paranoid Process. New York: Aronson.
    601. Meissner, W. W. (1979) Internalization and object relations. JAPA, 27.
    602. Meissner, W. W. (1981) Internalization in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    603. Meissner, W. W. (1981) Metapsychology: who needs it. JAPA, 29.
    604. Meissner, W. W., Mack, J. E. & Semrad, E. V. (1975) Classical Psychoanalysis. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, ed. A. M. Freedman, H. I. Kaplan & J. Sadock. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins.
    605. Menninger, W. (1943) Characterologic and symptomatic expressions related to the anal phase of psycho sexual development. PQ, 12.
    606. Mesmer, Franz Anton (1965) The Nature of Hypnosis, ed. Ronald E. Shor and Martin T. Orne. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.
    607. Metcalf, D. & Spitz, R. A. (1978) The transitional object. In: Grolnick et al. (1978).
    608. Meyer, B. C. (1972) The contribution of psychoanalysis to biography. Psychoanal. Contemp. Sci., 1.
    609. Meyer, J. (1982) The theory of gender identity disorders. JAPA, 30.
    610. Meyer, J. (1985) Ego-dystonic homosexuality. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, 4th ed., ed. H. Kaplan & B. Sadock. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins.
    611. Meyer, J. (1985) Paraphilia. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, ed. H. Kaplan & B. Sadock. Baltimore, Williams & Wilkins, 4th ed.
    612. Michaels, R. & Gaeger, R. K. Adaptation. PMC. Forthcoming.
    613. Milrod, D. (1982) The wished-for-self-image. PSOC, 37.
    614. Modell, A. H. (1958) The Theoretical implications of hallucinatory experiences in schizophrenia. JAFA, 6.
    615. Modell, A. H. (1965) Object Love and Reality. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    616. Modell, A. H. (1970) The transitional object and the creative act. PQ, 39.
    617. Modell, A. H. (1975) The ego and the id. IJP, 56.
    618. Money, J. & Green, R. (1969) Transsexualism and Sex Reassignment. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins Univ. Press.
    619. Monroe, R. R (1970) Episodic Behavior Disorders. Cambridge: Harvard Univ. Press.
    620. Moore, B. E. (164) Frigidity. PQ. 33.
    621. Moore, B. E. (1975) Freud and female sexuality. IJP, 57.
    622. Moore, B. E. (1975) Toward a clarification on the concept of narcissism. PSOC, 30.
    623. Moore, B. E. (1976) Freud and female sexuality. IJP, 57.
    624. Moore, B. E. (1977) Psychic representation and female orgasm. In: Female Psychology, ed. H. P. Blum. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    625. Moore, B. E. & Fine, B. D., eds. (1967) A Glossary of Psychoanalytic Terms and Concepts. New York: Amer. Psychoanal. Assn.
    626. Moore, B. E. & Rubinfine, D. Z. (1969) The mechanism of denial. Kris Study Group Monographs, New York: Int. Univ. Press, vol. 3.
    627. Moses, R. (1978) Adult psychic trauma. IJP, 59.
    628. Murray, C. D. (1930) Psychogenic factors in the etiology of ulcerative colitis and bloody diarrhea. Amer. J. Med. Sci., 180.
    629. Nagera, H., ed. (1966) Early Childhood Disturbances, the Infantile Neurosis, and the Adulthood Disturbances. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    630. Nagera, H. (1967) The concepts of structure and structuralization. PSOC, 22.
    631. Nagera, H. (1969—71) Basic Psychoanalytic Concepts. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    632. Nagera, H. (1976) Obsessional Neuroses. New York: Aronson.
    633. Natterson, J. M. (1980) The Dream in Clinical Practice. New York: Jason Aronson.
    634. Nemiah, J. C. & Sifneos, P. E. (1970) Affect and fantasy in patients with psychosomatic disorders. In: Modern Trends in Psychosomatic Medicine, ed. O. W. Hill. London: Butterworths, vol. 2.
    635. Neubaner, P. B. (1979) The role of insight in psychoanalysis JAPA, 27.
    636. Neubaner, P. B. (1982) Rivalry, envy, and Jealousy. PSOC, 37.
    637. Novick, J. (1982) Varieties of transference in the analysis of an adolescent. IJP, 42.
    638. Novick, J. & Kelly, K. (1970) Projection and externalization. PSOC, 25.
    639. Noy, P. Wollstein, S. & Kaplan-de-Nour, A. (1966) Clinical observations of the psychogenesis of impotence. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 39.
    640. Nunberg, H. (1948) The synthetic function of the ego. In: Practice and Theory of Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press, vol. 1.
    641. Nunberg, H. (1954) Evaluation of the results of psychoanalytic treatment. IJP, 35.
    642. Nunberg, H. (1955) Principles of Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    643. Ogden, T. (1982) Projective Identification and Psycho-therapeutic Technique. New York: Jason Aronson.
    644. Olinick, S. Z. (1964) The negative therapeutic reaction. IJP, 45.
    645. Olinick, S. Z. (1980) The Psychotheraputic Instrument. New York: Jason Aronson.
    646. Ornston, D. G. (1978) On projection. PSOC, 33.
    647. Ornston, D. G. (1982) Strachey's influence. IJP, 63.
    648. Ornston, D. G. (1985a) Freud's conception is different from Strachey's. JAPA, 33.
    649. Ornston, D. G. (1985b) The invention of "cathexes" and Strachey's strategy. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 12.
    650. Ornston, D. G. (1988) How standard is the "Standard Edition? In Freud in Exile, ed. E. Timns & N. Segal. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.
    651. Orr, D. W. (1954) Transference and countertransference. JAPA, 2.
    652. Ostow, M. (1974) Sexual Deviation. New York: Quadrangle.
    653. Pacella, B. (1975) Early ego development and the deja vu. JAPA, 23.
    654. Panel (1957) Acting out and its relation to impulse disorders. M. Kanzer, reporter. JAPA, 5.
    655. Panel (1958) Problems of identity. D. Z. Rubinfine, reporter. JAPA, 6.
    656. Panel (1958) Technical aspects of regression during psychoanalysis. K. T. Calder, reporter. JAFA, 11.
    657. Panel (1963) The concept of the id. E. Marcovitz, reporter. JAPA, 11.
    658. Panel (1964) Depersonalization. W. A. Stewart, reporter. JAPA, 12.,.
    659. Panel (1966) Clinical and theoretical aspects of "as-if" characters. J. Weiss, reporter. JAPA, 11.
    660. Panel (1969) The theory of genital primacy in the light of ego psychology. M. Berezin, reporter. JAPA, 17.
    661. Panel (1971) Action, acting out, and the symptomatic act. N. Actins, reporter. JAPA, 18.
    662. Panel (1970) Psychoanalytic theory of affects. L. B. Lofgren, reporter. JAPA, 16.
    663. Panel (1970) The development of the child's sense of his sexual identity. Virginia, L. Glower, reporter. JAPA, 18.
    664. Panel (1970) The negative therapeutic reaction. S. L. Olinick, reporter. JAPA, 18.
    665. Panel (1972) Levels of confidentiality in the psychoanalytic situation. A. S. Watson, reporter JAPA, 20.
    666. Panel (1974) Toward a theory of affects. P. Castelneuvo-Tedesco, reporter. JAPA, 22. W.
    667. Panel (1975) The analytic situation. S. T. Shapiro, reporter. J. Phila. Aasn. Psychoanal.,2.
    668. Panel (1980) New directions in affect theory. E. P. Lester, reporter. JAPA, 30.
    669. Panel (1981) Insight. K. H. Blacker, reporter. JAPA, 29.
    670. Panel (1981) Masochism. W. Fischer, reporter. JAPA, 29.
    671. Panel (1982) Beyond lay analysis. H. Fischer, reporter. JAPA, 30.
    672. Panel (1983) Clinical aspects of character. M. Willick, reporter. JAPA, 31.
    673. Panel (1983) Theory of character. S. M. Abend, reporter. JAPA, 31.
    674. Panel (1984) The neutrality of the analyst in the analytic situation, R. J. Leider, reporter. JAPA, 32. (1985) Perspectives on the nature of psychic reality. E. Roughton, reporter. JAPA, 33.
    675. Panel (1987) Toward the further understanding of homosexual women. A Wolfson, reporter. JAPA, 35.
    676. Pao, P.-N. (1971) Elation, hypomania and mania. JAFA, 19.
    677. Parens, H. (1979) The Development of Aggression in Early Childhood. New York: Jason Aronson.
    678. Parens, H. (1980) Psychic development during the second and third years of life. In: The Course of Life, ed. S. Greenspan & G. Pollock. Washington: Nat. Inst. Health.
    679. Parens, H. & Saul, L. J. (1971) Dependence in Man. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    680. Person, E. & Ovesey, L. (1974) The transsexual syndrome in males. Amer. J. Psychother., 28.
    681. Person, E. & Ovesey, L. (1983) Psychoanalytic theories of gender identity. J. Amer. Acad. Psychoanal., 2.
    682. Peterfreund, E. & Schwartz, J. T. (1971) Information, systems, and Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    683. Peto, A. (1976) The etiological significance of the primal scene in perversions. PQ, 44.
    684. Pfeffer, A. Z. (1984) Modes of obsessional thinking. Presented at the New York Psychoanalytic Society, October 23.
    685. Piaget, J. (1937) The Construction of Reality in the Child. New York: Basic Books, 1954.
    686. Piaget, J. (1962) Play, Dreams and Imitation in Childhood New York: Norton.
    687. Piers, G. & Singer, M. B. (1953) Shame and Guilt. Springfield: Thomas; New ed., New York: Norton.
    688. Pine, F. (1985) Developmental Theory and Clinical Process. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.
    689. Poland, W. S. (1984) On the analyst's neutrality. JAFA, 32.
    690. Pollock, G. H. (1961) Mourning and adaptation. IJP, 42.
    691. Pollock, G. H. (1978) Process and affect. IJP, 59.
    692. Potamianau, A. (1985) The personal myth. PSOC, 40.
    693. Provence, S. & Lipton, R. (1962) Infants in Institutions. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    694. Pulver, S. E. Symptomatology. PMC. Forthcoming.
    695. Pulver, S. E. (1970) Narcissism. JAPA, 18.
    696. Rado, S. (1949) An adaptational view of sexual behavior In Psychosexual Development in Health and Disease, ed. P. H. Hock & J. Lubin. New York: Grune & Stratton.
    697. Rangell, L. Affects. PMC. Forthcoming.
    698. Rangell, L. (1959) The nature of conversion. JAPA, 7.
    699. Rangell, L. (1963) Structural problems in intrapsychic conflict. PSOC, 18.
    700. Rangell, L. (1966) An overview of the ending of an analysis. In: Psychoanalysis in Americas, ed. R. E. Litman. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    701. Rangell, L. (1968) A point of view on acting out. IJP, 49.
    702. Rangell, L. (1981) From insight to change. JAPA, 29.
    703. Rangell, L. (1981) Psychoanalysis and dynamic psychotherapy. PQ, 50.
    704. Rangell, L. (1983) Defense and resistance in psychoanalysis and life. JAPA, 31 (suppl.).
    705. Rangell, L. (1985) The object in psychoanalytic theory. JAPA, 33.
    706. Rank, O. (1909) The Myth of the Birth of the Hero. New York: Nerv. Ment. Dis. Monogr., 18.
    707. Rank, O. (1924) The Trauma of Birth. New York: Robert Brunner, 1952.
    708. Rapaport, D. (1942) Emotions and Memory. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1950.
    709. Rapaport, D. (1960) The structure of Psychoanalytic Theory. Psychol. Issues, monogr. 6, New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    710. Rapaport, D. & Gill, M. M. (1959) The points of view and assumptions of metapsychology. In: The Collected Papers of David Rapaport. New York: Basic Books, 1967.
    711. Rapoport, A. (1955) The role of symbols in human behavior. Psychiatric Research Reports, vol. 2, ed. J. S. Gottlieb et al. Washington: Amer. Psychiat. Assn.
    712. Rappaport, E. A. (1968) Beyond traumatic neurosis. IJP, 49.
    713. Reich, A. (1951) On countertransference. In: Psychoanalytic Contributions. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1973.
    714. Reich, A. (1953) Narcissistic object choice in women. JAPA, 1.
    715. Reich, A. (1954) Early identifications as archaic elements in the superego. JAPA, 2.
    716. Reich, A. (1960) Pathologic forms of self-esteem regulation. PSOC, 15.
    717. Reich, W. (1933) Character Analysis. New York: Orgone Press, 1949.
    718. Reich, W. (1933) Some circumscribed character forms. In: Character Analysis. New York: Orgone Institute Press.
    719. Reik, T. (1919) Ritual. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    720. Reiser, M. (1984) Mind, Brain and Body New York: Basic Books.
    721. Richards, A. D. (1985) Isakower-like experience on the couch. PQ. 54.
    722. Ricoeur, P. (1970) Freud and Philosophy. New Haven — Yale Univ. Press.
    723. Ricoeur, P. (1976) Interpretation Theory. Forth Worth-Texas Christian Univ. Press.
    724. Rinsley, D. B. (1982) Fairbairn's object relations and classical concepts of dynamics and structure. In: Borderline and Other Self Disorders' A Developmental and Object-Relations Respective New York: Jason Aronson.
    725. Rioch, M. (1970) The work of W. R Bion on groups. Psychiatry, 33.
    726. Ritvo, S. (1971) Late adolescence. PSOC, 18.
    727. Ritvo, S. (1974) Current status of the concept of infantile neurosis. PSOC, 29.
    728. Robbins, F & Sadow, L (1974) A developmental hypothesis of reality processing. JAPA, 22.
    729. Rodman, F. R. (1987) Introduction In the Spontaneous Gesture — Selected Letters of D. W. Winnicott, ed. F. R. Rodman Cambridge—Harvard Univ. Press.
    730. Roiphe, H. (1968) On an early genital phase. PSOC, 23.
    731. Roiphe, H. & Galenson, E. (1981) Infantile Roots of Sexual Identity. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    732. Rose, G. (1978) The creativity of everyday life. In: Grolnick et al (1978).
    733. Rose, H. (1928) A Handbook of Greek Mythology. London: Methuen.
    734. Rosenblatt, A. D. & Thickstun, J T. (1970) A study of the concept of psychic energy. IJP, 51.
    735. Rosenthal, S. M. (1968) The involutional depressive syndrome. Amer J. Psychiat., 124.
    736. Ross, N. (1967) The "as-if" concept. JAPA, 15.
    737. Ross, N. (1970) The primacy of genitality in the light of ego psychology. JAPA, 18.
    738. Rothstein, A. (1983) The Structural Hypothesis. New York: Int., Univ. Press.
    739. Roughton, R. Action and acting out. FMC. Forthcoming.
    740. Rubinstein, B. B. (1972) On metaphor and related phenomena. In: Psychoanalysis and Contemporary Science, ed. A. R. Holt & E. Peterfreund., New York: Int. Univ. Press, vol. 1.
    741. Rutter, M. (1972) Maternal Deprivation. Baltimore: Penguin Books.
    742. Rycroft, C. (1968) A critical Dictionary of Psychoanalysis New York: Basic Books.
    743. Sachs, D. M. (1979) On the relationship between psycho-analysis and psychoanalytic psychotherapy. Bull. Phila Assn. Psychoanal, 6.
    744. Sachs, H. (1942) The Creative Unconscious Cambridge, Mass.: Sci. Art. Publishers.
    745. Samuels, A. (1985) Jung and the Post-Jungians London — Routledge & Kegan Paul.
    746. Sandler, J. (1960) On the concept of the superego. PSOC, 15.
    747. Sandler, J., Dare, C. & Holder, A (1973) The negative therapeutic reaction. In: The Patient and the Analyst New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    748. Sandler, J. & Freud, A. (1985) The Analysis of Defense. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    749. Sandler, J., Hodler, A. & Meers, D. (1963) The ego ideal and the ideal self. PSOC, 18.
    750. Sandler, J., Kennedy, H & Tyson, R. L (1980) The Technique of Child Psychoanalysis. Cambridge—Harvard Univ. Press.
    751. Sandler, J. & Rosenblatt, B. (1962) The concept of the representational world. PSOC, 17.
    752. Sandler, J. & Sandier, A. M. (1978) On the development of object relationships and affects. IJP, 59.
    753. Sarlin, C. N. (1962) Depersonalization and derealization. JAPA, 10.
    754. Sarlin, C. N. (1970) The current status of the concept of genital primacy. JAPA. 18.
    755. Sarnoff, C. A. (1978) Latency. New York: Aronson.
    756. Saussure de, F. (1911) Course in General Linguistic. New York: McGraw Hill.
    757. Schafer. R. (1968) Aspects of Internalization. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    758. Schafer. R. (1974) Problems in Freud's psychology of women. JAPA, 22.
    759. Schafer. R. (1975) Psychoanalysis without psychodynamics. IJP, 56.
    760. Schafer. R. (1976) A New Language for Psychoanalysis. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.
    761. Schafer. R. (1983) The Analytic Attitude. New York: Basic Books.
    762. Schechner, R. & Schuman, M. (1976) Ritual, Play and Performance New York: Seabury Press.
    763. Schlesinger, N. & Robbins, F. P. (1983) A Developmental View of the Psychoanalytic Process. New York; Int. Univ. Press.
    764. Schneirla, T. C. (1959) An evolutionary and developmental theory of biphasic processes underlying approach and withdrawal. In: Nebraska Symposium on Motivation, ed. H. R. Jones. London: Univ. Nebraska Press.
    765. Schur, M. (1955) Comments on the metapsychology of somatization. PSOC, 10.
    766. Schur, M. (1966) The Id and the Regulatory Principles of Mental Functioning. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    767. Schuster. D. B. (1969) Bisexuality and body as phallus. PQ, 38.
    768. Schwartz, H. J., ed. (1984) Psychotherapy of the Combat Veteran. New York: SP Medical and Scientific Books.
    769. Segal, H. (1957) Notes on symbol formation. IJP, 39.
    770. Segal, H. (1964) Introduction to the Work of Melanie Klein. London: Hogarth Press, 1973.
    771. Segal, H. (1973) Introduction to the work of Melanie Klein. London: W. Heinemann.
    772. Segal, H. (1981) The Work of Hanna Segal. New York: Jason Aronson.
    773. Segal, H. (1986) Illumination of the dim, shadowy era. Sunday Times, London, May 11, 1986.
    774. Shane, M. Shane, E. (1982) Psychoanalytic theories of aggression. Psychoanal. Inquiry, 2.
    775. Shane, M. Shane, E. (1984) The end phase of analysis. JAPA, 32.
    776. Shane, M. Shane, E. (1985) Change and integration in psychoanalytic developmental theory. In: New Ideas in Psychoanalysis, ed. C. F. Settlage & R. Brockbank. Hillsdale, N. J. Analytic Press.
    777. Shapiro, T. (1979) Clinical Psycholinguistics. New York: Plenum Press.
    778. Shapiro, T. (1984) On neutrality. JAPA, 32.
    779. Shengold, L. (1967) The effects of overstimulation. IJP, 48.
    780. Shopper, M. (1979) The (re)discovery of the vagina and the importance of the menstrual tampon. In: Female Adolescent Development, ed. M. Sugar. New York: Brunner/Mazel.
    781. Sifneos, P. E. (1975) Problems of psychotherapy of patients with alexithymic characteristics and physical disease Psychother & Psychosom., 26.
    782. Slap, J. & Saykin, J. (1984) On the nature and organization of the repressed. Psychoanal. Inquiry, 4.
    783. Slovenko, R. (1973) Psychiatry and Law. Boston: Little, Brown.
    784. Smith, J. H. (1976) Language and the genealogy of the absent object. In: Psychiatry and the Humanities, vol. 1, ed. J. H. Smith. New Haven-Yale Univ. Press.
    785. Smith, J. H. ed. (1978) Psychoanalysis and Language. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.
    786. Smith, W. R. (1894) The Religion of the Semites. New York: Meridian Library, 1956.
    787. Socarides, C. W. (1963) The historical development of theoretical and clinical aspects of female homosexuality. JAPA, 11.
    788. Socarides, C. W. (1970) A psychoanalytic study of the desire for sexual transformation ("transsexualism"). IJP, 51.
    789. Socarides, C. W. (1978) Homosexuality. New York: Jason Aronson.
    790. Socarides, C. W. (1982) Abdication fathers, Homosexual Sons. In: Father and Child, ed. S. H. Cath, A. R. Gurwitt & J. M. Ross. Boston: Little, Brown.
    791. Solnit, A. J. & Ritvo, S. Instinct theory. PMC. Forthcoming.
    792. Sophocles. The Oedipus Cycle, tr. D. Fitts & R. Fitzgerald. New York: Harcourt, Brace & World, 1969.
    793. Sours, J. A. (1974) The anorexia nervosa syndrome. IJP, 55.
    794. Sours, J. A. (1980) Starving to Death in a Sia of Objects. New York: Aronson.
    795. Spence, J. T. & Helmrich, R. L. (1978) Masculinity and Femininity. Austin and London: Univ. of Texas Press.
    796. Sperber, D. (1974) Rethinking Symbolism. Cambridge: Cambridge Univ. Press.
    797. Sperling, M. (1976) Anorexia nervosa. In: Psychosomatic Disorders in Childhood, ed. O. Sperling. New York: Aronson.
    798. Spitz, R. A. (1945) Hospitalism. FSOC. 1.
    799. Spitz, R. A. (1946) Anaclitic depression. PSOC, 2.
    800. Spitz, R. A. (1946) Hospitalism: A follow-up report. PSOC, 2.
    801. Spitz, R. A. (1946) The smiling response. Genet. Psychol. Monagr. 34.
    802. Spitz, R. A. (1955) The primal cavity. PSOC, 10.
    803. Spitz, R. A. (1957) No and Yes. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    804. Spitz, R. A. (1959) A Genetic Field Theory of Ego Formation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    805. Spitz, R. A. (1965) The First Year of Life. New York:Int. Univ. Press.
    806. Spitz, R. A. & Wolf, K. M. (1946) The smiling response. Genet. Psycholol. Monogr., 34.
    807. Spruiell, V. The self. PMC. Forthcoming.
    808. Stamm, J. L. (1962) Altered ego states allied to the depersonalization. JAPA, 10.
    809. Stein, M. (1971) The principle of multiple function. Bull. Phila. Assn. Psychoanal., 21.
    810. Stekely, L. (1960) Success, success neurosis and the self. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 33.
    811. Sterba, R. E. (1936—37) Hardwцrterbuch der Psychoanalyse. Vienna: Int. Psychoanal. Verlag.
    812. Stern, D. N. (1974) The goal and structure of mother-infant play. J. Amer. Acad. Child Psychiat., 13.
    813. Stern, D. N. (1984) Affect attunement. In: Frontiers of Infant Psychiatry. New York: Basic Books, vol. 2.
    814. Stern, D. N. (1985) The Interpersonal World of the Infant New York: Basic Books.
    815. Stevens, A. (1982) Archetype. London: Rouledge & Kegan Paul.
    816. Stoller, R. J. (1971) The term "transvestism". Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 24.
    817. Stoller, R. J. (1972) The "bedrock" of masculinity and femininity: bisexuality. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 26.
    818. Stoller, R. J. (1974) Hostility and mystery in perversion. IJP, 55.
    819. Stoller, R. J. (1975) Sex and Gender, vol. 2. New York: Jason Aronson.
    820. Stoller, R. J. (1976) Primary femininity. JAPA, 24 (5).
    821. Stoller, R. J. (1982) Hear miss. In: Eating, Sleeping, and Sexuality, ed. M. Zalea. New York: Brunner/ Mazel.
    822. Stoller, R. J. (1985) Observing the Erotic Imagination. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.
    823. Stolorow, R. (1984) Self psychology — a structural psychology. In: Reflections on Self Psychology, ed. J. Lichtenberg & S. Kaplan Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.
    824. Stolorow, R. Transference. PMC. Forthcoming.
    825. Stone, L. (1954) The widening scope of indications for psychoanalysis. JAPA, 2.
    826. Stone, L. (1961) The Psychoanalytic Situation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    827. Stone, L. (1967) The psychoanalytic situation and transference. JAPA, 15.
    828. Stone, L. (1971) Reflections on the psychoanalytic concept of aggression. FQ, 40.
    829. Stone, L. (1973) On resistance to the psychoanalytic process. In: Psychoanalysis and Contemporary Science, ed. B. B. Rubinstein. New York: Macmillan, vol. 2.
    830. Stone, M. H. (1980) Borderline Syndromes. New York: McGrow Hill.
    831. Strachey, J. (1934) The nature of the therapeutic action of psychoanalysis. IJP, 15.
    832. Strachey, J. (1962) The emergence of Freud's fundamental hypothesis. SE, 3.
    833. Strachey, J. (1963) Obituary (Joan Riviere). IJP, 44.
    834. Strachey, J. (1966) General preface. SE, 1.
    835. Swank, R. L. (1949) Combat exhaustion. J. Nerv. Ment. Dis., 109.
    836. Szekely, L. (1960) Success, success neurosis and the self. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 33.
    837. Taylor, G. J. (1977) Alexithymia and countertranceference. Psychother & Psychosom., 28.
    838. Ticho, E. (1972) Termination of psychoanalysis. PQ, 41.
    839. Tolpin, M. (1970) The infantile neurosis. PSOC, 25.
    840. Tolpin, M. (1971) On the beginnings of a cohesive self. PSOC. 26.
    841. Tolpin, M. & Kohut, H. (1980) The disorders of the self. In: The Course of Life, ed. S. Greenspan & G. Pollock. Washington, B. C.: U. S. Dept. Health and Human Services.
    842. Turkle, S. (1986) A review of Grosskurth, P.: Molanie Klein. New York: Times Books, Review, May 18, 1986.
    843. Tyson, P. Development. PMC. Forthcoming.
    844. Tyson, P. (1982) A developmental line of gender identity, gender role, and choice of love object. JAPA, 30.
    845. Tyson, P. & Tyson, R. L. Development. PMC. Forthcoming.
    846. Tyson, P. & Tyson, R. L. The psychoanalitic theory of development. PMC. Forthcoming.
    847. Tyson, P. & Tyson, R. L. (1984) Narcissism and superego development. JAPA, 34.
    848. Tyson, R. & Sundler, J. (1971) Problems in the selection of patients for psychoanalysis. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 44.
    849. Valenstein, A. F. (1979) The concept of "classical" psycho-analysis. JAPA. 27. (suppl.).
    850. Volkan, V. D. (1981) Linking Objects and Linking Phenomena. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    851. Waelder, R. (1930) The principle of multiple function. PQ, 5.
    852. Waelder, R. (1962) Book review of Psychoanalysis, Scientific Method and Philosophy, ed. S. Hook. JAPA, 10.
    853. Waelder, R. (1962) Psychoanalysis scientific method, and philosophy. JAPA, 10.
    854. Waelder, R. (1963) Psychic determinism and the possibility of prediction. PQ, 32.
    855. Waelder, R. (1967) Trauma and the variety of extraordinary challenges. In: Fuest (1967).
    856. Waelder, R. (1967) Inhibitions, symptoms and anxiety: forty years later. PQ, 36.
    857. Waldhorn, H. F. (1960) Assessment of analyzability. PQ, 29.
    858. Waldhorn, H. F. & Fine, B. (1971) Trauma and symbolism. Kris Study Group monogr. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    859. Wallace, E. R. (1983) Freud and Anthropology. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    860. Wallerstein, R. Reality. PMC. Forthcoming.
    861. Wallerstein, R. (1965) The goals of psychoanalysis. JAPA, 13.
    862. Wallerstein, R. (1975) Psychotherapy and Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    863. Wallerstein, R. (1983) Defenses, defense mechanisms and the structure of the mind. JAPA, 31 (suppl.).
    864. Wallerstein, R. (1988) One psychoanalysis or many? IJP, 69.
    865. Wangh, M. (1979) Some psychoanalytic observations on boredom. IJP, 60.
    866. Weinshel, E. M. (1968) Some psychoanalytic considerations on moods. IJP, 51.
    867. Weinshel, E. M. (1971) The ego in health and normality. JAPA, 18.
    868. Weisman, A. D. (1972) On Dying and Denying. New York: Behavioral Publications.
    869. Weinstock, H. J. (1962) Successful treatment of ulcerative colitis by psychoanalysis. Brit. J. Psychoanal. Res., 6.
    870. Welmore, R. J. (1963) The role of grief in psychoanalysis. IJP. 44.
    871. Werner, H. & Kaplan, B. (1984) Symbol Formation. Hillsdale N. J.: Lawrence Eribaum.
    872. White. R. W. (1963) Ego and Reality in Psychoanalytic Theory. Psychol. Issues, 3.
    873. Whitman, R. M. (1963) Remembering and forgetting dreams in psychoanalysis. JAPA, 11.
    874. Wiedeman, G. Sexuality. PMC. Forthcoming.
    875. Wiedeman, G. (1962) Survey of psychoanalytic literature on overt male homosexuality. JAPA, 10.
    876. Wieder, H. (1966) Intellectuality. PSOC, 21.
    877. Wieder, H. (1978) The psychoanalytic treatment of preadolescents In Child Analysis and Therapy, ed. J. Glenn. New York Aronson.
    878. Willick, M. S. Defense. PMC. Forthcoming.
    879. Wilson, C. P. (1967) Stone as a symbol of teeth. PQ, 36.
    880. Wilson, C. P Hohan, C. & Mintz, I. (1983) Fear of Being Fat. New York: Aronson.
    881. Wilson, C. P. S Mintz, I. (1982) Abstaining and bulimic anorexics. Primary Care, 9.
    882. Wilson, E. O. (1978) On Human Nature. Cambridge: Harvard Univ. Press.
    883. Winnicott, C. (1978) D. W. W.: a reflection. In: Between Reality and Fantasy. New York: Jason Aronson.
    884. Winnicott, D. W. (1953) Transitional object and transitional phenomena. In: Collected Papers. New York Basic Books, 1958.
    885. Winnicott, D. W. (1956) Primary maternal preoccupation. In: Winnicott (1958).
    886. Winnicott, D. W. (1958) Collected Papers. New York: Basic Books, Inc.
    887. Winnicott, D. W. (1960) Ego distortions in terms of true and false self. In: The Maturational Processes and the Facilitating Environment. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1965.
    888. Winnicott, D. W. (1960) The theory of the parent-infant relationship. In: Winnicott (1965).
    889. Winnicott, D. W. (1965) The Maturational Processes and the Facilitating Environment. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    890. Winnicott, D. W. (1971) Playing and Reality. New York: Basic Books.
    891. Winnicott, D. W. (1971) Therapeutic Consultations in Child Psychiatry. New York: Basic Books.
    892. Winnicott, D. W. (1977) The Piggle. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    893. Winson, J. (1985) Brain and Psyche. New York: Anchor Press.
    894. Wolf, E. S. (1976) Ambience and abstinence. Annu. Psycho-anal., 4.
    895. Wolf, E. S. (1980) On the developmental line of self-object relations. In: Advances in Self Psychology, ed. A. Goldberg. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    896. Wolf, E. S. (1983) Empathy and countertransference. In: The Future of Psychoanalysis, ed. A. Coldberg. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    897. Wolf, E. S. (1984) Disruptions in the psychoanalytic treatment of disorders of the self. In: Kohut's Legacy, ed. P. Stepansky & A. Coldberg, Hillsdale, H. J.: Analytic Press, 1984.
    898. Wolf, E. S. (1984) Selfobject relations disorders. In: Character Pathology, ed. M. Zales. New York: Bruner/Mazel.
    899. Wolf, E. S. & Trosman, H. (1974) Freud and Popper-Lynkeus. JAPA, 22.
    900. Wolfenstein, M. (1966) How is mourning possible? PSOC, 21.
    901. Wolman, B. B. ed. (1977) The International Encyclopedia of Psychiatry, Psychology, Psychoanalysis, and Neurology. New York: Aesculapius.
    902. Wolpert, E. A. (1980) Major affective disorders. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, ed. H. I. Kaplan, A. M. Freedman & B. J. Saddock. Boston: Williams & Wilkins, vol. 2.
    903. Wurmser, L. (1977) A defense of the use of metaphor in analytic theory formation. PQ, 46.
    904. Wurmser, L. (1981) The Mask of Shame. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins Univ. Press.
    905. Zetzel, E. R. (1956) Current concepts of transference. TJP, 37.

    Словарь психоаналитических терминов и понятий > БИБЛИОГРАФИЯ

  • 16 tum

    tum, adv. demonstr., of time [pronom. demonstr. stems to-, ta-; Gr. to, seen in ita, tam, etc.; cf. quom or cum], then.
    I.
    Absol.
    A.
    Referring to a time previously specified.
    1.
    To a definite past time.
    (α).
    To a period of time in which something was or happened (opp. later periods) = illis temporibus:

    is dictu'st ollis popularibus olim Qui tum vivebant homines,

    Enn. Ann. v. 308 Vahl.:

    quod tum erat res in pecore et locorum possessionibus, i. e. Romuli temporibus,

    Cic. Rep. 2, 9, 16:

    cum illi male dicerent, quod tum fieri licebat, i. e. Periclis temporibus,

    id. de Or. 3, 34, 138:

    erat omnino tum mos ut faciles essent in suum cuique tribuendo,

    id. Brut. 21, 85; cf. id. Tusc. 1, 46, 111:

    vastae tum in his locis solitudines erant,

    Liv. 1, 4, 6; 2, 6, 8; 3, 29, 3; 4, 6, 12; 42, 62, 11;

    44, 9, 4: ut tum erant tempora,

    Nep. Att. 1, 2; 12, 3; Liv. 1, 3, 3; 1, 8, 4; 2, 7, 4; 2, 9, 8; 2, 50, 2; 2, 63, 6;

    39, 6, 7 and 9.—With illis temporibus: nam jam tum illis temporibus fortius... loquebantur quam pugnabant,

    Nep. Thras. 2, 4.—
    (β).
    Referring to a point of time, then, at that time:

    insigneita fere tum milia militum octo Duxit,

    Enn. Ann. v. 336 Vahl.: ut jacui exsurgo;

    ardere censui aedis: ita tum confulgebant,

    Plaut. Am. 5, 1, 15:

    jam duo restabant fata tum,

    id. Bacch. 4, 9, 35; id. Cist. 1, 3, 14: quot eras annos gnatus tum, quom, etc.? Me Septuennis, nam tum dentes mihi cadebant primulum, id. Men. 5, 9, 56; id. Merc. prol. 66; id. Most. 1, 2, 49; id. Am. 2, 1, 56; Ter. And. 1, 1, 82: sic igitur tum se levis ac diffusilis aether... undique flexit. Lucr. 5, 467; 5, 837; 5, 911; 5, 432;

    5, 942: atque huic anno proximus Sulla consule et Pompejo fuit. Tum P. Sulpicii in tribunatu, cottidie contionantis, totum genus dicendi cognovimus,

    Cic. Brut. 89, 306; id. Ac. 2, 22, 69:

    scribit Eudemum Pheras venisse, quae erat urbs in Thessalia tum admodum nobilis,

    id. Div. 1, 25, 53; id. Rep. 2, 37, 63:

    hi tum in Asia rhetorum principes,

    id. Brut. 91, 316; id. Sest. 11, 26; id. Planc. 37, 90; id. Quint. 61, 170; id. Fam. 9, 21, 2:

    hoc tum veritus Caesar Pharum prehendit,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 112:

    eodem anno a Campanis Cumae, quam Graeci tum urbem tenebant, capiuntur,

    Liv. 4, 44, 13; 1, 7, 14; 2, 9, 5;

    2, 37, 7: praetores tum duos Latium habebat,

    id. 8, 3, 9:

    Aemilius, cujus tum fasces erant, dictatorem dixit,

    id. 8, 12, 13; 5, 8, 4; 22, 46, 6;

    1, 7, 12: tum Athenis perpetui archontes esse desierunt,

    Vell. 1, 8, 3:

    tum Cimbri et Teutoni transcendere Rhenum,

    id. 2, 8, 3; Val. Max. 1, 5, 3; Tac. H. 4, 49; 3, 57:

    non timido, non ignavo cessare tum licuit,

    Curt. 3, 11, 5:

    Archiae, qui tum maximum magistratum Thebis obtinebat,

    Nep. Pelop. 3, 2; id. Phoc. 3, 3.—With in eo tempore: eum quem virile secus tum in eo tempore habebat, Asell. ap. Gell. 2, 13, 5.—Repeated by anaphora:

    quae nox omnium temporum conjurationis acerrima fuit. Tum Catilinae dies exeundi, tum ceteris manendi condicio, tum descriptio... constituta est, tum tuus pater, etc.,

    Cic. Sull. 18, 52; cf. Lucr. 5, 1377; 5, 1399.—
    (γ).
    Esp., referring to a former state, implying that it no longer exists:

    quaesivit ex lege illa Cornelia quae tum erat,

    Cic. Clu. 20, 55:

    cum sententias Oppianicus, quae tum erat potestas, palam ferri velle dixisset,

    id. ib. 27, 75:

    Caere, opulento tum oppido,

    Liv. 1, 2, 3; 3, 52, 3:

    praetores aerarii (nam tum a praetoribus tractabatur aerarium), etc.,

    Tac. H. 4, 9.—
    (δ).
    Expressly opposed to present time (hodie, nunc, hoc tempore, etc.; class. and very freq.; but in post-Aug. writers tunc is regularly used): prius non is eras qui eras;

    nunc is factu's qui tum non eras,

    Plaut. Trin. 4, 2, 138:

    tu nunc tibi Id laudi ducis quod tum fecisti inopia?

    Ter. Ad. 1, 2, 25; id. Hec. 3, 3, 48:

    quae tabula, tum imperio tuo revulsa, nunc a me tamen reportata est,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 46, § 112:

    tum imperator populi Romani deos patrios reportabat, nunc praetor ejusdem populi eosdem illos deos... auferebat,

    id. ib. 2, 4, 35, § 77; cf. id. ib. 2, 4, 35, § 78; 2, 5, 20, § 51; id. Clu. 31, 86; id. Planc. 9, 22; id. Quint. 22, 71; id. Phil. 14, 8, 21; id. Leg. 2, 22, 57; Caes. B. C. 3, 17; Liv. 5, 3, 5; 6, 15, 11; 10, 9, 6.—
    (ε).
    Opposed to another time specified:

    itaque tum eos exire jussit. Post autem e provincia litteras ad conlegium misit, se, etc.,

    Cic. N. D. 2, 4, 11:

    itaque ut tum carere rege, sic pulso Tarquinio nomen regis audire non poterat,

    id. Rep. 2, 30, 53; id. Mil. 21, 55:

    sicut legatorum antea, ita tum novorum colonorum caede imbutis armis,

    Liv. 4, 31, 7; 39, 22, 10; 9, 36, 1; 2, 52, 7; 4, 2, 10; 4, 57, 11;

    21, 17, 1: et tum sicca, prius celeberrima fontibus, Ide,

    Ov. M. 2, 218; Verg. A. 11, 33; Nep. Arist. 2, 3; id. Ham. 11, 7.—
    (ζ).
    In the historians in applying general statements or truths to the state of affairs spoken of: communi enim fit vitio naturae ut invisis atque incognitis rebus... vehementius exterreamur;

    ut tum accidit,

    Caes. B. C. 2, 4; 3, 68; id. B. G. 7, 3; 2, 6; id. B. C. 1, 80:

    foedera alia aliis legibus, ceterum eodem modo omnia fiunt. Tum ita factum accepimus,

    Liv. 1, 24, 4; 1, 32, 14; 21, 31, 12.—
    (η).
    Denoting coincidence or inner connection with an action before mentioned = a temporal clause (tum = cum hoc fieret), then, on that occasion:

    quis tum non ingemuit?

    Cic. Vatin. 13, 31:

    ne tum quidem hominum venustatem et facetias perspicere potuisti? i. e. cum coronam auream imponebant,

    id. Fl. 31, 76: apud imperitos tum illa dicta sunt;

    nunc agendum est subtilius,

    id. Fin. 4, 27, 74:

    itaque tum Stajenus condemnatus est,

    i. e. in that trial, id. Clu. 36, 101; id. Sen. 7, 22:

    M. Porcius Cato qui, asper ingenio, tum lenem mitemque senatorem egit,

    Liv. 45, 25; Val. Max. 8, 3, 3:

    sed tum supplicia dis... decernuntur,

    Tac. A. 3, 64; 3, 72:

    Graecia tum potuit Priamo quoque flenda videri,

    Ov. M. 14, 474.—

    With the occasion referred to specified in the same clause: Manlius... ex petulanti scurra in discordiis civitatis ad eam columnam tum suffragiis populi pervenerat,

    Cic. Clu. 13, 39:

    emisti tum in naufragio hujus urbis... tum, inquam, emisti ut, etc.,

    id. Prov. Cons. 4, 7.—Repeated by anaphora: et Capitolinis injecit sedibus ignes. Tum statua Nattae, tum simulacra deorum, Romulusque et Remus cum altrice belua vi fulminis icti conciderunt, Cic. Div. 2, 20, 45;

    so repeated seven times,

    id. Rep. 1, 40, 62.—
    (θ).
    Redundant, the time of the action being clear without it (esp. in Cic.):

    atque hoc tum judicio facto... tamen Avitus Oppianicum reum statim non facit,

    Cic. Clu. 20, 56:

    itaque tum ille inopia et necessitate coactus ad Caepasios confugit,

    id. ib. 20, 57; id. Brut. 23, 90; 39, 145; 43, 161; cf. id. Sull. 18, 51, where tum redundant occurs six times successively.—
    2.
    In oblique discourse, referring to the time of the speaker, = nunc in direct discourse:

    quando autem se, si tum non sint, pares hostibus fore?

    if they were not now so, Liv. 3, 62, 1:

    (dixit Sempronius)... nec tum agrum plebi, sed sibi invidiam quaeri,

    id. 4, 44, 9; 4, 57, 4:

    moenia eos tum transcendere non Italiae modo, sed etiam urbis Romanae,

    id. 21, 35, 9; 5, 21, 7 (in this use nunc is also freq.).—
    3.
    Referring to indefinite time.
    (α).
    Then, at such a time of the year, day, etc., at such a season:

    tum denique tauros in gregem redigo (after Lyra rises),

    Varr. R. R. 2, 5, 12; 1, 35 fin.; Col. 11, 2, 87.—
    (β).
    With the force of an indefinite temporal clause, at such a time, in such circumstances, i. e. when such a thing happens as has happened:

    qui (porci) a partu decimo die habentur puri, ab eo appellantur sacres, quod tum ad sacrificium idonei habentur primum,

    Varr. R. R. 2, 4, 16; 2, 7, 13:

    deinde cibum sequitur somnus... quia plurima tum se corpora conturbant (i. e. cum cibum ceperunt),

    Lucr. 4, 957; 3, 599; 4, 892; 4, 919;

    4, 1030: quam regionem cum superavit animus... finem altius se efferendi facit. Tum enim sui similem et levitatem et calorem adeptus... nullam in partem movetur,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 19, 43; 1, 31, 75; 3, 23, 55; 4, 24, 54; Tac. Dial. 7.—
    (γ).
    With the force of a conditional clause, then, in this instance, if so: immo res omnis relictas habeo prae quod tu velis. Ph. Tum tu igitur, qua causa missus es ad portum, id expedi (i. e. si ita est), Plaut. Stich. 2, 2, 39; id. Most. 5, 1, 55; id. As. 1, 1, 93; 2, 2, 64; 3, 3, 36; id. Aul. 3, 6, 31; id. Capt. 3, 4, 108; 4, 2, 78: non potitus essem;

    fuisset tum illos mi aegre aliquot dies,

    Ter. Phorm. 1, 3, 7; id. Eun. 2, 2, 50; 5, 1, 23; id. Hec. 3, 5, 12:

    ego C. Caesaris laudibus desim, quas, etc.? Tum hercule me confitear non judicium aliquod habuisse,

    Cic. Planc. 39, 93: scribant aliquid Isocrateo more...;

    tum illos existimabo non desperatione formidavisse genus hoc,

    id. Or. 70, 235; id. Font. 21, 49 (17, 39); id. Tusc. 1, 35, 85; id. Fam. 9, 8, 2; Ov. H. 18 (19), 81: vellem tam ferax saeculum haberemus...;

    tum ego te primus hortarer, etc.,

    Plin. Ep. 4, 15, 8.—
    4.
    Referring to future time.
    (α).
    To a definite time before mentioned:

    ut sit satius perdere Quam aut nunc manere tam diu, aut tum persequi,

    i. e. after my future return, Ter. Ad. 2, 2, 27:

    jam nunc mente prospicio quae tum studia hominum, qui concursus futuri sint,

    Cic. Div. in Caecin. 13, 42; id. Verr. 1, 13, 37; 1, 10, 30; id. Prov. Cons. 7, 17; id. Marcell. 9, 30:

    tum meae... Vocis accedet bona pars,

    Hor. C. 4, 2, 45.—
    (β).
    With the force of a conditional clause (cf. 3. b, supra), then, in this instance, if so: specta, tum scies. Plaut. Bacch. 4, 9, 100; cf.:

    quom videbis, tum scies,

    id. ib. 1, 2, 37: tuom incendes genus;

    Tum igitur aquae erit tibi cupido, etc.,

    id. Trin. 3, 2, 50; id. Curc. 2, 3, 17:

    confer sudantes, ructantes, refertos epulis... tum intelleges, etc.,

    Cic. Tusc. 5, 34, 100; id. Planc. 18, 45; id. Phil. 2, 45, 115:

    agedum, dictatorem creemus... Pulset tum mihi lictorem qui sciet, etc.,

    Liv. 2, 29, 12; Cic. Phil. 10, 3, 6; id. Or. 23, 78; 71, 235; Liv. 4, 22, 11; 5, 16, 10; 9, 11, 4.—
    B.
    Referring to a time subsequent to a time mentioned, then, thereupon.
    1.
    Simple sequence in time.
    (α).
    Time proper (only of an immediate sequence;

    otherwise deinde, postea, etc., are used): tum cum corde suo divum pater atque hominum rex Effatur, etc.,

    Enn. Ann. 179:

    dico ei quo pactod eam viderim erilem nostram filiam sustollere. Extimuit tum illa,

    Plaut. Cist. 2, 3, 9; id. Bacch. 3, 3, 29; id. As. 4, 1, 58: tum ille egens forte adplicat Primum ad Chrysidis patrem se. Ter. And. 5, 4, 21; id. Eun. 3, 1, 17; Cato, R. R. 48 (49); 135 (136); so id. ib. 112 (113): equos quinto anno... amittere binos (dentes);

    tum renascentes eis sexto anno impleri,

    Varr. R. R. 2, 7, 2 sq.: collo [p. 1909] cari jussit hominem in aureo lecto, abacosque complures ornavit... Tum ad mensam eximia forma pueros jussit consistere, eosque, etc., Cic. Tusc. 5, 21, 61:

    dixerat hoc ille, cum puer nuntiavit venire ad eum Laelium... Tum Scipio e cubiculo est egressus, etc.,

    id. Rep. 1, 12, 18; id. Div. 2, 66, 135; id. Clu. 14, 40; id. Cat. 3, 5, 10; id. Ac. 2, 5, 13; id. Div. 1, 35, 77:

    hostes suos ab oppugnatione reduxerunt. Tum suo more conclamaverunt ut, etc.,

    Caes. B. G. 5, 26; cf. id. ib. 7, 64; 5, 43 fin.;

    5, 48: adsurgentem ibi regem cuspide ad terram adfixit. Tum spolia caputque abscisum spiculo gerens... hostes fudit,

    Liv. 4, 19, 5; 5, 21, 1; 1, 26, 9; 1, 18, 10; 1, 20, 1; 1, 22, 6; 1, 28, 4; 1, 28, 9; 2, 24, 4;

    3, 8, 11, etc.: tum Caesar cum exercitu Thessaliam petit,

    Vell. 2, 52, 1; Val. Max. 5, 1, 3; Curt. 4, 3, 7; Tac. A. 3, 28; 11, 35; id. H. 4, 84; Ov. M. 2, 122; 4, 80; 7, 121; 10, 481; 14, 386; Flor. 1, 13, 12; Gell. 1, 19, 5; 1, 23, 5.—
    (β).
    In partic., foll. by an abl. absol.:

    tum, prope jam perculsis aliis tribunis, A. Verginius Caesoni capitis diem dicit,

    Liv. 3, 11, 9; 8, 32, 1; 10, 29, 12:

    tum omni spe perdita, Meherdates dolo ejus vincitur, traditurque victori,

    Tac. A. 12, 15; 12, 16:

    tum, ferro extracto, confestim exanimatus est,

    Nep. Epam. 9, 4.—
    (γ).
    Implying a connection between two events, hence, under these circumstances, accordingly, thereupon:

    at pater omnipotens ira tum percitus acri... Phaethonta... Deturbavit in terram,

    Lucr. 5, 399:

    madefactum iri Graeciam sanguine... tum neque te ipsum non esse commotum, Marcumque Varronem et M. Catonem... vehementer esse perterritos,

    Cic. Div. 1, 32, 68; cf. id. ib. 1, 34, 76; Caes. B. G. 4, 25; cf. id. ib. 5, 49; 5, 51;

    7, 59: quippe quibus nec domi spes prolis, nec cum finitimis conubia essent. Tum ex consilio patrum Romulus legatos circa vicinas gentes misit,

    Liv. 1, 9, 2; 3, 26, 1; 3, 31, 7; 4, 45, 7.—
    2.
    Enumeration of a series of events; the co-ordinate clauses introduced by tum... tum, or primum (primo)... deinde... tum, etc.
    (α).
    Succession of time proper:

    ducem Hannibali unum e concilio datum (a Jove), tum ei ducem illum praecepisse ne respiceret, illum autem respexisse, tum visam beluam vastam, etc.,

    Cic. Div. 1, 24, 49; 1, 27, 57; 2, 28, 58 sq.:

    primo... deinde... tum... tum,

    id. Fin. 1, 16, 50; 5, 23, 65; id. Tusc. 5, 2, 5:

    primum... deinde... tum... postremo,

    id. N. D. 2, 1, 3; 3, 3, 6: primum colonos inde Romanos expulit: inde in Latinam viam transgressus, etc., inde Lavinium recepit; tum deinceps Corbionem, Vitelliam;

    postremum, etc.,

    Liv. 2, 39, 4:

    primi consules sub jugum missi, tum ut quisque gradu proximus erat, tum deinceps singulae legiones,

    id. 9, 6, 1:

    primo... deinde... tum... tum,

    id. 21, 22, 8; id. praef. 9; 3, 28, 8: 5, 39, 7;

    23, 23, 6: deinde... deinde... Tum... post quas, etc.,

    Curt. 3, 3, 24: primum... deinde... deinde... tum... postea, Masur. Gabin. ap. Gell. 5, 13, 5; Gai. Inst. 4, 60.—
    (β).
    So in partic.: tum (also hic, et;

    not deinde or postea), to denote the succession of speakers in dialogue: immo duas dabo, inquit adulescens... Tum senex ille: Si vis, inquit, quattuor sane dato,

    Plaut. Stich. 4, 1, 46 dub.:

    tum Piso... inquit, etc. Tum Quintus... inquit, etc. Hic ego... inquam, etc. Tum ille... inquit, etc. Tum Piso... inquit, etc. Et ille ridens... inquit, etc. Tum Piso exorsus est, etc.,

    Cic. Fin. 5, 1, 2 sqq.:

    tum Atticus... inquit, etc. Tum ille... inquit, etc. Tum Brutus, etc. Tum ille, etc. Tum Atticus, etc. Tum Pomponius... inquit, etc.,

    id. Brut. 3, 11 sqq., and through the whole treatise; cf. id. Ac. 1, 2, 4; 1, 3, 9; 1, 4, 13; 1, 12, 43 and 44; 2, 19, 63; id. N. D. 1, 6, 15 sqq.; id. Rep. 1, 13, 19 sqq.; Liv. 7, 10, 2 sqq.; 23, 12, 8; Tac. Dial. 3; 15; 25; 42; Gell. 3, 1, 11 sqq.; 18, 1, 9 sqq.; Ov. M. 14, 594.—
    (γ).
    Transf., of sequence or succession of thought, passing into mere co-ordination (v. C. 2. b, g), then... again... furthermore:

    qui mi in cursu obstiterit, faxo vitae is obstiterit suae. Prius edico ne quis, etc. Tum pistores scrofipasci qui, etc. Tum piscatores.... Tum lanii autem qui, etc.,

    Plaut. Capt. 4, 2, 28; 4, 2, 34; 4, 2, 39: (res familiaris) primum bene parta sit, tum quam plurimis se utilem praebeat, deinde augeatur ratione, diligentia, etc., Cic. Off. 1, 26, 92; id. Ac. 2, 47, 146; id. Tusc. 1, 28, 68 sq.; 5, 40, 117; id. Ac. 2, 10, 30; id. de Or. 1, 42, 190; id. Cat. 4, 3, 5; id. Agr. 1, 2, 5; id. Clu. 2, 6; Liv. 3, 26, 11.—
    C.
    Hence, as co-ordinating conjunction, introducing an additional assertion, or thought.
    1.
    Alone, = praeterea, and then, besides, also, moreover, on the other hand (freq. in ante-class. style and in Cic.;

    rare in Livy and post-Aug. prose): argenti aurique advexit multum, lanam purpuramque multam... tum Babylonica peristromata, etc.,

    Plaut. Stich. 2, 3, 54; id. Rud. 2, 4, 10; id. Bacch. 4, 3, 71; 4, 8, 17; id. Ps. 3, 2, 78; id. Aul. 1, 2, 6; 1, 3, 16; id. Men. 5, 5, 41; id. Mil. 4, 2, 13; id. Pers. 1, 3, 15; 4, 2, 3; Ter. And. 1, 5, 27; 1, 2, 21; 2, 3, 7; id. Eun. prol. 4; 5, 6, 15; id. Heaut. 2, 1, 16; Lucr. 4, 680; cf. id. 1, 494; 4, 1152:

    magnum ingenium L. Luculli, magnumque optimarum artium studium, tum omnis ab eo percepta doctrina... caruit omnino rebus urbanis,

    Cic. Ac. 2, 1, 1; 2, 14, 43; id. Div. 1, 24, 50; 1, 42, 94; id. de Or. 1, 46, 201; id. Off. 1, 6, 19; id. Fin. 1, 6, 21; 2, 16, 53; id. Leg. 1, 5, 17; 1, 9, 26; id. Rab. Post. 14, 40; id. Phil. 13, 12, 26:

    altera ex parte Bellovaci instabant, alteram Camulogenus tenebat: tum legiones a praesidio interclusas maximum flumen distinebat,

    Caes. B. G. 7, 59; id. B. C. 3, 49: naves convenerunt duae Punicae quinqueremes;

    duae ab Heraclea triremes... tum quinque Rhodiae quadriremes,

    Liv. 42, 56, 6; 1, 40, 4; Sen. Vit. Beat. 3, 4; Just. 5, 10, 3.—Sometimes connecting two terms of the same clause, with the force of cum... tum (v. infra, 3. d.):

    quot me censes homines jam deverberasse, hospites tum civis?

    Ter. Phorm. 2, 2, 14:

    faciendum est igitur nobis ut... veteranorum, tum legionis Martiae quartaeque consensus... confirmetur,

    Cic. Phil. 3, 3, 7; Liv. 28, 43, 1 (in co-ordination often with etiam, autem, and sometimes with praeterea and porro; v. III. infra).—
    2.
    Tum as correlative of a preceding tum.
    (α).
    With an added assertion or thought: ita est haec hominum natio: voluptarii atque potatores, Tum sycophantae... plurimi In urbe habitant;

    tum meretrices mulieres Nusquam perhibentur blandiores gentium,

    Plaut. Men. 2, 1, 35; id. Ep. 2, 2, 28; id. Mil. 3, 1, 100; 3, 1, 102.—
    (β).
    Tum... tum = nunc... nunc (modo... modo), sometimes... sometimes, now... now, at one time... at another (freq. in Cic., not in Caes., rare in Liv., and very rare in postAug. writers):

    tum huc, tum illuc inretitos impedit piscis,

    Plaut. Truc. 1, 1, 17:

    tum hoc mihi probabilius, tum illud videtur,

    Cic. Ac. 2, 43, 134:

    mihi... tum hoc tum illud probabilius videtur,

    id. Off. 3, 7, 33; so id. Am. 4, 13; id. Sen. 13, 45; id. Top. 7, 31; id. N. D. 2, 19, 49:

    (alvus) tum restringitur, tum relaxatur,

    id. ib. 2, 54, 136; id. Rep. 3, 13 (14), 23; id. Leg. 2, 7, 16; id. Or. 63, 212; id. Sen. 3, 7; id. Inv. 1, 37, 66:

    dictator tum appellare tum adhortari milites,

    Liv. 8, 39, 4; Suet. Ner. 1; Gell. 1, 11, 15.—Tum may be repeated several times:

    plerique propter voluptatem tum in morbos graves, tum in damna, tum in dedecora incurrunt,

    Cic. Fin. 1, 14, 47; 3, 7, 26;

    so three times,

    id. N. D. 1, 12, 29; 1, 14, 37; 1, 15, 39; id. Inv. 1, 52, 98; id. Or. 3, 45, 177; id. Off. 1, 7, 22; id. Leg. 2, 17, 43; id. Top. 25, 96;

    four times,

    id. N. D. 1, 43, 120; 2, 20, 52; 2, 39, 101; id. Verr. 2, 4, 34, § 75;

    five times,

    id. N. D. 2, 5, 14; id. Inv. 1, 13, 17; 1, 41, 76; id. Verr. 2, 5, 36, § 94;

    six times,

    id. ib. 1, 53, 120;

    seven times,

    Quint. 9, 4, 133;

    nine times,

    Cic. N. D. 2, 50, 51.—And in chronological order (to be distinguished from the instances B. 2. a and g):

    Atheniensium (rem publicam constituerunt) tum Theseus, tum Draco, tum Solo, tum Clisthenes, tum multi alii,

    at different times, successively, Cic. Rep. 2, 1, 2.—
    (γ).
    Preceded or followed by other co-ordinate words (alias, modo, aliquando, aut... aut, nunc... nunc):

    ex quo intellegitur qualis ille sit quem tum moderatum, alias modestum, tum temperantem, alias constantem continentemque dicimus,

    Cic. Tusc. 4, 16, 36:

    tum... tum... aliquando,

    id. Div. 2, 2, 6:

    tum... tum... aut... aut,

    id. Or. 61, 204:

    modo... tum autem,

    id. N. D. 2, 40, 142:

    nunc... nunc... tum... tum,

    Flor. 1, 17, 5.—
    (δ).
    Tum... tum = et... et, both... and, not only... but also, partly... partly, without regard to time, the second term being frequently strengthened by etiam (mostly post-Aug.):

    Milo Compsam oppugnans, ictusque lapide tum Clodio, tum patriae, quam armis petebat, poenas dedit,

    Vell. 2, 68, 3:

    Muciam et Fulviam, tum a patre, tum a viro utramque inclitam,

    Val. Max. 9, 1, 8:

    Caesar Pompejo tum proprias, tum etiam filiae lacrimas reddidit,

    id. 5, 1, 10; Quint. 7, 3, 18; Sen. Q. N. 4, 2, 28; id. Clem. 1, 19, 2; Front. Aquaed. 1; Tac. A. 12, 33; Suet. Tit. 3; Nep. praef. 8;

    and with etiam,

    Val. Max. 2, 2, 8; 5, 9, 1; 7, 6 prooem.; Nep. Them. 2, 3.—
    3.
    As correlative with a preceding cum, introducing particular after a universal or a stronger or more important assertion after a weaker or less important.
    a.
    Connecting complete sentences with different predicates, cum... tum = as... so, while... (tum being not translated; ante-class. cum always with indic.; class. with subj. or indic.):

    quom antehac te amavi, et mihi amicam esse crevi... tum id mihi hodie aperuisti,

    Plaut. Cist. 1, 1, 2; id. Truc. 4, 1, 6:

    quom id mihi placebat, tum uno ore omnes omnia Bona dicere,

    Ter. And. 1, 1, 69; id. Phorm. 1, 4, 10:

    quae cum res tota ficta sit pueriliter, tum ne efficit quidem quod vult,

    Cic. Fin. 1, 6, 19; id. Tusc. 5, 39, 13; id. Fam. 13, 16, 1; and so with subj., id. N. D. 1, 1, 1; id. Off. 3, 2, 5; id. Lael. 7, 23; id. Brut. 39, 145; 11, 250:

    cum omnium rerum simulatio est vitiosa, tum amicitiae repugnat maxime,

    id. Lael. 25, 91; id. Div. 2, 27, 58; and so with indic., id. Planc. 33, 80; id. Tull. 4, 8; id. Div. in Caecil. 20, 65; id. Sest. 1, 2; id. Fam. 16, 4, 4:

    haec cum merito ejus fieri intellegebat, tum magni interesse arbitrabatur, etc.,

    Caes. B. G. 5, 4; 3, 16; id. B. C. 1, 58; Liv. 3, 34, 1; 4, 53, 4.—
    b.
    Clauses with the same predicate, which is placed after the first clause (always with indic.):

    nam mihi, cum multa eximie divineque videntur Athenae tuae peperisse, tum nihil melius illis mysteriis quibus, etc.,

    Cic. Leg. 2, 14, 36; id. Tusc. 4, 18, 42; id. Phil. 2, 5, 12; Liv. 4, 46, 10; 6, 38, 10.—
    c.
    Clauses with a common predicate placed before both co-ordinate terms, cum... tum = not only, but also; as... so especially:

    visa est Arcesilae cum vera sententia, tum honesta et digna sapiente,

    Cic. Ac. 2, 24, 77; id. Fin. 1, 16, 51; 2, 35, 119; 3, 1, 3:

    movit patres conscriptos cum causa tum auctor,

    Liv. 9, 10, 1; 4, 57, 2; Suet. Ner. 46 init. —
    d.
    With a common predicate after both co-ordinate terms:

    quom virum tum uxorem, di vos perdant,

    Plaut. Men. 4, 2, 103:

    luxuria cum omni aetati turpis tum senectuti foedissima est,

    Cic. Off. 1, 34, 123; id. Clu. 59, 161; id. Verr. 2, 1, 34, § 86; id. N. D. 1, 21, 57; id. Deiot. 9, 26; id. Clu. 16, 46:

    concitatos animos flecti quam frangi putabat cum tutius tum facilius esse,

    Liv. 2, 23, 15; 6, 9, 8; 1, 57, 1; 10, 26, 13; Tac. Dial. 5.—With tum several times repeated:

    quem pater moriens cum tutoribus et propinquis, tum legibus, tum aequitati magistratuum, tum judiciis vestris commendatum putavit,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 58, § 151; cf. esp. id. Planc. 40, 95. —
    e.
    Tum, in this construction, is freq. strengthened,
    (α).
    By vero:

    cum haec sunt videnda, tum vero illud est hominis magni, etc.,

    in particular, Cic. Clu. 58, 159; id. Mur. 27, 55; id. Phil. 3, 5, 12; 7, 3, 9; cf. id. Or. 1, 23, 106; 3, 16, 60; Liv. 34, 39, 9; Quint. 12, 1, 25.—
    (β).
    By maxime, above all, most of all, especially, chiefly:

    cum omnibus in rebus temeritas in adsentando turpis est, tum in eo loco maxime in quo ju dicandum est quantum, etc.,

    Cic. Div. 1, 4, 7; id. Tusc. 4, 1, 1; 5, 12, 36; id. Rosc. Am. 25, 69:

    cum infamia atque indignitas rei impediebat, tum maxime quod, etc.,

    Caes. B. G. 7, 56; Sall. J. 43, 5; Liv. 1, 8, 2; Suet. Claud. 30; Quint. 6, 1, 29.—
    (γ).
    By praecipue, especially, chiefly, above all:

    cum omnium sociorum provinciarumque rationem diligenter habere debetis, tum praecipue Siciliae,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 1, § 2; id. Fam. 13, 11, 3:

    fortuna quae plurimum potest cum in reliquis rebus, tum praecipue in bello,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 68; Liv. 22, 43, 11; 1, 40, 3; Quint. 1, 1, 29; 1, 10, 13; 5, 10, 106; Plin. Ep. 4, 3, 2.—
    (δ).
    By inprimis, chiefly, principally:

    cum multa non probo, tum illud inprimis quod, etc.,

    Cic. Fin. 1, 6, 18; id. Fam. 12, 22, 3.—
    (ε).
    By cumprimis, chiefly, principally: quapropter bene cum superis de rebus habenda Nobis est ratio... tum cumprimis Unde anima atque animi constet [p. 1910] natura videndum, Lucr. 1, 131.—
    (ζ).
    By certe, especially, at least, assuredly:

    at cum de plurimis eadem dicit, tum certe de maximis,

    Cic. Fin. 4, 5, 13; id. Fam. 7, 4; cf. Quint. 2, 1, 10.—
    (η).
    By nimirum, assuredly, undoubtedly:

    cum plurimas... commoditates amicitia contineat, tum illa nimirum praestat omnibus quod, etc.,

    Cic. Am. 7, 23. —
    (θ).
    By etiam, besides, as well:

    cum omnes omnibus ex terris homines improbos audacesque collegerat, tum etiam multos fortes viros et bonos... tenebat,

    Cic. Cael. 6, 14; id. Ac. 2, 10, 31; id. Tusc. 1, 1, 2:

    quos tu cum memoriter, tum etiam erga nos amice et benevole collegisti,

    id. Fin. 1, 10, 34; id. Verr. 2, 3, 23, § 56:

    cum sua virtute, tum etiam alienis vitiis,

    id. Leg. 23, 67; id. Fin. 2, 12, 38; id. N. D. 2, 37, 95; id. de Or. 3, 60, 225; Liv. 1, 21, 2; 7, 23, 6; 7, 32, 10; Val. Max. 7, 2, 3; 3, 2, 10; 9, 6, 3; Quint. 9, 1, 20; 9, 4, 143.—
    (ι).
    By quoque, also, besides, as well:

    cum potestas major, tum vir quoque potestati par hostes trans Anienem submovere,

    Liv. 4, 17, 11; 1, 22, 2; cf. Quint. 12, 10, 72.—
    (κ).
    By et, also, besides, too:

    cujus mortem cum luctus civitatis, tum et dictaturae undecim insignem fecere,

    Just. 19, 1, 7.—
    (λ).
    By praeterea, moreover, besides:

    dicimus C. Verrem cum multa libidinose fecerit, tum praeterea quadringentiens sestertium ex Sicilia abstulisse,

    Cic. Verr. 1, 18, 56.
    II.
    Tum as correlative of dependent clauses (freq. in ante - class. writings and Cic., rare in post-Aug. writings).
    A.
    With temporal clauses, introduced by cum, = at the time when, at a time when.
    1.
    Referring to definite past time.
    a.
    Tum as antecedent of cum:

    jam tum cum primum jussit me ad se arcessier, Roget quis, Quid tibi cum illa?

    Ter. Eun. 3, 3, 4; id. Heaut. 2, 3, 21:

    qui (Hercules) tum dolore frangebatur cum immortalitatem ipsa morte quaerebat,

    Cic. Tusc. 2, 8, 20:

    bene apud majores nostros senatus tum cum florebat imperium decrevit ut, etc.,

    id. Div. 1, 41, 91; id. Phil. 2, 44, 114; id. Div. 1, 17, 30; id. Verr. 2, 2, 66, § 160; id. Clu. 33, 89; id. Verr. 1, 2, 5; id. Brut. 2, 7; 23, 89; id. Off. 3, 27, 100; id. Agr. 2, 24, 64; id. Phil. 2, 39, 100; 3, 4, 11:

    tum mittendos legatos fuisse cum Perseus Graecas urbes obsideret,

    Liv. 45, 3, 7:

    tum cum Vipereos sparsi... dentes,

    Ov. M. 4, 572; id. H. 3, 23; Val. Max. 6, 1, 12.—After pluperf.:

    nam tum cum in Asia res magnas permulti amiserant scimus Romae solutione impedita fidem concidisse,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 7, 19; Val. Max. 3, 6, 1; 2, 8, 15 fin. —Tum inserted in the temporal clause:

    cum Davo egomet vidi jurgantem ancillam... quom ibi me adesse neuter tum praesenserat,

    Ter. And. 5, 1, 20.—
    b.
    Tum, introducing the apodosis of the temporal clause (generally not transl. in Engl.).
    (α).
    Of coincident events, cum... tum = while: quom genui tum morituros scivi, Enn. ap. Cic. Div. 1, 58, 132 (Trag. Rel. v. 361 Vahl.); Ter. Phorm. 3, 2, 18:

    cum minime videbamur, tum maxime philosophabamur,

    Cic. N. D. 1, 3, 6; id. Agr. 2, 11, 26; id. Cael. 26, 63; id. Phil. 3, 5, 13:

    cum pavida mulier nullam opem videret, tum Tarquinius fateri amorem, orare, etc.,

    Liv. 1, 58, 3; 5, 11, 4. —
    (β).
    Tum = deinde, usu. after a pluperf.:

    id cum Sulla fecisset, tum ante oppidum Nolam Samnitium castra cepit,

    Cic. Div. 1, 33, 72; id. Brut. 92, 319; id. Ac. 2, 3, 9; 2, 3, 15; id. Fin. 1, 8, 26; id. Tusc. 4, 20, 45; id. Div. 1, 25, 53; 2, 2, 7; id. Rep. 2, 25, 47; Liv. 21, 11, 8; cf. id. 1, 26, 7; 23, 22, 4.—Inserted in the apodosis:

    cum jam humanae opes egestae a Veis essent, amoliri tum deum dona,

    Liv. 5, 22, 3.—
    2.
    Referring to definite present time:

    quem esse negas, eundem esse dicis. Cum enim miserum esse dicis, tum eum qui non sit, dicis esse,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 6, 12.—
    3.
    Referring to indefinite time.
    a.
    As antecedent of the clause, = at the time when, at a time when, whenever: hominum inmortalis est infamia;

    etiam tum vivit quom esse credas mortuam,

    Plaut. Pers. 3, 1, 28; id. As. 1, 3, 55; id. Merc. 3, 2, 7; Cato, R. R. 31:

    nec sibi enim quisquam tum se vitamque requirit Cum pariter mens et corpus sopita quiescunt,

    Lucr. 3, 919; 4, 444; 4, 455;

    4, 1166: omnis praedictio mali tum probatur cum ad praedictionem cautio adjungitur,

    Cic. Div. 2, 25, 54; id. Fin. 2, 32, 104; id. N. D. 2, 3, 9: tum cum sine pondere suci Mobilibus ventis arida facta volant, Ov. H. 5, 109; Cic. Ac. 1, 12, 44; 2, 27, 88; id. Fin. 4, 8, 20; id. Tusc. 3, 9, 20; 5, 26, 73; id. N. D. 1, 4, 9; id. Off. 1, 27, 93.—Tum maxime... cum plurimum = eo magis quo magis:

    eam (partem animi) tum maxime vigere cum plurimum absit a corpore,

    Cic. Div. 1, 32, 70; so, cum maxime... tum maxime; v. b. a foll.—
    b.
    Tum introducing the apodosis.
    (α).
    As coincident:

    quom amamus, tum perimus,

    Plaut. Truc. 1, 2, 94:

    ulmus, cum folia cadunt, tum iterum tempestiva est,

    Cato, R. R. 17; so id. ib. 155 (156):

    cum ea quae quasi involuta fuerunt, aperti sunt, tum inventa dicuntur,

    Cic. Ac. 2, 8, 26; id. Fin. 5, 10, 29; 1, 17, 57; id. N. D. 2, 52, 129; 1, 19, 49; id. Imp. Pomp. 6, 15.—Cum maxime... tum maxime = quo magis eo magis:

    nam quom pugnabant maxume, ego tum fugiebam maxume,

    Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 45:

    quamobrem omnes, cum secundae res sunt maxume, tum maxume Meditari secum oportet, etc.,

    Cic. Tusc. 3, 14, 30 poet. —
    (β).
    As subsequent:

    ad legionem quom itum, adminiculum eis danunt tum jam aliquem cognatum suum,

    Plaut. Most. 1, 2, 47:

    eo cum accessit ratio argumentique conclusio... tum et perceptio eorum omnium apparet,

    Cic. Ac. 2, 10, 30; 2, 41, 128; id. Fin. 5, 9, 24; 1, 20, 69; 5, 15, 41; id. Tusc. 1, 4, 8; 1, 24, 58; 3, 2, 3; id. N. D. 2, 48, 123; id. Div. 2, 19, 44.—
    4.
    Referring to future time.
    (α).
    Tum as antecedent of cum:

    quom mi haec dicentur dicta, tum tu, furcifer, quasi mus in medio pariete vorsabere,

    Plaut. Cas. 1, 51; id. Bacch. 3, 4, 20:

    non committam ut tum haec res judicetur cum haec frequentia Roma discesserit,

    Cic. Verr. 1, 18, 54; id. Agr. 2, 17, 44; 2, 25, 67; id. Fin. 4, 22, 62; id. Tusc. 1, 20, 46; Liv. 23, 13, 4; 41, 10, 7; Ov. M. 2, 651; id. H. 15, 293; Nep. Them. 6, 5.—
    (β).
    Tum introducing the apodosis:

    quom videbis, tum scies,

    Plaut. Bacch. 1, 2, 37; 4, 6, 30:

    de quo cum perpauca dixero, tum ad jus civile veniam,

    Cic. Leg. 1, 12, 34; id. Clu. 2, 6; 4, 9; Liv. 3, 56, 10.—
    B.
    With temporal clause, introduced by ubi.
    1.
    Tum as antecedent of the clause (very rare):

    vitem novellam resecare tum erit tempus ubi valebit,

    Cato, R. R. 33:

    tum tu igitur demum id adulescenti aurum dabis, ubi erit locata virgo in matrimonium?

    Plaut. Trin. 3, 3, 52.—
    2.
    Tum introducing the apodosis.
    (α).
    Referring to definite past time (tum always = deinde):

    ubi eorum dolorem majorem quam ceterorum cognovi, tum meum animum in illos, tum mei consilii causam proposui, tum eos hortatus sum, etc.,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 63, § 140; Sall. J. 94, 3:

    ubi illuxit, et Romanis Punica et Gallica arma cognita, tum dubitationem exemere,

    Liv. 25, 10, 5; 1, 9, 10; 4, 57, 3; 9, 43, 16; 21, 25, 12; 23, 11, 4.—
    (β).
    Referring to indefinite time:

    post ubi tempust promissa jam perfici, Tum coacti necessario se aperiunt,

    Ter. And. 4, 1, 8: Cato, R. R. 3 init.; 17:

    ubi jam morbi se flexit causa... Tum quasi vaccillans primum consurgit,

    Lucr. 3, 503; 6, 129; 6, 526.—
    (γ).
    Referring to future time:

    otium ubi erit, tum tibi operam ludo et deliciae dabo,

    Plaut. Rud. 2, 4, 13; id. Stich. 4, 2, 14:

    ubi tu voles, Ubi tempus erit, sat habet si tum recipitur,

    Ter. Eun. 3, 2, 32; Plaut. Truc. 4, 4, 18; id. Bacch. 4, 3, 72; id. Pers. 4, 7, 19; id. Cas. 3, 2, 27:

    ut ubi id interrogando argumentis firmavero, tum testes ad crimen accommodem,

    Cic. Verr. 1, 18, 55:

    ubi haerere jam aciem videris, tum terrorem equestrem infer,

    Liv. 6, 12, 10; 22, 55, 8.—
    C.
    With a temporal clause introduced by postquam.
    1.
    Tum as antecedent of the clause (very rare):

    Flaminius qui ne quieto quidem hoste ipse quieturus erat, tum vero postquam res sociorum ante oculos prope suos ferri vidit, suum id dedecus ratus, etc.,

    Liv. 22, 3, 7; Val. Max. 3, 8, 1 (v. infra, III. A. 2. a. b).—
    2.
    Tum introducing the apodosis (always = deinde).
    (α).
    Referring to definite past time:

    posteaquam e portu piratae exierunt, tum coeperunt quaerere homines, etc.,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 38, § 100; Sall. J. 106, 6; 84, 1; id. Cat. 51, 40 (al. tunc):

    postquam satis virium collectum videbat, tum ex suis unum sciscitatum Romam ad patrem misit,

    Liv. 1, 54, 5; 3, 66, 5; 6, 13, 4; 22, 48, 4; 25, 10, 6; Gell. 5, 3, 6.—
    (β).
    Referring to indefinite time: postquam vero commoditas quaedam... dicendi copiam consecuta est, tum ingenio freta malitia pervertere urbes adsuevit, Cic. Inv. 1, 2, 3.—
    D.
    With a temporal clause introduced by ut.
    1.
    Tum as antecedent of the clause (very rare):

    tum vero ingentem gemitum dat Ut spolia, ut currus, utque ipsum corpus amici... conspexit,

    Verg. A. 1, 485; cf. id. ib. 12, 218.—
    2.
    Tum introducing the apodosis.
    (α).
    Of definite past time:

    nam ut dudum adcurrimus ad Alcesimarchum... tum mi, puto, prae timore hic excidisse Cistellam,

    Plaut. Cist. 4, 2, 46:

    sed ut intellectum est quantam vim haberet accurata... oratio, tum etiam magistri dicendi multi subito exstiterunt,

    Cic. Brut. 8, 30; id. Phil. 9, 4, 9; Liv. 24, 44, 10; id. 21, 54, 9; 23, 34, 6.—
    (β).
    Referring to future time:

    neque ut quaeque res delata ad nos erit, tum denique scrutari locos debemus,

    Cic. de Or. 2, 34, 146:

    traditum esse ut quando aqua Albana abundasset, tum, si eam Romanus rite emisisset, victoriam de Vejentibus dari (= si quando),

    Liv. 5, 15, 11 Weissenb. ad loc.—
    E.
    With a temporal clause introduced by quando.
    1.
    Tum as antecedent of the clause.
    (α).
    Of definite past time:

    auctoritatem senatus exstare sentio, tum, quando Alexandro mortuo, legatos Tyrum misimus,

    Cic. Agr. 2, 16, 41.—
    (β).
    Of future time:

    at scire tum memento quando id quod voles habebis,

    Plaut. Capt. 2, 1, 41; id. Mil. 3, 1, 213; id. Most. 3, 1, 136; id. Men. 5, 7, 57:

    utinam tum essem natus quando Romani dona accipere coepissent,

    Cic. Off. 2, 21, 75.—
    2.
    Tum introducing the apodosis.
    (α).
    Of indefinite time (quando = whenever):

    quando esurio tum crepant (intestina),

    Plaut. Men. 5, 5, 27; id. Truc. 1, 1, 15; id. Ps. 4, 7, 85:

    quando mulier dotem marito dabat, tum quae ex suis bonis retinebat reciperare dicebatur,

    Gell. 17, 6, 6; 7 (6), 14, 4.—
    (β).
    Of future time:

    at tu, quando habebis, tum dato,

    Plaut. Men. 3, 3, 23:

    quando ab eadem parte sol eodemque tempore iterum defecerit, tum signis omnibus ad principium revocatis, expletum annum habeto,

    Cic. Rep. 6, 22, 24:

    quando mihi usus venerit, tum quaeram ex te atque discam,

    Gell. 6 (7), 17, 4.—
    F.
    In the apodosis after simul ac:

    an simul ac nubes successere, ipse in eas tum Descendit (Juppiter), prope ut hinc teli determinet ictus?

    Lucr. 6, 402.—
    G.
    With a temporal clause introduced by dum.
    1.
    Tum as antecedent:

    sanctius visum est nomen Augusti, ut scilicet jam tum dum colit terras, ipso numine ac titulo consecretur,

    Flor. 2, 33, 66 (4, 12, 66).—
    2.
    Tum introducing the apodosis:

    dum habeat, tum amet,

    Plaut. Truc. 2, 1, 23:

    dum se glomerant... tum pondere turris Procubuit,

    Verg. A. 9, 540.—
    H.
    As antecedent of quamdiu:

    qui cum tibi amicus non modo tum fuerit quamdiu tecum in provincia fuerit, verum etiam nunc sit cum, etc.,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 24, § 58.—
    K.
    Denoting a logical consequence after quando and cum:

    quando ergo erga te benignus fui... tum te mihi benigne itidem addecet... referre gratiam,

    Plaut. Rud. 5, 3, 35:

    cum magnus numerus deesset, tum iste homo nefarius in eorum locum... substituere coepit cives Romanos,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 28, § 72.—
    L.
    After relative clauses denoting time: qua tempestate Paris Helenam innuptis junxit nuptiis, Ego tum gravida expletis jam fere ad pariendum mensibus, Poet. ap. Cic. de Or. 3, 58, 219 (Trag. Rel. p. 246 Rib.).—
    M.
    With conditional clauses.
    1.
    With a conditional clause introduced by si, sin, ni (not nisi).
    (α).
    Tum as antecedent of clause:

    tum pol ego interii, homo si ille abiit,

    Plaut. Ps. 4, 1, 6; id. Men. 2, 2, 71; Ter. Heaut. 4, 3, 40:

    si tenuis causa est, tum etiam argumentandi tenue filum,

    Cic. Or. 36, 124; id. Rep. 1, 40, 62; 2, 9, 15; id. Fin. 1, 19, 63; id. N. D. 1, 6, 13; id. Verr. 2, 3, 47, § 112:

    tum vero ego nequiquam Capitolium servaverim si civem in servitutem duci videam,

    Liv. 6, 14, 4; 3, 9, 11; 6, 14, 4; 7, 34, 14; Cato ap. Plin. 29, 1, 7, § 14; Gell. 2, 12, 1 sq.; 4, 13, 1; 14, 2, 21.—
    (β).
    Tum introducing the apodosis:

    si triduum hoc hic erimus, tum arbores in te cadent,

    Plaut. Men. 2, 3, 30; id. Rud. 5, 2, 59; 3, 4, 49; id. As. 1, 3, 89; id. Rud. 1, 3, 13; id. Ps. 4, 1, 1; 4, 1, 48 (39); Ter. Eun. 2, 3, 64; 3, 1, 17; id. Phorm. 1, 3, 19; Cato, R. R. 26; cf. id. ib. 27:

    quod si, ut spero, cepero, tum vero litteras publice mittam,

    Cic. Fam. 2, 10, 3; id. Div. 1, 44, 100; cf. id. Ac. 2, 10, 32; id. Fin. 2, 4, 79; id. N. D. 3, 36, 87; id. Rep. 1, 43, 66: id. [p. 1911] Rosc. Am. 49, 142:

    si dimicandum erit, tum tu in novissimos te recipito,

    Liv. 7, 40, 13; 8, 10, 12; Hor. S. 1, 2, 97; Ov. M. 7, 32.—

    Esp., denoting the consequences of perjury in ancient formulas of oaths: si ego injuste illos homines dedier mihi exposco, tum patriae compotem me numquam siris esse,

    Liv. 1, 32, 7; 1, 24, 8; 22, 53, 11; hence, quid si falles? Me. Tum Mercurius Sosiae iratus siet, Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 239; 3, 2, 52; id. Aul. 4, 10, 50; cf. also Liv. 3, 64, 10.—
    2.
    With a condition contrary to fact.
    (α).
    Tum, antecedent of clause:

    tum esset ostentum, si anguem vectis circumplicavisset,

    Cic. Div. 2, 28, 62; id. Verr. 2, 2, 68, § 164:

    tum id audirem si tibi soli viveres,

    id. Marcell. 8, 25; id. Fin. 4, 13, 33; id. Div. 2, 35, 73.—
    (β).
    Tum introducing the apodosis:

    si quidem me amaret, tum istuc prodesset,

    Ter. Eun. 3, 1, 56:

    quodsi omnia nobis quae ad victum pertinent. suppeditarentur, tum optimo quisque ingenio, totum se in cognitione et scientia collocaret,

    Cic. Off. 1, 44, 158. —
    N.
    After an abl. absol.
    1.
    With perfect participles (= postquam or cum... tum), mostly with denique, vero, demum.
    (α).
    Referring to definite past time:

    ut morte ejus nuntiata tum denique bellum confectum arbitraretur,

    Cic. Mur. 16, 34:

    sed confecto proelio tum vero cerneres quanta vis animi fuisset in exercitu Catilinae,

    Sall. C. 61, 1:

    ita rebus divinis peractis tum de bello deque republica dictator rettulit,

    Liv. 22, 11, 1; 2, 29, 1; 2, 29, 3; 3, 56, 1; 5, 50, 8; Plin. 11, 20, 22, § 68.—
    (β).
    Referring to indefinite time:

    hisce omnibus rebus consideratis, tum denique id quod primum est dicendum, postremum soleo cogitare, quo utar exordio,

    Cic. Or. 2, 77, 315.—
    (γ).
    Referring to future time (the abl. absol. = a fut. perf.):

    ita prope XL. diebus interpositis tum denique se responsuros esse arbitrantur,

    Cic. Verr. 1, 10, 31; 1, 18, 54; id. Fin. 4, 13, 32; id. Scaur. Fragm. 10, 22.—
    2.
    With pres. participles (post-class.):

    tacentibus cunctis, tum ipse (dixit), etc.,

    Just. 12, 15, 6.
    III.
    Particular connections.
    A.
    With other particles of time.
    1.
    Jam tum, already at that time, i. e. earlier than might be anticipated:

    jam tum erat suspitio Dolo malo haec fieri,

    Ter. Eun. 3, 3, 8; cf. id. ib. 4, 4, 58; id. Phorm. 5, 8, 34:

    quippe etenim jam tum divom mortalia saecla Egregias animo facies vigilante videbant,

    Lucr. 5, 1169; 5, 1037:

    ut mihi jam tum divinasse ille (Romulus) videatur hanc urbem sedem aliquando summo esse imperio praebituram,

    Cic. Rep. 2, 5, 10; 2, 7, 12; id. Div. 2, 57, 118; id. Tusc. 4, 2, 4:

    jam tum in Palatio monte Lupercal hoc fuisse ludicrum ferunt,

    Liv. 1, 5, 1; 1, 7, 16; 1, 41, 7; 10, 21, 14;

    24, 49, 1: ut jam tum qualis futurus esset ostenderet,

    Suet. Dom. 1; Curt. 4, 6, 29.—
    2.
    Tum demum and tum denique, then only, then at length, then at last, not till then, i. e. later than might be expected, implying delayed action.
    a.
    Tum demum.
    (α).
    In gen.:

    adversisque in rebus noscere qui sit. Nam verae voces tum demum pectore ab imo Eiciuntur,

    Lucr. 3, 58:

    tum demum Liscus, oratione Caesaris adductus, quod antea tacuerat proponit,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 17; 5, 33; Sall. J. 46, 1:

    nec ante in campum degressi sunt quam, etc. Tum demum castra Etruscorum pro moenibus Fidenarum posita,

    Liv. 4, 17, 12; 45, 12, 6; 2, 20, 11; 5, 39, 2; 23, 19, 15 et saep.; Val. Max. 1, 6, 10; 1, 7, 4; Curt. 3, 12, 12; Tac. A. 3, 18; 3, 47.—
    (β).
    In partic., referring to clauses introduced by cum, ubi, si, or abl. absol. (v. II. A. B. L. M.), denoting absolute restriction to the terms of the clause:

    imo etiam ubi expolivero, magis hoc tum demum dices,

    Plaut. Poen. 1, 1, 60:

    tum demum mihi procax Academia videbitur si aut consenserint omnes, aut, etc.,

    Cic. N. D. 1, 6, 13:

    cum is Casilini eo die mansurum dixisset, tum demum cognitus est error,

    Liv. 22, 13, 8; Vell. 2, 115, 4; Val. Max. 3, 8, 1 fin.; 7, 2, 4; Curt. 3, 11, 6; Plin. Ep. 8, 20, 7.—
    (γ).
    Sometimes = nunc demum (anteclass.): victus es, Chaline. St. Tum nos demum vivere. Olympio. Gaudeo, Plaut. Cas. 2, 6, 65.—
    b.
    Tum denique.
    (α).
    In gen.:

    tum denique tauros in gregem redigo,

    Varr. R. R. 2, 5:

    injecta glaeba tumulus is (locus) ubi humatus est vocatur, ac tum denique multa religiosa jura complectitur,

    Cic. Leg. 2, 22, 57; id. Fin. 3, 22, 76; id. Tusc. 3, 26, 61: nequiquam temptati ut tum denique desisterent impediendo bello, Liv. 4, 55, 5; Ov. M. 4, 519; 7, 857; 10, 664.—
    (β).
    Referring to clauses with cum, etc. (v. II. A. B. L. M.):

    tum denique homines nostra intellegimus bona quom quae in potestate habuimus ea amisimus,

    Plaut. Capt. 1, 2, 33:

    quo cum venerimus, tum denique vivemus,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 31, 75; 3, 31, 75; id. Leg. 2, 4, 10; id. Rep. 1, 6, 11; so,

    tum denique si,

    id. Fam. 14, 2, 3; id. Q. Fr. 1, 1, 10, § 29; id. Verr. 2, 2, 1, § 1:

    indicandum primum fuisse, dein petendum praesidium, postremo ni impetraretur, tum denique querendum,

    Liv. 23, 43, 2; Cato ap. Plin. 17, 18, 29, § 126 (for tum vero denique after ut, Cic. Phil. 9, 4, 9, v. II. D. 2. a).—
    3.
    Tum primum (rarely primo), then for the first time:

    tum genus humanum primum mollescere coepit,

    Lucr. 5, 1014:

    ludorum gratia quos tum primum anniversarios in circo facere constituisset,

    Cic. Rep. 2, 7, 12; id. Sen. 21, 78; Caes. B. G. 7, 11:

    ponte sublicio tum primum in Tiberi facto,

    Liv. 1, 33, 6; 2, 41, 3; 39, 22, 2; 2, 20, 6; 39, 49, 4; Vell. 2, 37, 5; Tac. A. 2, 27; id. H. 4, 57; Curt. 3, 12, 26. —
    4.
    With deinde, hic, postea, with consecutive force emphatic.
    a.
    Deinde tum (very rare):

    primum ea quae sumus acturi cogitare debemus, deinde tum dicere ac facere,

    Varr. L. L. 6, 6, 62.—
    b.
    Tum deinde.
    (α).
    = tum demum or tum denique, then at length, not till then, then only:

    nonne optime patronus occurrat prius conviciis luxuriae, etc., tum deinde narret de bonis Pallae? etc.,

    Quint. 4, 2, 27; 12, 10, 11:

    emam, aedificabo, credam, exigam, honores geram: tum deinde lassam senectutem in otium referam,

    Sen. Ep. 101, 4; Plin. 16, 44, 95, § 251.—So corresp. with cum:

    quas cum solus pertulisset, tum deinde comitia collegae subrogando habuit,

    Liv. 2, 8, 3 (Weissenb. demum, by conj.); Col. R. R. 1, 6, 13. —
    (β).
    = an emphatic deinde: nam praetermisit quod in prima parte sumere debuit;

    tum deinde eodem ipso quod omiserat quasi proposito ad confirmandum aliud utitur,

    Gell. 2, 8, 3; 13, 24 (23), 1; Just. 2, 1, 19.—
    c.
    With hic:

    hic tum repente Pacilius quidam accedit, ait, etc.,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 38, § 94:

    hic ego tum ad respondendum surrexi,

    id. Clu. 18, 51; 27, 73:

    hic tum injectus est hominibus scrupulus,

    id. ib. 28, 76; id. Sest. 11, 25.—
    d.
    Tum postea:

    tum postea complorantibus nostris, dies quidem tandem inluxit,

    Gell. 19, 1, 3; so id. 14, 3, 10 (for quid tum postea, v. D. 1.).—
    5.
    With interim:

    unum, alterum, tertium annum Sassia quiescebat... Tum interim, Q. Hortensio, Q. Metello coss.... despondet ei filiam suam,

    Cic. Clu. 64, 179.—
    B.
    With particles of emphasis.
    1.
    Tum vero (sometimes tum enimvero or enimvero tum), then indeed, at that crisis, then if not before, etc., or merely = emphatic then, denoting either coincidence or sequence of action.
    (α).
    In gen.:

    discedit a Melino Cluentia. Tum vero illa egregia mater palam exsultare... coepit,

    Cic. Clu. 5, 14; 22, 61; id. Agr. 1, 1, 3; id. Verr. 2, 5, 41, § 107:

    semper equidem magno cum metu incipio dicere... tum vero ita sum perturbatus ut, etc.,

    id. Clu. 18, 51:

    tum vero dubitandum non existimavit quin ad eos proficisceretur,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 8; 5, 37; id. B. C. 1, 82; 2, 42:

    Aruns Tarquinius et Tullia minor... junguntur nuptiis. Tum vero in dies infestior Tulli senectus... coepit esse,

    Liv. 1, 47, 1; 2, 22, 6; 4, 49, 13; 10, 19, 12; 21, 45, 9; 21, 58, 5; Ov. M. 2, 227; 7, 685; Curt. 4, 13, 1; 3, 11, 5; Tac. Agr. 37.—And in enumerations:

    deinde... post autem... tum vero ipsam veterem Karthaginem vendunt,

    Cic. Agr. 1, 2, 5.—
    (β).
    As correlative of temporal or conditional clauses, and after abl. absol.:

    quod ubi Romam est nuntiatum, senatui metum injecit ne tum vero sustineri nec in urbe seditio, nec in castris posset,

    Liv. 5, 7, 4; Sall. J. 94, 3:

    tum vero... si,

    Cic. Fin. 1, 19, 63; Liv. 6, 14, 4 (v. II. M. 1. a, b).—With cum, Liv. 32, 12, 1:

    quae postquam frustra temptata rogumque parari... vidit, Tum vero gemitus... Edidit,

    Ov. M. 2, 621; Sall. J. 106, 6; 84, 1; id. Cat. 51, 40; v. C. 1. b. (so, tum vero denique after ut, Cic. Phil. 9, 4, 9; v. II. D. 2. and M. 1.).—
    2.
    Tum quidem, at that time, thereupon, then at least (usu. opposed to a later time): dixit sibi in somnis visum esse, etc. Et tum quidem incolumis exercitum liberavit; post triennium autem devovit se, etc., Cic. Div. 1, 24, 51; so,

    actum quidem,

    id. Fl. 25, 59; id. Lael. 11, 39:

    et tum quidem ab Dio Perseus in interiora regni recepit se... post dies paucos, etc.,

    Liv. 42, 39, 1; 1, 57, 10; 3, 2, 10;

    7, 17, 3.—Often in resuming the narrative after a digression: ac tum quidem regem... filium appellat,

    Curt. 4, 7, 25.—Merely emphatic:

    Duillio Cornelioque coss. etiam mari congredi ausus est. Tum quidem ipsa velocitas classis comparatae victoriae auspicium fuit,

    Flor. 1, 18 (2, 2), 7; so id. 1, 22 (2, 6), 20; 1, 40 (3, 5), 12.—With cum, Tac. Dial. 11.—
    3.
    Ne tum quidem, not even then:

    num quis horum miser hodie? Ne tum quidem, post spiritum extremum,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 37, 89; id. Div. 1, 26, 55; id. Verr. 2, 2, 40, § 98:

    ubi ne tum quidem eos prodire intellexit,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 50; 7, 53; Tac. H. 5, 21; Curt. 3, 2, 18.—With cum:

    ille vere ne tum quidem miser cum ab Oroete in crucem actus est,

    Cic. Fin. 5, 30, 92; so id. Tusc. 5, 20, 57; id. Verr. 2, 5, 23, § 59; Liv. praef. 12; 39, 39, 11.—
    4.
    Tum maxime (sometimes tum cummaxime).
    (α).
    Especially at that time, chiefly then: illi sumposia, nos convivia quod tum maxime simul vivitur, Cic. Fam. 9, 24, 35; id. Leg. 2, 11, 26.—With cum:

    quae quidem vis tum maxime cognita est cum... M. Cato, legem suadens, in Galbam multa dixit,

    Cic. Brut. 23, 89; id. Sest. 21, 47; id. Par. 4, 1, 29.—
    (β).
    Just then, just at that moment (not ante-Aug.):

    regi, tum maxime captivos ex Illyrico vendenti,

    Liv. 43, 20, 3; 1, 10, 1:

    per totam aciem vulgatum est, castra amissa esse, et tum cummaxime ardere,

    id. 40, 32, 1; so,

    tum cummaxime,

    id. 43, 7, 8:

    corpus enim suum a caupone trucidatum tum maxime plaustro ad portam ferri,

    Val. Max. 1, 7, ext. 10; 2, 10, 2; 3, 2, 2 fin.; Curt. 3, 4, 14; 6, 6, 10; Plin. 2, 63, 63, § 154; Quint. 2, 15, 30; 2, 61, 31; Suet. Caes. 65; id. Calig. 53.—So with cum:

    et quod tum maxime Abydum oppugnaret cum rex ab Attalo et Rhodiis ultro se bello lacessitum diceret,

    Liv. 31, 18, 2; Sen. Ira, 1, 15, 2.—
    (γ).
    Strengthening the co-ordinate tum after cum, so especially; v. I. C. 3. e. b (for cum maxime... tum maxime and tum maxime... cum plurimum, v. II. A. 3. a. b.).—
    5.
    Tum potissimum = tum maxime, just then (rare):

    C. Caesar... tum potissimum acie commissa impeditos religione hostes vicit,

    Front. Strat. 2, 1, 16.—
    6.
    Etiam tum.
    (α).
    Even then:

    etiam tum vivit cum esse credas mortuam,

    Plaut. Pers. 3, 1, 28:

    totum se Servilio etiam tum tradidit,

    even then, at so late a time, Cic. Sest. 62, 130:

    etiam tum cum verisimile erit,

    id. Rosc. Am. 20, 57.— So with cum, Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 59, § 154; id. Dom. 13, 23; id. Sest. 38, 81.—
    (β).
    Still, as yet (also as one word; cf. etiamtum, and v. the foll. additional passages), Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 19, § 41; id. Fin. 3, 14, 48; id. Rep. 2, 12, 24; id. Arch. 3, 5; id. de Or. 2, 3, 12; id. Brut. 20, 80; id. Off. 2, 14, 47; Caes. B. C. 3, 93; Liv. 5, 40, 10; Val. Max. 9, 6, 3; Tac. A. 3, 72; Suet. Claud. 27 fin.; id. Dom. 22.—

    And with a negation, = nondum: ipsa ego non longos etiam tum scissa capillos,

    not yet long, Ov. H. 8, 79.—
    7.
    Tum etiam.
    (α).
    Followed by si or cum, even if, even when:

    atque equidem filium Tum etiam si nolit, cogam,

    Ter. Ad. 5, 3, 65:

    qui tum etiam cum... circumfusi erant caligine,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 19, 45.—
    (β).
    Then also, then too, besides:

    tum etiam illud cogitatote, sic vivere Cornelium ut, etc.,

    Cic. Balb. 28, 65; id. N. D. 1, 16, 43; so id. Leg. 1, 13, 35; id. Fin. 2, 16, 53; Col. 12 praef.—
    8.
    Tum quoque.
    (α).
    Also then, then likewise, then as before, then as on another occasion mentioned before: ceu lapidem si Percutiat lapis aut ferrum;

    nam tum quoque lumen Exsilit,

    Lucr. 6, 162:

    tum quoque homini plus tribui quam nescio cui necessitati,

    Cic. Prov. Cons. 11, 28:

    tum quoque multis milibus Latinorum in civitatem acceptis,

    Liv. 1, 33, 5; 2, 52, 2; 21, 22, 4; Caes. B. C. 3, 37; Ov. M. 14, 369.—
    (β).
    Even then, = etiam tum (rare):

    et tamen tum quoque se absentes triumphare credunt,

    Liv. 45, 38, 13; 39, 41, 3; 39, 47, 11; Ov. H. 17 (18), 190.—
    (γ).
    In orat. obliq. (v. I. A. 2.), even now:

    quod si Romani tum quoque aequa aspernarentur,

    Liv. 42, 62, 7. —
    (δ).
    = sic quoque, even under the circumstances, even as it was, etc. (v. sic, V. 3.): ut si effugium patuisset in publicum, impleturae urbem tumultu fuerint. Tum quoque [p. 1912] aliquotiens integro corpore evaserunt, Liv. 24, 26, 13; 40, 16, 6; 43, 4, 1;

    9, 13, 9: tum quoque, amputata dextra, navem sinistra comprehendit,

    Just. 2, 9, 18.—
    9.
    Tum ipsum = eo ipso tempore, at the very time, just then, even then (only in Cic. in four passages; cf.:

    nunc ipsum): tota igitur ratio talium largitionum vitiosa est, temporibus necessaria, et tum ipsum... moderanda est,

    Cic. Off. 2, 17, 60:

    quem quidem cum sua voluntate ex patria Karthaginem revertisset, tum ipsum cum vigiliis et fame cruciaretur, clamat virtus beatiorem fuisse quam Thorium,

    id. Fin. 2, 20, 65 Madv. ad loc.:

    tum ipsum cum immolare velis extorum fieri mutatio potest,

    id. Div. 1, 52, 118:

    ita (oratores), non injuria, quotienscunque dicerent, id quod aliquando posset accidere, ne tum ipsum accideret, timere,

    id. Or. 1, 27, 123.—
    C.
    Tum with co-ordinating particles.
    1.
    Tum autem.
    (α).
    = praeterea, and then, besides (v. I. C. 1.): turpilucricupidum te vocant cives tui;

    tum autem sunt alii qui te volturium vocant,

    Plaut. Trin. 1, 2, 64:

    oves scabrae sunt... Tum autem Surorum nemo exstat qui ibi sex menses vixerit,

    id. ib. 2, 4, 141; id. Mil. 4, 2, 13; id. Pers. 4, 2, 3; id. Poen. 5, 5, 34; 5, 7, 22; Ter. And. 1, 5, 34; id. Eun. 5, 9, 7; id. Hec. 2, 1, 14; 3, 2, 10:

    tum autem qui non ipso honesto movemur... callidi sumus, non boni,

    Cic. Leg. 1, 14, 41; id. Or. 1, 58, 247; 2, 19, 80.—
    (β).
    = tum... tum:

    visne igitur inter hos populos inambulantes, tum autem residentes quaeramus eisdem de rebus?

    Cic. Leg. 1, 5, 15.—
    (γ).
    = eo tempore, with autem as connective:

    tum illic autem Lemnius... uxorem duxit, etc.,

    Plaut. Cist. 1, 3, 25:

    tum autem ex omnibus montibus nives proluit,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 48.—
    (δ).
    But in this instance:

    uxori emunda ancilla'st: tum autem pluscula Supellectile opus est,

    Ter. Phorm. 4, 3, 60; 5, 7, 25 sq.—
    2.
    For tum etiam, v. B. 7. b.—
    3.
    Tum praeterea:

    nam tui similis est probe. Tum praeterea talem, nisi tu, nulla pareret filium,

    Ter. Heaut. 5, 3, 20; so id. Ad. 3, 2, 47; id. Phorm. 3, 2, 33; Cic. Verr. 1, 18, 56 (v. I. C. 3. e. l).—
    4.
    Tum porro:

    tum porro venti magnam quoque tollere partem Umoris possunt,

    Lucr. 6, 623; 4, 829 (827).—
    D.
    Quid tum?
    1.
    In dialogue, what then? what next? what further? novi ego hos pugnos meos. Ca. Quid tum? Th. Quid tum? Rogitas? Hisce ego, si tu me inritaveris, placidum te hodie reddam, Plaut. Curc. 5, 3, 49; so id. As. 2, 2, 83; Ter. Eun. 2, 2, 47; 3, 5, 66; id. Phorm. 3, 3, 8.—And strengthened:

    quid tum postea?

    Plaut. Trin. 3, 3, 41; id. As. 2, 2, 68; 2, 2, 79; Ter. Eun. 2, 3, 78; 4, 2, 9; 4, 7, 23; id. Ad. 4, 5, 15; id. Hec. 4, 1, 36: videsne abundare me otio? A. Quid tum? Cic. Tusc. 2, 11, 26.—
    2.
    In imitation of a dialogue:

    at mulctantur bonis exsules. Quid tum? Parumne multa de toleranda paupertate dicuntur?

    Cic. Tusc. 5, 37, 107; so id. Quint. 22, 72; 27, 84; id. Verr. 2, 4, 59, § 132; id. Dom. 47, 123; id. Dejot. 7, 22; id. Phil. 1, 10, 26; Hor. S. 2, 3, 230.—
    3.
    As emphatic co-ordinative in quoting the different items of a document, law, etc.: quive in senatu sententiam dixit, dixerit. Quid tum? Qui eorum coiit, coierit, etc., what next? i. e. and then, listen! Cic. Clu. 54, 148; so id. Agr. 1, 5, 16; 3, 3, 11; id. Mur. 12, 26; id. Fl. 23, 55.—
    E.
    Tum temporis = eo tempore (post class. and rare; cf.:

    tunc temporis): postera die civitas principem suum, ac tum temporis consulem in foro expectabat,

    Just. 31, 2, 6.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > tum

  • 17 succeed

    1. intransitive verb
    1) (achieve aim) Erfolg haben

    somebody succeeds in something — jemandem gelingt etwas; jemand schafft etwas

    somebody succeeds in doing something — es gelingt jemandem, etwas zu tun

    succeed in business/college — geschäftlich/im Studium erfolgreich sein

    I succeeded in passing the test — ich habe die Prüfung mit Erfolg od. erfolgreich abgelegt

    2) (come next) die Nachfolge antreten

    succeed to an office/the throne — die Nachfolge in einem Amt/die Thronfolge antreten

    succeed to a title/an estate — einen Titel/ein Gut erben

    2. transitive verb
    ablösen [Monarchen, Beamten]

    succeed somebody [in a post] — jemandes Nachfolge [in einem Amt] antreten

    * * *
    [sək'si:d]
    1) (to manage to do what one is trying to do; to achieve one's aim or purpose: He succeeded in persuading her to do it; He's happy to have succeeded in his chosen career; She tried three times to pass her driving-test, and at last succeeded; Our new teaching methods seem to be succeeding.) Erfolg haben
    2) (to follow next in order, and take the place of someone or something else: He succeeded his father as manager of the firm / as king; The cold summer was succeeded by a stormy autumn; If the duke has no children, who will succeed to (= inherit) his property?) nachfolgen
    •
    - academic.ru/71789/success">success
    - successful
    - successfully
    - succession
    - successive
    - successively
    - successor
    - in succession
    * * *
    suc·ceed
    [səkˈsi:d]
    I. vi
    1. (achieve purpose) Erfolg haben, erfolgreich sein
    ▪ to \succeed in sth mit etw dat Erfolg haben
    they \succeeded in their attempt ihr Versuch war ein Erfolg
    ▪ to \succeed in doing sth etw mit Erfolg tun
    they will only \succeed in making things worse damit erreichen sie nur, dass alles noch schlimmer wird
    with a single remark you've \succeeded in offending everyone ( iron) mit einer einzigen Bemerkung hast du es geschafft, alle vor den Kopf zu stoßen
    to \succeed in business geschäftlich erfolgreich sein
    to \succeed whatever the circumstances unter allen Umständen Erfolg haben
    the plan \succeeded der Plan ist gelungen
    2. (follow) nachfolgen, die Nachfolge antreten, Nachfolger/in werden
    ▪ to \succeed to sth die Nachfolge in etw dat antreten
    to \succeed to an office die Nachfolge in einem Amt antreten
    to \succeed to the throne die Thronfolge antreten
    to \succeed to [great] wealth [große] Reichtümer erben
    3.
    ▶ if at first you don't \succeed, try, try again ( prov) wirf die Flinte nicht gleich ins Korn fam
    II. vt
    ▪ to \succeed sb [as sth] jds Nachfolge [als etw] antreten
    to \succeed sb in office jds Amt übernehmen, jdm im Amt nachfolgen
    to \succeed sb in a post jds Stelle antreten
    * * *
    [sək'siːd]
    1. vi
    1) (= be successful person) erfolgreich sein, Erfolg haben; (plan etc) gelingen, erfolgreich sein

    to succeed in business/in a plan — geschäftlich/mit einem Plan erfolgreich sein

    I succeeded in doing it — es gelang mir, es zu tun

    you'll only succeed in making things worse —

    nothing succeeds like success (prov) — nichts ist so erfolgreich wie der Erfolg

    if at first you don't succeed(, try, try, try again) (Prov) — wirf die Flinte nicht gleich ins Korn (prov)

    2)

    (= come next) to succeed to an office — in einem Amt nachfolgen

    he succeeded to his father's position — er wurde (der) Nachfolger seines Vaters, er trat die Nachfolge seines Vaters an (geh)

    to succeed to the throne —

    2. vt
    (= come after, take the place of) folgen (+dat), folgen auf (+acc); (person also) Nachfolger(in) m(f) werden +gen

    to succeed sb in a post/in office — jds Nachfolger werden, jds Stelle/Amt (acc) übernehmen

    who succeeded James I? — wer kam nach or folgte auf Jakob I.?

    * * *
    succeed [səkˈsiːd]
    A v/i
    1. glücken, erfolgreich sein oder verlaufen, gelingen, Erfolg haben (Sache):
    nothing succeeds like success (Sprichwort) nichts ist so erfolgreich wie der Erfolg
    2. Erfolg haben, erfolgreich sein, sein Ziel erreichen (Person) (as als; in mit etwas; with bei jemandem):
    he succeeded in doing sth es gelang ihm, etwas zu tun;
    succeed in action JUR obsiegen;
    he succeeded very badly es gelang ihm sehr schlecht
    3. (to)
    a) Nachfolger werden (in einem Amt etc)
    b) erben (akk):
    succeed to the throne auf dem Thron folgen;
    succeed to sb’s rights in jemandes Rechte eintreten
    4. (to) (unmittelbar) folgen (dat oder auf akk), nachfolgen (dat)
    B v/t (nach)folgen (dat), folgen (dat oder auf akk), jemandes (Amts- oder Rechts)Nachfolger(in) werden, jemanden beerben:
    succeed sb in office jemandes Amt übernehmen
    * * *
    1. intransitive verb
    1) (achieve aim) Erfolg haben

    somebody succeeds in something — jemandem gelingt etwas; jemand schafft etwas

    somebody succeeds in doing something — es gelingt jemandem, etwas zu tun

    succeed in business/college — geschäftlich/im Studium erfolgreich sein

    2) (come next) die Nachfolge antreten

    succeed to an office/the throne — die Nachfolge in einem Amt/die Thronfolge antreten

    succeed to a title/an estate — einen Titel/ein Gut erben

    2. transitive verb
    ablösen [Monarchen, Beamten]

    succeed somebody [in a post] — jemandes Nachfolge [in einem Amt] antreten

    * * *
    v.
    Erfolg haben ausdr.
    folgen v.
    gelingen v.
    glücken v.

    English-german dictionary > succeed

  • 18 AT

    I) prep.
    A. with dative.
    I. Of motion;
    1) towards, against;
    Otkell laut at Skamkatli, bowed down to S.;
    hann sneri egginni at Ásgrími, turned the edge against A.;
    Brynjólfr gengr alit at honum, quite up to him;
    þeir kómust aldri at honum, they could never get near him, to close quarters with him;
    3) to, at;
    koma at landi, to come to land;
    ganga at dómi, to go into court;
    4) along (= eptir);
    ganga at stræti, to walk along the street;
    dreki er niðr fór at ánni (went down the river) fyrir strauminum;
    refr dró hörpu at ísi, on the ice;
    5) denoting hostility;
    renna (sœkja) at e-m, to rush at, assault;
    gerði þá at þeim þoku mikla, they were overtaken by a thick fog;
    6) around;
    vefja motri at höfði sér, to wrap a veil round one’s head;
    bera grjót at e-m, to heap stones upon the body;
    7) denoting business, engagement;
    ríða at hrossum, at sauðum, to go looking after horses, watching sheep;
    fara at landskuldum, to go collecting rents.
    II. Of position, &c.;
    1) denoting presence at, near, by, upon;
    at kirkju, at church;
    at dómi, in court;
    at lögbergi, at the hill of laws;
    2) denoting participation in;
    vera at veizlu, brullaupi, to be at a banquet, wedding;
    3) ellipt., vera at, to be about, to be busy at;
    kvalararnir, er at vóru at pína hann, who were tormenting him;
    var þar at kona nökkur at binda (was there busy dressing) sár manna;
    4) with proper names of places (farms);
    konungr at Danmörku ok Noregi, king of;
    biskup at Hólum, bishop of Holar;
    at Helgafelli, at Bergþórshváli;
    5) used ellipt. with a genitive, at (a person’s) house;
    at hans (at his house) gisti fjölmenni mikit;
    at Marðar, at Mara’s home;
    at hins beilaga Ólafs konungs, at St. Olave’s church;
    at Ránar, at Ran’s (abode).
    III. Of time;
    1) at, in;
    at upphafi, at first, in the beginning;
    at skilnaði, at parting, when they parted;
    at páskum, at Easter;
    at kveldi, at eventide;
    at fjöru, at the ebb;
    at flœðum, at the floodtide;
    2) adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr’;
    at ári komanda, next year;
    at vári, er kemr, next spring;
    generally with ‘komanda’ understood;
    at sumri, hausti, vetri, vári, next summer, &c.;
    3) used with an absolute dative and present or past part.;
    at sér lifanda, duing his lifetime;
    at öllum ásjándum, in the sight of all;
    at áheyranda höfðingjanum, in the hearing of the chief;
    at upprennandi sólu, at sunrise;
    at liðnum sex vikum, after six weeks are past;
    at honum önduðum, after his death;
    4) denoting uninterrupted succession, after;
    hverr at öðrum, annarr at öðrum, one after another;
    skildu menn at þessu, thereupon, after this;
    at því (thereafter) kómu aðrar meyjar.
    IV. fig. and in various uses;
    1) to, into, with the notion of destruction or change;
    brenna (borgina) at ösku, to burn to ashes;
    verða at ormi, to become a snake;
    2) for, as;
    gefa e-t at gjöf, as a present;
    eiga e-n at vin, to have one as friend;
    3) by;
    taka sverð at hjöltum, by the hilt;
    draga út björninn at hlustunum, by the ears;
    kjósa at afli, álitum, by strength, appearrance;
    auðigr at fé, wealthy in goods;
    vænn (fagr) at áliti, fair of face;
    5) as a law term, on the grounds of, by reason of;
    ryðja ( to challenge) dóm at mægðum, kvið at frændsemi;
    6) as a paraphrase of a genitive;
    faðir, móðir at barni (= barns, of a child);
    aðili at sök = aðili sakar;
    7) with adjectives denoting colour, size, age, of;
    hvítr, svartr, rauðr at lit, while, black, red of colour;
    mikill, lítill at stœrð, vexti, tall, small of stature;
    tvítugr at aldri, twenty years of age;
    kýr at fyrsta, öðrum kálfi, a cow that has calved once, twice;
    8) determining the source from which anything comes, of, from;
    Ari nam ok marga frœði at Þuríði (from her);
    þiggja, kaupa, geta, leigja e-t at e-m, to receive, buy, obtain, borrow a thing from one;
    hafa veg (virðing) styrk at e-m, to derive honour, power, from one;
    9) according, to, after (heygðr at fornum sið);
    at ráði allra vitrustu manna, by the advice of;
    at landslögum, by the law of the land;
    at leyfi e-s, by one’s leave;
    10) in adverbial phrases;
    gróa (vera grœddr) at heilu, to be quite healed;
    bíta af allt gras at snøggu, quite bare;
    at fullu, fully;
    at vísu, surely;
    at frjálsu, freely;
    at eilífu, for ever and ever;
    at röngu, at réttu, wrongly, rightly;
    at líku, at sömu, equally, all the same;
    at mun, at ráði, at marki, to a great extent.
    B. with acc., after, upon (= eptir);
    sonr á at taka arf at föður sinn, to take the inheritance after his father;
    at þat (= eptir þat), after that, thereafter;
    connected with a past part. or a., at Gamla fallinn, after the fall of Gamli;
    at Hrungni dauðan, upon the death of Hrungnir.
    1) as the simple mark of the infinitive, to;
    at ganga, at ríða, at hlaupa, to walk, to ride, to run;
    2) in an objective sense;
    hann bauð þeim at fara, sitja, he bade (ordered) them to go, sit;
    gefa e-m at eta, at drekka, to give one to eat, to drink;
    3) denoting design or purpose, in order to (hann gekk í borg at kaupa silfr).
    1) demonstrative particle before a comparative, the, all the, so much the;
    hón grét at meir, she wept the more;
    þykkir oss at líkara, all the more likely;
    þú ert maðr at verri (so much the worse), er þú hefir þetta mælt;
    2) rel. pron., who, which, that (= er);
    þeir allir, at þau tíðindi heyrðu, all those who heard;
    sem þeim er títt, at ( as is the custom of those who) kaupferðir reka.
    conj., that;
    1) introducing a subjective or objective clause;
    þat var einhverju sinni, at Höskuldr hafði vinaboð, it happened once that H.;
    vilda ek, at þú réðist austr í fjörðu, I should like you to go;
    2) relative to svá, denoting proportion, degree;
    svá mikill lagamaðr, at, so great a lawyer, that;
    3) with subj., denoting end or purpose, in order that (skáru þeir fyrir þá (viz. hestana) melinn, at þeir dœi eigi af sulti);
    4) since, because, as (= því at);
    5) connected with þó, því, svá;
    þó at (with subj.), though, although;
    því at, because, for;
    svá at, so that;
    6) temp., þá at (= þá er), when;
    þegar at (= þegar er), as soon as;
    þar til at (= þar til er), until, till;
    áðr at (= á. en), before;
    7) used superfluously after an int. pron. or adv.;
    Ólafr spurði, hvern styrk at hann mundi fá honum, what help he was likely to give him;
    in a relative sense; með fullkomnum ávexti, hverr at (which) þekkr ok þægiligr mun verða.
    V)
    negative verbal suffix, = ata; var-at, was not.
    odda at, Yggs at, battle.
    * * *
    1.
    and að, prep., often used ellipt. dropping the case and even merely as an adverb, [Lat. ad; Ulf. at = πρός and παρά, A. S. ät; Engl. at; Hel. ad = apud; O. H. G. az; lost in mod. Germ., and rare in Swed. and Dan.; in more freq. use in Engl. than any other kindred language, Icel. only excepted]:—the mod. pronunciation and spelling is að (aþ); this form is very old, and is found in Icel. vellum MSS. of the 12th century, e. g. aþ, 623. 60; yet in earlier times it was sounded with a tenuis, as we may infer from rhymes, e. g. jöfurr hyggi at | hve ek yrkja fat, Egill: Sighvat also makes it rhyme with a t. The verse by Thorodd—þar vastu at er fjáðr klæðið þvat (Skálda 162)—is hardly intelligible unless we accept the spelling with an aspirate (að), and say that þvað is = þvá = þváði, lavabat; it may be that by the time of Thorodd and Ari the pure old pronunciation was lost, or is ‘þvat’ simply the A. S. þvât, secuit? The Icelanders still, however, keep the tenuis in compounds before a vowel, or before h, v, or the liquids l, r, thus—atyrða, atorka, athöfn, athugi, athvarf, athlægi; atvinna, atvik; atlaga, atlíðanði ( slope), atriði, atreið, atróðr: but aðdjúpr, aðfinsla (critic), aðferð, aðkoma, aðsókn, aðsúgr (crowding), aðgæzla. In some words the pronunciation is irregular, e. g. atkvæði not aðkv-; atburðr, but aðbúnaðr; aðhjúkran not athjúkran; atgörvi not aðgörfi. At, to, towards; into; against; along, by; in regard to; after.
    Mostly with dat.; rarely with acc.; and sometimes ellipt.—by dropping the words ‘home,’ ‘house,’ or the like—with gen.
    WITH DAT.
    A. LOC.
    I. WITH MOTION; gener. the motion to the borders, limits of an object, and thus opp. to frá:
    1. towards, against, with or without the notion of arrival, esp. connected with verbs denoting motion (verba movendi et eundi), e. g. fara, ganga, koma, lúta, snúa, rétta at…; Otkell laut at Skamkatli, O. louted (i. e. bowed down) towards S., Nj. 77, Fms. xi. 102; sendimaðrinn sneri ( turned) hjöltum sverðsins at konungi, towards the king, i. 15; hann sneri egginni at Ásgrími, turned the edge towards A., Nj. 220; rétta e-t at e-m, to reach, hand over, Ld. 132; ganga at, to step towards, Ísl. ii. 259.
    2. denoting proximity, close up to, up to; Brynjólfr gengr … allt at honum, B. goes quite up to him, Nj. 58; Gunnarr kom þangat at þeim örunum, G. reached them even there with his arrows, 115; þeir kómust aldri at honum, they could never get near him, to close quarters, id.; reið maðr at þeim (up to them), 274; þeir höfðu rakit sporin allt at ( right up to) gammanum, Fms. i. 9; komu þeir at sjó fram, came down to the sea, Bárð. 180.
    3. without reference to the space traversed, to or at; koma at landi, to land, Ld. 38, Fms. viii. 358; ríða at dyrum, Boll. 344; hlaupa at e-m, to run up to, run at, Fms. vii. 218, viii. 358; af sjáfarganginum er hann gekk at landinu, of the surf dashing against the shore, xi. 6; vísa ólmum hundi at manni, to set a fierce hound at a man, Grág. ii. 118; leggja e-n at velli, to lay low, Eg. 426, Nj. 117; hníga at jörðu, at grasi, at moldu, to bite the dust, to die, Njarð. 378; ganga at dómi, a law term, to go into court, of a plaintiff, defendant, or bystander, Nj. 87 (freq.)
    4. denoting a motion along, into, upon; ganga at stræti, to walk along the street, Korm. 228, Fms. vii. 39; at ísi, on the ice, Skálda 198, Fms. vii. 19, 246, viii. 168, Eb. 112 new Ed. (á is perh. wrong); máttu menn ganga bar yfir at skipum einum, of ships alone used as a bridge, Fas. i. 378; at höfðum, at nám, to trample on the slain on the battle-field, Lex. Poët.; at ám, along the rivers; at merkiósum, at the river’s mouth, Grág. ii. 355; at endilöngu baki, all along its back, Sks. 100.
    5. denoting hostility, to rush at, assault; renna at, hlaupa at, ganga, fara, ríða, sækja, at e-m, (v. those words), whence the nouns atrenna, athlaup, atgangr, atför, atreið, atsókn, etc.
    β. metaph., kom at þeim svefnhöfgi, deep sleep fell on them, Nj. 104. Esp. of weather, in the impers. phrase, hríð, veðr, vind, storm görir at e-m, to be overtaken by a snow storm, gale, or the like; görði þá at þeim þoku mikla, they were overtaken by a thick fog, Bárð. 171.
    6. denoting around, of clothing or the like; bregða skikkju at höfði sér, to wrap his cloak over his head, Ld. 62; vefja motri at höfði sér, to wrap a snood round her head, 188; sauma at, to stick, cling close, as though sewn on; sauma at höndum sér, of tight gloves, Bs. i. 453; kyrtill svá þröngr sem saumaðr væri at honum, as though it were stitched to him, Nj. 214; vafit at vándum dreglum, tight laced with sorry tags, id.; hosa strengd fast at beini, of tight hose, Eg. 602; hann sveipar at sér iðrunum ok skyrtunni, he gathers up the entrails close to him and the skirt too, Gísl. 71; laz at síðu, a lace on the side, to keep the clothes tight, Eg. 602.
    β. of burying; bera grjót at einum, to heap stones upon the body, Eg. 719; var gör at þeim dys or grjóti, Ld. 152; gora kistu at líki, to make a coffin for a body, Eb. 264, Landn. 56, Ld. 142.
    γ. of summoning troops or followers; stefna at sér mönnum, to summon men to him, Nj. 104; stefna at sér liði, Eg. 270; kippa mönnum at sér, to gather men in haste, Ld. 64.
    7. denoting a business, engagement; ríða at hrossum, at sauðum, to go looking after after horses, watching sheep, Glúm. 362, Nj. 75; fara at fé, to go to seek for sheep, Ld. 240; fara at heyi, to go a-haymaking, Dropl. 10; at veiðum, a-hunting; at fuglum, a-fowling; at dýrum, a-sbooting; at fiski, a-fishing; at veiðiskap, Landn. 154, Orkn. 416 (in a verse), Nj. 25; fara at landskuldum, to go a-collecling rents, Eg. 516; at Finnkaupum, a-marketing with Finns, 41; at féföngum, a-plundering, Fms. vii. 78; ganga at beina, to wait on guests, Nj. 50; starfa at matseld, to serve at table, Eb. 266; hitta e-n at nauðsynjum, on matters of business; at máli, to speak with one, etc., Fms. xi. 101; rekast at e-m, to pursue one, ix. 404; ganga at liði sér, to go suing for help, Grág. ii. 384.
    β. of festivals; snúa, fá at blóti, veizlu, brullaupi, to prepare for a sacrificial banquet, wedding, or the like, hence at-fangadagr, Eb. 6, Ld. 70; koma at hendi, to happen, befall; ganga at sínu, to come by one’s own, to take it, Ld. 208; Egill drakk hvert full er at honum kom, drained every horn that came to him, Eg. 210; komast at keyptu, to purchase dearly, Húv. 46.
    8. denoting imaginary motion, esp. of places, cp. Lat. spectare, vergere ad…, to look or lie towards; horfði botninn at höfðanum, the bight of the bay looked toward the headland, Fms. i. 340, Landn. 35; also, skeiðgata liggr at læknum, leads to the brook, Ísl. ii. 339; á þann arminn er vissi at sjánum, on that wing which looked toward the sea, Fms. viii. 115; sár þau er horft höfðu at Knúti konungi, xi. 309.
    β. even connected with verbs denoting motion; Gilsáreyrr gengr austan at Fljótinu, G. extends, projects to F. from the east, Hrafh. 25; hjá sundi því, er at gengr þingstöðinni, Fms. xi. 85.
    II. WITHOUT MOTION; denoting presence at, near, by, at the side of, in, upon; connected with verbs like sitja, standa, vera…; at kirkju, at church, Fms. vii. 251, K. f). K. 16, Ld. 328, Ísl. ii. 270, Sks. 36; vera at skála, at húsi, to be in, at home, Landn. 154; at landi, Fms. i. 82; at skipi, on shipboard, Grág. i. 209, 215; at oldri, at a banquet, inter pocula; at áti, at dinner, at a feast, inter edendum, ii. 169, 170; at samförum ok samvistum, at public meetings, id.; at dómi, in a court; standa (to take one’s stand) norðan, sunnan, austan, vestan at dómi, freq. in the proceedings at trials in lawsuits, Nj.; at þingi, present at the parliament, Grág. i. 142; at lögbergi, o n the hill of laws, 17, Nj.; at baki e-m, at the back of.
    2. denoting presence, partaking in; sitja at mat, to sit at meat, Fms. i. 241; vera at veizlu, brullaupi, to be at a banquet, nuptials, Nj. 51, Ld. 70: a law term, vera at vígi, to be an accessory in manslaying, Nj. 89, 100; vera at e-u simply means to be about, be busy in, Fms. iv. 237; standa at máli, to stand by one in a case, Grág. ii. 165, Nj. 214; vera at fóstri, to be fostered, Fms. i. 2; sitja at hégóma, to listen to nonsense, Ld. 322; vera at smíð, to be at one’s work, Þórð. 62: now absol., vera at, to go on with, be busy at.
    3. the law term vinna eið at e-u has a double meaning:
    α. vinna eið at bók, at baugi, to make an oath upon the book by laying the band upon it, Landn. 258, Grág., Nj.; cp. Vkv. 31, Gkv. 3. 3, Hkv. 2. 29, etc.: ‘við’ is now used in this sense.
    β. to confirm a fact (or the like) by an oath, to swear to, Grág. i. 9, 327.
    γ. the law phrase, nefna vátta at e-u, of summoning witnesses to a deed, fact, or the like; nefna vátta at benjum, to produce evidence, witnesses as to the wounds, Nj., Grág.; at görð, Eg. 738; at svörum, Grág. i. 19: this summoning of witnesses served in old lawsuits the same purpose as modern pleadings and depositions; every step in a suit to be lawful must be followed by such a summoning or declaration.
    4. used ellipt., vera at, to be about, to be busy at; kvalararnir er at vóru at pína hann, who were tormenting him; þar varstu at, you were there present, Skálda 162; at várum þar, Gísl. (in a verse): as a law term ‘vera at’ means to be guilty, Glúm. 388; vartattu at þar, Eg. (in a verse); hence the ambiguity of Glum’s oath, vask at þar, I was there present: var þar at kona nokkur ( was there busy) at binda sár manna, Fms. v. 91; hann var at ok smíðaði skot, Rd. 313; voru Varbelgir at ( about) at taka af, þau lög …, Fms. ix. 512; ek var at ok vafk, I was about weaving, xi. 49; þeir höfðu verit at þrjú sumur, they had been busy at it for three summers, x. 186 (now very freq.); koma at, come in, to arrive unexpectedly; Gunnarr kom at í því, G. came in at that moment; hvaðan komtú nú at, whence did you come? Nj. 68, Fms. iii. 200.
    5. denoting the kingdom or residence of a king or princely person; konungr at Danmörk ok Noregi, king of…, Fms. i. 119, xi. 281; konungr, jarl, at öllum Noregi, king, earl, over all N., íb. 3, 13, Landn. 25; konungr at Dyflinni, king of Dublin, 25; but í or yfir England!, Eg. 263: cp. the phrase, sitja at landi, to reside, of a king when at home, Hkr. i. 34; at Joini, Fms. xi. 74: used of a bishop; biskup at Hólum, bishop of Hólar, Íb. 18, 19; but biskup í Skálaholti, 19: at Rómi, at Rome, Fbr. 198.
    6. in denoting a man’s abode (vide p. 5, col. 1, l. 27), the prep. ‘at’ is used where the local name implies the notion of by the side of, and is therefore esp. applied to words denoting a river, brook, rock, mountain, grove, or the like, and in some other instances, by, at, e. g. at Hofi (a temple), Landn. 198; at Borg ( a castle), 57; at Helgafelli (a mountain), Eb. constantly so; at Mosfelli, Landn. 190; at Hálsi (a hill), Fms. xi. 22; at Bjargi, Grett. 90; Hálsum, Landn. 143; at Á ( river), 296, 268; at Bægisá, 212; Giljá, 332; Myrká, 211; Vatnsá, id.; þverá, Glúm. 323; at Fossi (a ‘force’ or waterfall), Landn. 73; at Lækjamoti (waters-meeting), 332; at Hlíðarenda ( end of the lithe or hill), at Bergþórshváli, Nj.; at Lundi (a grove), at Melum (sandhill), Landn. 70: the prep. ‘á’ is now used in most of these cases, e. g. á Á, á Hofi, Helgafelli, Felli, Hálsi, etc.
    β. particularly, and without any regard to etymology, used of the abode of kings or princes, to reside at; at Uppsölum, at Haugi, Alreksstöðum, at Hlöðum, Landn., Fms.
    γ. konungr lét kalla at stofudyrum, the king made a call at the hall door, Eg. 88; þeir kölluðu at herberginu, they called at the inn, Fms. ix. 475.
    7. used ellipt. with a gen., esp. if connected with such words as gista, to be a guest, lodge, dine, sup (of festivals or the like) at one’s home; at Marðar, Nj. 4; at hans, 74; þingfesti at þess bóanda, Grág. i. 152; at sín, at one’s own home, Eg. 371, K. Þ. K. 62; hafa náttstað at Freyju, at the abode of goddess Freyja, Eg. 603; at Ránar, at Ran’s, i. e. at Ran’s house, of drowned men who belong to the queen of the sea, Ran, Eb. 274; at hins heilaga Ólafs konungs, at St. Olave’s church, Fms. vi. 63: cp. ad Veneris, εις Κίμωνος.
    B. TEMP.
    I. at, denoting a point or period of time; at upphafi, at first, in the beginning, Ld. 104; at lyktum, at síðustu, at lokum, at last; at lesti, at last, Lex. Poët., more freq. á lesti; at skilnaði, at parting, at last, Band. 3; at fornu, in times of yore, formerly, Eg. 267, D. I. i. 635; at sinni, as yet, at present; at nýju, anew, of present time; at eilífu, for ever and ever; at skömmu, soon, shortly, Ísl. ii. 272, v. l.
    II. of the very moment when anything happens, the beginning of a term; denoting the seasons of the year, months, weeks, the hours of the day; at Jólum, at Yule, Nj. 46; at Pálmadegi, on Palm Sunday, 273; at Páskum, at Easter; at Ólafsvöku, on St. Olave’s eve, 29th of July, Fms.; at vetri, at the beginning of the winter, on the day when winter sets in, Grág. 1. 151; at sumarmálum, at vetrnáttum; at Tvímánaði, when the Double month (August) begins, Ld. 256, Grág. i. 152; at kveldi, at eventide, Eg. 3; at því meli, at that time; at eindaga, at the term, 395; at eykð, at 4 o’clock p. m., 198; at öndverðri æfi Abra hams, Ver. II; at sinni, now at once, Fms. vi. 71; at öðruhverju, every now and then.
    β. where the point of time is marked by some event; at þingi, at the meeting of parliament (18th to the 24th of June), Ld. 182; at féránsdómi, at the court of execution, Grág. i. 132, 133; at þinglausnum, at the close of the parliament (beginning of July), 140; at festarmálum, eðr at eiginorði, at betrothal or nuptials, 174; at skilnaði, when they parted, Nj. 106 (above); at öllum minnum, at the general drinking of the toasts, Eg. 253; at fjöru, at the ebb; at flæðum, at flood tide, Fms. viii. 306, Orkn. 428; at hrörum, at an inquest, Grág. i. 50 (cp. ii. 141, 389); at sökum, at prosecutions, 30; at sinni, now, as yet, v. that word.
    III. ellipt., or adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr,’ of the future time:
    1. ellipt., komanda or the like being understood, with reference to the seasons of the year; at sumri, at vetri, at hausti, at vári, next summer, winter…, Ísl. ii. 242; at miðju sumri, at ári, at Midsummer, next year, Fas. i. 516; at miðjum vetri, Fms. iv. 237,
    2. adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr;’ at ári komanda, Bárð. 177; at vári er kemr, Dipl. iii. 6.
    IV. used with an absolute dat. and with a pres. part.:
    1. with pres. part.; at morni komanda, on the coming morrow, Fms. i. 263; at sér lifanda, in vivo, in his life time, Grág. ii. 202; at þeim sofundum, illis dormientibus, Hkr. i. 234; at öllum ásjándum, in the sight of all, Fms. x. 329; at úvitanda konungi, illo nesciente, without his knowledge, 227; at áheyranda höfðingjanum, in the chief’s bearing, 235.
    2. of past time with a past part. (Lat. abl. absol.); at hræjum fundnum, on the bodies being found, Grág. ii. 87; at háðum dómum ok föstu þingi, during the session, the courts being set, i. 484; at liðnum sex vikum, after six weeks past, Band. 13; at svá búnu, so goru, svá komnu, svá mæltu (Lat. quibus rebus gestis, dictis, quo facto, dicto, etc.), v. those words; at úreyndu, without trial, without put ting one to the test, Ld. 76; at honum önduðum, illo mortuo.
    3. ellipt. without ‘at;’ en þessum hlutum fram komnum, when all this has been done, Eb. 132.
    V. in some phrases with a slight temp, notion; at görðum gildum, the fences being strong, Gþl. 387; at vörmu spori, at once, whilst the trail is warm; at úvörum, unawares, suddenly, Nj. 95, Ld. 132; at þessu, at this cost, on that condition, Eb. 38, Nj. 55; at illum leiki, to have a narrow escape, now við illan leik, Fms. ix. 473; at því, that granted, Grág. ii. 33: at því, at pessu, thereafter, thereupon, Nj. 76.
    2. denoting succession, without interruption, one after another; hverr at öðrum, annarr maðr at öðrum, aðrir at öðrum; eina konu at annarri, Eg. 91, Fms. ii. 236, vi. 25, Bs. i. 22, 625. 80, H. E. i. 522.
    C. METAPH. and in various cases:
    I. denoting a transformation or change into, to, with the notion of destruction; brenna at ösku, at köldum kolum, to burn to ashes, to be quite destroyed, Fms. i. 105, Edda 3, Sturl. ii. 51: with the notion of transformation or transfiguration, in such phrases as, verða at e-u, göra e-t at e-u, to turn it into:
    α. by a spell; verða at ormi, to become a snake, Fms. xi. 158; at flugdrekum, Gullþ. 7; urðu þau bönd at járni, Edda 40.
    β. by a natural process it can often be translated by an acc. or by as; göra e-n at urðarmanni, to make him an outlaw, Eg. 728; græða e-n at orkumlamanni, to heal him so as to maim him for life, of bad treatment by a leech, Eb. 244: in the law terms, sár görist at ben, a wound turning into a ben, proving to be mortal, Grág., Nj.; verða at ljúgvætti, to prove to be a false evidence, Grág. i. 44; verða at sætt, to turn into reconciliation, Fms. i. 13; göra e-t at reiði málum, to take offence at, Fs. 20; at nýjum tíðindum, to tell as news, Nj. 14; verða fátt at orðum, to be sparing of words, 18; kveðr (svá) at orði, to speak, utter, 10; verða at þrifnaði, to geton well, Fms. vii. 196: at liði, at skaða, to be a help or hurt to one; at bana, to cause one’s death, Nj. 223, Eg. 21, Grág. ii. 29: at undrum, at hlátri, to become a wonder, a laughing-stock, 623. 35, Eg. 553.
    II. denoting capacity, where it may be translated merely by as or for; gefa at Jólagjöf, to give for a Christmas-box, Eg. 516; at gjöf, for a present; at erfð, at láni, launum, as an inheritance, a loan; at kaupum ok sökum, for buying and selling, Ísl. ii. 223, Grág. i. 423; at solum, ii. 204; at herfangi, as spoil or plunder; at sakbótum, at niðgjöldum, as a compensation, weregeld, i. 339, ii. 171, Hkr. ii. 168; taka at gíslingu, to take as an hostage, Edda 15; eiga e-n at vin, at óvin, to have one as friend or foe, illt er at eiga þræl at eingavin, ‘tis ill to have a thrall for one’s bosom friend (a proverb), Nj. 77; fæða, eiga, at sonum (syni), to beget a son, Edda 8, Bs. i. 60 (but eiga at dóttur cannot be said); hafa möttul at yfirhöfn, Fms. vii. 201; verða nökkut at manni (mönnum), to turn out to be a worthy man; verða ekki at manni, to turn out a worthless person, xi. 79, 268.
    2. in such phrases as, verða at orðum, to come towards, Nj. 26; var þat at erindum, Eg. 148; hafa at veizlum, to draw veizlur ( dues) from, Fms. iv. 275, Eg. 647; gora e-t at álitum, to take it into consideration, Nj. 3.
    III. denoting belonging to, fitting, of parts of the whole or the like; vóru at honum (viz. the sword) hjölt gullbúin, the sword was ornamented with a hilt of gold, Ld. 330; umgörð at ( belonging to) sverði, Fs. 97 (Hs.) in a verse; en ef mór er eigi at landinu, if there be no turf moor belonging to the land, Grág. ii. 338; svá at eigi brotnaði nokkuð at Orminum, so that no harm happened to the ship Worm, Fms. x. 356; hvatki er meiðir at skipinu eðr at reiðinu eðr at viðum, damage done t o …, Grág. ii. 403; lesta ( to injure) hús at lásum, við eðr torfi, 110; ef land hefir batnað at húsum, if the land has been bettered as to its buildings, 210; cp. the phrase, göra at e-u, to repair: hamlaðr at höndum eðr fótum, maimed as to hands or feet, Eg. 14; heill at höndum en hrumr at fótum, sound in band, palsied in foot, Fms. vii. 12; lykill at skrá, a key belonging, fitting, to the latch; hurð at húsi; a key ‘gengr at’ ( fits) skrá; and many other phrases. 2. denoting the part by which a thing is held or to which it belongs, by; fá, taka at…, to grasp by …; þú tókt við sverði hans at hjöltunum, you took it by the bill, Fms. i. 15; draga út björninn at hlustum, to pull out the bear by the ears, Fas. ii. 237; at fótum, by the feet, Fms. viii. 363; mæla ( to measure) at hrygg ok at jaðri, by the edge or middle of the stuff, Grág. i. 498; kasta e-m at höfði, head foremost, Nj. 84; kjósa e-n at fótum, by the feet alone, Edda 46; hefja frændsemi at bræðrum, eða at systkynum, to reckon kinship by the brother’s or the sister’s side, Grág. i. 28; kjósa at afli, at álitum, by strength, sight, Gs. 8, belongs rather to the following.
    IV. in respect of, as regards, in regard to, as to; auðigr at fé, wealthy of goods, Nj. 16, 30, 51; beztir hestar at reið, the best racehorses, 186; spekingr at viti, a man of great intellect, Ld. 124; vænn (fagr) at áliti, fair of face, Nj. 30, Bs. i. 61; kvenna vænst at ásjónu ok vits munum, of surpassing beauty and intellect, Ld. 122; fullkominn at hyggju, 18; um fram aðra menn at vinsældum ok harðfengi, of surpassing popularity and hardihood, Eb. 30.
    2. a law term, of challenging jurors, judges, or the like, on account of, by reason of; ryðja ( to challenge) at mægðum, guðsifjum, frændsemi, hrörum …; at leiðarlengd, on account of distance, Grág. i. 30, 50, Nj. (freq.)
    3. in arithm. denoting proportion; at helmingi, þriðjungi, fjórðungi, tíunda hluta, cp. Lat. ex asse, quadrante, for the half, third… part; máttr skal at magni (a proverb), might and main go together, Hkr. ii. 236; þú munt vera at því mikill fræðimaðr á kvæði, in the same proportion, as great, Fms. vi. 391, iii. 41; at e-s hluta, at… leiti, for one’s part, in turn, as far as one is con cerned, Grág. i. 322, Eg. 309, Fms. iii. 26 (freq.): at öðrum kosti, in the other case, otherwise (freq.) More gener., at öllu, öngu, in all (no) respects; at sumu, einhverju, nokkru, partly; at flestu, mestu, chiefly.
    4. as a paraphrase of a genitive; faðir, móðir at barni (= barns); aðili at sök (= sakar a.); morðingi at barni (= barns), faðerni at barni (barns); illvirki at fé manna (cp. Lat. felo de se), niðrfall at sökum (saka), land gangr at fiskum (fiska), Fms. iv. 274, Grág. i. 277, 416, N. G. L. i. 340, K. Þ. K. 112, Nj. 21.
    5. the phrase ‘at sér,’ of himself or in himself, either ellipt. or by adding the participle görr, and with the adverbs vel, ilia, or the like; denoting breeding, bearing, endowments, character …; væn kona, kurteis ok vel at sér, an accomplished, well-bred, gifted lady, Nj. I; vitr maðr ok vel at sér, a wise man and thoroughly good in feeling and bearing, 5; þú ert maðr vaskr ok vel at þér, 49; gerr at sér, accomplished, 51; bezt at sér görr, the finest, best bred man, 39, Ld. 124; en þó er hann svá vel at sér, so generous, Nj. 77; þeir höfðingjar er svá vóru vel at sér, so noble-minded, 198, Fms. i. 160: the phrase ‘at sér’ is now only used of knowledge, thus maðr vel að sér means clever, a man of great knowledge; illa að sér, a blockhead.
    6. denoting relations to colour, size, value, age, and the like; hvitr, svartr, grár, rauðr … at lit, white, swarthy, gray, red … of colour, Bjarn. 55, 28, Ísl. ii. 213, etc.; mikill, lítill, at stærð, vexti, tall, small of size, etc.; ungr, gamall, barn, at aldri, young, old, a child of age; tvítugr, þrítugr … at aldri, twenty, thirty … years of age (freq.): of animals; kyr at fyrsta, öðrum … kálfi, a cow having calved once, twice…, Jb. 346: value, amount, currency of money, kaupa e-t at mörk, at a mark, N. G. L. 1. 352; ok er eyririnn at mörk, amounts to a mark, of the value of money, Grág. i. 392; verðr þá at hálfri murk vaðmála eyrir, amounts to a half a mark, 500.
    β. metaph. of value, connected with verbs denoting to esteem, hold; meta, hafa, halda at miklu, litlu, vettugi, engu, or the like, to hold in high or low esteem, to care or not to care for (freq.): geta e-s at góðu, illu, öngu, to mention one favourably, unfavourably, indifferently … (freq.), prop. in connection with. In many cases it may be translated by in; ekki er mark at draumum, there is no meaning in dreams, no heed is to be paid to dreams, Sturl. ii. 217; bragð er at þá barnið finnr, it goes too far, when even a child takes offence (a proverb): hvat er at því, what does it mean? Nj. 11; hvert þat skip er vöxtr er at, any ship of mark, i. e. however small, Fms. xi. 20.
    V. denoting the source of a thing:
    1. source of infor mation, to learn, perceive, get information from; Ari nam ok marga fræði at Þuríði, learnt as her pupil, at her hands, as St. Paul at the feet of Gamaliel, (just as the Scotch say to speer or ask at a person); Ari nam at Þorgeiri afraðskoll, Hkr. (pref.); nema kunnáttu at e-m, used of a pupil, Fms. i. 8; nema fræði at e-m, xi. 396.
    2. of receiving, acquiring, buying, from; þiggja e-t at e-m, to receive a thing at his hands, Nj. 51; líf, to be pardoned, Fms. x. 173; kaupa land at e-m, to buy it from, Landn. 72, Íb. II, (now af is more freq. in this sense); geta e-t at e-m, to obtain, procure at one’s hands, impetrare; þeirra manna er þeir megu þat geta at, who are willing to do that, Grág. i. I; heimta e-t at e-m (now af), to call in, demand (a debt, money), 279; fala e-t at e-m (now af), to chaffer for or cheapen anything, Nj. 73; sækja e-t at e-m, to ask, seek for; sækja heilræði ok traust at e-m, 98; leiga e-t at e-m (now af), to borrow, Grág. ii. 334; eiga e-t (fé, skuld) at e-m, to be owed money by any one, i. 399: metaph. to deserve of one, Nj. 113; eiga mikit at e-m, to have much to do with, 138; hafa veg, virðing, styrk, at, to derive honour, power from, Fms. vi. 71, Eg. 44, Bárð. 174; gagn, to be of use, Ld. 216; mein, tálma, mischief, disadvantage, 158, 216, cp. Eg. 546; ótta, awe, Nj. 68.
    VI. denoting conformity, according to, Lat. secundum, ex, after; at fornum sið, Fms. i. 112; at sögn Ara prests, as Ari relates, on his authority, 55; at ráði allra vitrustu manna, at the advice of, Ísl. ii. 259, Ld. 62; at lögum, at landslögum, by the law of the land, Grág., Nj.; at líkindum, in all likelihood, Ld. 272; at sköpum, in due course (poet.); at hinum sama hætti, in the very same manner, Grág. i. 90; at vánum, as was to be expected, Nj. 255; at leyfi e-s, by one’s leave, Eg. 35; úlofi, Grág. ii. 215; at ósk, vilja e-s, as one likes…; at mun, id. (poet.); at sólu, happily (following the course of the sun), Bs. i. 70, 137; at því sem …, as to infer from …, Nj. 124: ‘fara, láta, ganga at’ denotes to yield, agree to, to comply with, give in, Ld. 168, Eg. 18, Fms. x. 368.
    VII. in phrases nearly or quite adverbial; gróa, vera græddr, at heilu, to be quite healed, Bárð. 167, Eb. 148; bíta at snöggu, to bite it bare, Fms. xi. 6; at þurru, till it becomes dry, Eb. 276; at endilöngu, all along, Fas. ii; vinnast at litlu, to avail little, 655 x. 14; at fullu, fully, Nj. 257, Hkr. i. 171; at vísu, of a surety, surely, Ld. 40; at frjálsu, freely, 308; at líku, at sömu, equally, all the same, Hom. 80, Nj. 267; at röngu, wrongly, 686 B. 2; at hófi, temperately, Lex. Poët.; at mun, at ráði, at marki, to a great extent; at hringum, utterly, all round, (rare), Fms. x. 389; at einu, yet, Orkn. 358; svá at einu, því at einu, allt at einu, yet, however, nevertheless.
    VIII. connected with comparatives of adverbs and adjectives, and strengthening the sense, as in Engl. ‘the,’ so much the more, all the more; ‘at’ heldr tveimr, at ek munda gjarna veita yðr öllum, where it may be translated by so much the more to two, as I would willingly grant it to all of you; hon grét at meir, she grat (wept) the more, Eg. 483; þykir oss at líkara, all the more likely, Fms. viii. 6; þess at harðari, all the harder, Sturl. iii. 202 C; svá at hinn sé bana at nær, Grág. ii. 117; at auðnara, at hólpnara, the more happy, Al. 19, Grett. 116 B; þess at meiri, Fms. v. 64; auvirðismaðr at meiri, Sturl. ii. 139; maðr at vaskari, id.; at feigri, any the more fey, Km. 22; maðr at verri, all the worse, Nj. 168; ok er ‘at’ firr…, at ek vil miklu heldr, cp. Lat. tantum abest… ut, Eg. 60.
    β. following after a negation; eigi at síðr, no less, Nj. 160, Ld. 146; eigi… at meiri maðr, any better, Eg. 425, 489; erat héra at borgnara, any the better off for that, Fms. vii. 116; eigi at minni, no less for that, Edda (pref.) 146; eigi at minna, Ld. 216, Fms. ix. 50; ekki at verri drengr, not a bit worse for that, Ld. 42; er mér ekki son minn at bættari, þótt…, 216; at eigi vissi at nær, any more, Fas. iii. 74.
    IX. following many words:
    1. verbs, esp. those denoting, a. to ask, enquire, attend, seek, e. g. spyrja at, to speer (ask) for; leita at, to seek for; gæta, geyma at, to pay attention to; huga, hyggja at; hence atspurn, to enquire, aðgæzla, athugi, attention, etc.
    β. verbs denoting laughter, play, joy, game, cp. the Engl. to play at …, to laugh at …; hlæja, brosa at e-u, to laugh, smile at it; leika (sér) at e-u, to play at; þykja gaman at, to enjoy; hæða, göra gys at …, to make sport at …
    γ. verbs denoting assistance, help; standa, veita, vinna, hjálpa at; hence atstoð, atvinna, atverk:—mode, proceeding; fara at, to proceed, hence atför and atferli:—compliance; láta, fara at e-u, v. above:— fault; e-t er at e-u, there is some fault in it, Fms. x. 418; skorta at e-u, to fall short of, xi. 98:—care, attendance; hjúkra at, hlýja at, v. these words:—gathering, collecting; draga, reiða, flytja, fá at, congerere:—engagement, arrival, etc.; sækja at, to attack; ganga at, vera at, to be about; koma at, ellipt. to arrive: göra at, to repair: lesta at, to impair (v. above); finna at, to criticise (mod.); telja at, id.: bera at, to happen; kveða at e-m, to address one, 625. 15, (kveða at (ellipt.) now means to pronounce, and of a child to utter (read) whole syllables); falla at, of the flood-tide (ellipt.): metaph. of pains or straits surrounding one; þreyngja, herða at, to press hard: of frost and cold, with regard to the seasons; frjósa at, kólna at, to get really cold (SI. 44), as it were from the cold stiffening all things: also of the seasons themselves; hausta, vetra að, when the season really sets in; esp. the cold seasons, ‘sumra at’ cannot be used, yet we may say ‘vára að’ when the spring sets in, and the air gets mild.
    δ. in numberless other cases which may partly be seen below.
    2. connected ellipt. with adverbs denoting motion from a place; norðan, austan, sunnan, vestan at, those from the north, east…; utan at, innan at, from the outside or inside.
    3. with adjectives (but rarely), e. g. kærr, elskr, virkr (affectionate), vandr (zealous), at e-m; v. these words.
    WITH ACC.
    TEMP.: Lat. post, after, upon, esp. freq. in poetry, but rare in prose writers, who use eptir; nema reisi niðr at nið (= maðr eptir mann), in succession, of erecting a monument, Hm. 71; in prose, at þat. posthac, deinde, Fms. x. 323, cp. Rm., where it occurs several times, 2, 6, 9, 14, 18, 24, 28, 30, 35; sonr á at taka arf at föður sinn, has to take the inheritance after his father, Grág. i. 170 new Ed.; eiga féránsdóm at e-n, Grág. i. 89; at Gamla fallinn, after the death of G., Fms. x. 382; in Edda (Gl.) 113 ought to be restored, grét ok at Oð, gulli Freyja, she grat (wept) tears of gold for her lost husband Od. It is doubtful if it is ever used in a purely loc. sense; at land, Grág. (Sb.)ii. 211, is probably corrupt; at hönd = á hönd, Grág. (Sb.) i. 135; at mót = at móti, v. this word.
    ☞ In compounds (v. below) at- or að- answers in turn to Lat. ad- or in- or con-; atdráttr e. g. denotes collecting; atkoma is adventus: it may also answer to Lat. ob-, in atburðr = accidence, but might also be compared with Lat. occurrere.
    2.
    and að, the mark of the infinitive [cp. Goth. du; A. S. and Engl. to; Germ. zu]. Except in the case of a few verbs ‘at’ is always placed immediately before the infinitive, so as to be almost an inseparable part of the verb.
    I. it is used either,
    1. as, a simple mark of the infinitive, only denoting an action and independent of the subject, e. g. at ganga, at hlaupa, at vita, to go, to run, to know; or,
    2. in an objective sense when following such verbs as bjóða segja…, to invite, command …; hann bauð þeim at ganga, at sitja, be bade, ordered them to go, sit, or the like; or as gefa and fá; gefa e-m at drekka, at eta, to give one to drink or to eat, etc. etc.
    β. with the additional notion of intention, esp. when following verba cogitandi; hann ætlaði, hafði í hyggju at fara, he had it in his mind to go (where ‘to go’ is the real object to ætlaði and hafði í hyggju).
    3. answering to the Gr. ινα, denoting intention, design, in order to; hann gékk í borg at kaupa silfr, in order to buy, Nj. 280; hann sendi riddara sína með þeim at varðveita þær, 623. 45: in order to make the phrase more plain, ‘svá’ and ‘til’ are frequently added, esp. in mod. writers, ‘svá at’ and contr. ‘svát’ (the last however is rare), ‘til at’ and ‘til þess at,’ etc.
    II. in the earlier times the infin., as in Greek and Lat., had no such mark; and some verbs remain that cannot be followed by ‘at;’ these verbs are almost the same in Icel. as in Engl.:
    α. the auxiliary verbs vil, mun ( μέλλω), skal; as in Engl. to is never used after the auxiliaries shall, will, must; ek vil ganga, I will go; ek mun fara, (as in North. E.) I mun go; ek skal göra þat, I shall do that, etc.
    β. the verbs kunna, mega, as in Engl. I can or may do, I dare say; svá hygginn at hann kunni fyrir sökum ráða, Grág. ii. 75; í öllu er prýða má góðan höfðingja, Nj. 90; vera má, it may be; vera kann þat, id.: kunnu, however, takes ‘at’ whenever it means to know, and esp. in common language in phrases such as, það kann að vera, but vera kann þat, v. above.
    γ. lata, biðja, as in Engl. to let, to bid; hann lét (bað) þá fara, he let (bade) them go.
    δ. þykkja, þykjast, to seem; hann þykir vera, he is thought to be: reflex., hann þykist vera, sibi videtur: impers., mér þykir vera, mibi videtur, in all cases without ‘at.’ So also freq. the verbs hugsa, hyggja, ætla, halda, to think, when denoting merely the act of thinking; but if there be any notion of intention or purpose, they assume the ‘at;’ thus hann ætlaði, hugði, þá vera góða menn, he thought them to be, acc. c. inf.; but ætlaði at fara, meant to go, etc.
    ε. the verbs denoting to see, bear; sjá, líta, horfa á … ( videre); heyra, audire, as in Engl. I saw them come, I heard him tell, ek sá þá koma, ek heyrði hann tala.
    ζ. sometimes after the verbs eiga and ganga; hann gékk steikja, be went to roast, Vkv. 9; eiga, esp. when a mere periphrasis instead of skal, móður sína á maðr fyrst fram færa (better at færa), Grág. i. 232; á þann kvið einskis meta, 59; but at meta, id. l. 24; ráða, nema, göra …, freq. in poetry, when they are used as simple auxiliary verbs, e. g. nam hann sér Högna hvetja at rúnum, Skv. 3. 43.
    η. hljóta and verða, when used in the sense of must (as in Engl. he must go), and when placed after the infin.of another verb; hér muntu vera hljóta, Nj. 129; but hljóta at vera: fara hlýtr þú, Fms. 1. 159; but þú hlýtr at fara: verða vita, ii. 146; but verða at vita: hann man verða sækja, þó verðr (= skal) maðr eptir mann lifa, Fms. viii. 19, Fas. ii. 552, are exceptional cases.
    θ. in poetry, verbs with the verbal neg. suffix ‘-at,’ freq. for the case of euphony, take no mark of the infinitive, where it would be indispensable with the simple verb, vide Lex. Poët. Exceptional cases; hvárt sem hann vill ‘at’ verja þá sök, eða, whatever he chooses, either, Grág. i. 64; fyrr viljum vér enga kórónu at bera, en nokkut ófrelsi á oss at taka, we would rather bear no crown than …, Fms. x. 12; the context is peculiar, and the ‘at’ purposely added. It may be left out ellipt.; e. g. þá er guð gefr oss finnast (= at finnast), Dipl. ii. 14; gef honum drekka (= at drekka), Pr. 470; but mostly in unclassical writers, in deeds, or the like, written nastily and in an abrupt style.
    3.
    and að, conj. [Goth. þatei = οτι; A. S. þät; Engl. that; Germ, dass; the Ormul. and Scot. at, see the quotations sub voce in Jamieson; in all South-Teutonic idioms with an initial dental: the Scandinavian idioms form an exception, having all dropped this consonant; Swed. åt, Dan. at]. In Icel. the Bible translation (of the 16th century) was chiefly based upon that of Luther; the hymns and the great bulk of theol. translations of that time were also derived from Germany; therefore the germanised form það frequently appears in the Bible, and was often employed by theol. authors in sermons since the time of the Reformation. Jón Vidalin, the greatest modern Icel. preacher, who died in 1720, in spite of his thoroughly classical style, abounds in the use of this form; but it never took root in the language, and has never passed into the spoken dialect. After a relative or demonstr. pronoun, it freq. in mod. writers assumes the form eð, hver eð, hverir eð, hvað eð, þar eð. Before the prep. þú (tu), þ changes into t, and is spelt in a single word attú, which is freq. in some MS.;—now, however, pronounced aððú, aððeir, aððið …, = að þú…, with the soft Engl. th sound. It gener. answers to Lat. ut, or to the relat. pron. qui.
    I. that, relative to svá, to denote proportion, degree, so…, that, Lat. tam, tantus, tot…, ut; svá mikill lagamaðr, at…, so great a lawyer, that…, Nj. 1; hárið svá mikit, at þat…, 2; svá kom um síðir því máli, at Sigvaldi, it came so far, that…, Fms. xi. 95, Edda 33. Rarely and unclass., ellipt. without svá; Bæringr var til seinn eptir honum, at hann … (= svá at), Bær. 15; hlífði honum, at hann sakaði ekki, Fas. iii. 441.
    II. it is used,
    1. with indic, in a narrative sense, answering partly to Gr. οτι, Lat. quod, ut, in such phrases as, it came to pass, happened that …; þat var einhverju sinni, at Höskuldr hafði vinaboð, Nj. 2; þat var á palmdrottinsdag, at Ólafr konungr gékk út um stræti, Fms. ii. 244.
    2. with subj. answering to Lat. acc. with infin., to mark the relation of an object to the chief verb, e. g. vilda ek at þú réðist, I wished that you would, Nj. 57.
    β. or in an oblique sentence, answering to ita ut…; ef svá kann verða at þeir láti…, if it may be so that they might…, Fms. xi. 94.
    γ. with a subj. denoting design, answering to ϊνα or Lat. ut with subj., in order that; at öll veraldar bygðin viti, ut sciat totus orbis, Stj.; þeir skáru fyrir þá melinn, at þeir dæi eigi af sulti, ut ne fame perirent, Nj. 265; fyrsti hlutr bókarinnar er Kristindómsbálkr, at menn skili, in order that men may understand, Gþl. p. viii.
    III. used in connection with conjunctions,
    1. esp. þó, því, svá; þó at freq. contr. þótt; svát is rare and obsolete.
    α. þóat, þótt (North. E. ‘thof’), followed by a subjunctive, though, although, Lat. etsi, quamquam (very freq.); þóat nokkurum mönnum sýnist þetta með freku sett… þá viljum vér, Fms. vi. 21: phrases as, gef þú mér þó at úverðugri, etsi indignae (dat.), Stj. MS. col. 315, are unclass., and influenced by the Latin: sometimes ellipt. without ‘þó,’ eigi mundi hón þá meir hvata göngu sinni, at (= þóat) hon hraeddist bana sinn, Edda 7, Nj. 64: ‘þó’ and ‘at’ separated, svarar hann þó rétt, at hann svari svá, Grág. i. 23; þó er rétt at nýta, at hann sé fyrr skorinn, answering to Engl. yet—though, Lat. attamen —etsi, K. Þ. K.
    β. því at, because, Lat. nam, quia, with indic.; því at allir vóru gerfiligir synir hans, Ld. 68; því at af íþróttum verðr maðr fróðr, Sks. 16: separated, því þegi ek, at ek undrumst, Fms. iii. 201; því er þessa getið, at þat þótti, it i s mentioned because …, Ld. 68.
    γ. svá at, so that, Lat. ut, ita ut; grátrinn kom upp, svá at eingi mátti öðrum segja, Edda 37: separated, so … that, svá úsvúst at …, so bad weather, that, Bs. i. 339, etc.
    2. it is freq. used superfluously, esp. after relatives; hver at = hverr, quis; því at = því, igitur; hverr at þekkr ok þægiligr mun verða, Fms. v. 159; hvern stvrk at hann mundi fá, 44; ek undrumst hvé mikil ógnarraust at liggr í þér, iii. 201; því at ek mátti eigi þar vera elligar, því at þar var kristni vel haldin, Fas. i. 340.
    IV. as a relat. conj.:
    1. temp, when, Lat. quum; jafnan er ( est) mér þá verra er ( quum) ek fer á braut þaðan, en þá at ( quum) ek kem, Grett. 150 A; þar til at vér vitum, till we know, Fms. v. 52; þá at ek lýsta (= þá er), when, Nj. 233.
    2. since, because; ek færi yðr (hann), at þér eruð í einum hrepp allir, because of your being all of the same Rape, Grág. i. 260; eigi er kynlegt at ( though) Skarphéðinn sé hraustr, at þat er mælt at…, because (since) it is a saying that…, Nj. 64.
    V. in mod. writers it is also freq. superfluously joined to the conjunctions, ef að = ef, si, (Lv. 45 is from a paper MS.), meðan að = meðan, dum; nema að, nisi; fyrst að = fyrst, quoniam; eptir að, síðan að, postquam; hvárt að = hvárt, Lat. an. In the law we find passages such as, þá er um er dæmt eina sök, at þá eigu þeir aptr at ganga í dóminn, Grág. i. 79; ef þing ber á hina helgu viku, at þat á eigi fyrir þeim málum at standa, 106; þat er ok, at þeir skulu reifa mál manna, 64; at þeir skulu með váttorð þá sök sækja, 65: in all these cases ‘at’ is either superfluous or, which is more likely, of an ellipt. nature, ‘the law decrees’ or ‘it is decreed’ being understood. The passages Sks. 551, 552, 568, 718 B, at lokit (= at ek hefi lokit), at hugleitt (= at ek hefi h.), at sent (= at ek hefi sent) are quite exceptional.
    4.
    and að, an indecl. relat. pronoun [Ulf. þatei = ος, ος αν, οστις, οσπερ, οιος, etc.; Engl. that, Ormul. at], with the initial letter dropped, as in the conj. at, (cp. also the Old Engl. at, which is both a conj. and a pronoun, e. g. Barbour vi. 24 in Jamieson: ‘I drede that his gret wassalage, | And his travail may bring till end, | That at men quhilc full litil wend.’ | ‘His mestyr speryt quhat tithings a t he saw.’—Wyntoun v. 3. 89.) In Icel. ‘er’ (the relat. pronoun) and ‘at’ are used indifferently, so that where one MS. reads ‘er,’ another reads ‘at,’ and vice versâ; this may easily be seen by looking at the MSS.; yet as a rule ‘er’ is much more freq. used. In mod. writers ‘at’ is freq. turned into ‘eð,’ esp. as a superfluous particle after the relative pron. hverr (hver eð, hvað eð, hverir eð, etc.), or the demonstr. sá (sá eð, þeir eð, hinir eð, etc.):—who, which, that, enn bezta grip at ( which) hafði til Íslands komið, Ld. 202; en engi mun sá at ( cui) minnisamara mun vera, 242; sem blótnaut at ( quae) stærst verða, Fms. iii. 214; þau tiðendi, at mér þætti verri, Nj. 64, etc. etc.
    5.
    n. collision (poët.); odda at, crossing of spears, crash of spears, Höfuðl. 8.
    β. a fight or bait of wild animals, esp. of horses, v. hesta-at and etja.
    6.
    the negative verbal suffix, v. -a.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > AT

  • 19 droit

    I.
    droit1, e1 [dʀwa, dʀwat]
    1. adjective
    2. masculine noun
    3. feminine noun
    • le tiroir/chemin de droite the right-hand drawer/path
    • garder or tenir sa droite to keep to the right
    • candidat/idées de droite right-wing candidate/ideas
    II.
    droit2, e2 [dʀwa, dʀwat]
    1. adjective
       a. ( = sans déviation, non courbe) [barre, ligne, route, nez] straight
       b. ( = vertical, non penché) [arbre, mur] straight
    • être or se tenir droit comme un i to stand bolt upright
       c. ( = honnête, loyal) [personne] upright
    2. feminine noun
    droite ( = ligne) straight line
    3. adverb
    [viser, couper, marcher] straight
    • aller/marcher droit devant soi to go/walk straight ahead
    • aller droit au but or au fait to go straight to the point
    III.
    droit3 [dʀwa]
    1. masculine noun
       a. ( = prérogative) right
    • droit de pêche/chasse fishing/hunting rights
    • droit du sang/du sol right to nationality based on parentage/on place of birth
    • avoir le droit de faire qch (simple permission, possibilité) to be allowed to do sth ; (autorisation juridique) to have the right to do sth
    • avoir droit de regard sur [+ documents] to have the right to examine ; [+ affaires, décision] to have a say in
    • de quel droit est-il entré ? what right did he have to come in?
       b. (Law) le droit law
    • droit civil/pénal civil/criminal law
       c. ( = taxe) droit d'entrée entrance fee
    • droits d'inscription/d'enregistrement enrolment/registration fee
    ► droit d'auteur ( = propriété artistique, littéraire) copyright
    • droits d'auteur ( = rémunération) royalties ► droit de cité
    • avoir droit de cité parmi/dans to be established among/in ► droits civils civil rights
    • condamné/délit de droit commun common law criminal/crime ► droits de douane customs duties
    • « tous droits (de reproduction) réservés » "all rights reserved" ► droits de succession inheritance tax
    * * *

    1.
    droite dʀwɑ, ɑt adjectif
    1) (pas courbe, pas tordu) [ligne, route, barre, cheveux, mur, nez] straight; ( pas penché) [écriture] up-and-down

    se tenir droit — ( debout) to stand up straight; ( assis) to sit up straight

    s'écarter du droit chemin — fig to stray from the straight and narrow

    3) ( honnête) [personne] straight, upright; [vie] blameless
    4) ( sensé) [jugement] sound
    5) ( en couture) [jupe] straight; [veste] single-breasted
    6) Mathématique [cône, angle, prisme] right

    2.
    adverbe [aller, rouler] straight

    aller droit au but or fait — fig to go straight to the point

    ça m'est allé droit au cœur — fig it really touched me

    marcher or filer (colloq) droit — fig to toe the line

    venir tout droit de — [expression, citation] to come straight out of [auteur, œuvre]


    3.
    nom masculin
    1) ( prérogative) right

    avoir des droits sur quelqu'un/quelque chose — to have rights over somebody/something

    avoir droit à — to have the right to [liberté, nationalité]; to be entitled to [bourse, indemnité]

    il a eu droit à une amende — iron he got a fine

    avoir le droit de faire — ( la permission) to be allowed to do; (selon la morale, la justice) to have the right to do

    à bon droit — [se plaindre] with good reason

    ‘à qui de droit’ — ‘to whom it may concern’

    j'en parlerai à qui de droit — (colloq) I'll speak to the appropriate person

    faire droit à — to grant [requête]

    3) ( redevance) fee
    4) ( en boxe) right

    crochet/uppercut du droit — right hook/uppercut

    •
    Phrasal Verbs:
    ••

    se tenir droit comme un i or un piquet — to hold oneself very erect

    * * *
    dʀwa droit, -e
    1. adj
    1) (= non courbe) straight
    2) (= loyal, franc) upright, straight
    3) (= opposé à gauche) right
    2. adv
    3. nm
    1) (= prérogative) right

    On n'a pas le droit de fumer à l'école. — We're not allowed to smoke at school.

    être en droit de — to have a right to, to have the right to

    à bon droit (= justement) — with good reason

    See:
    2) (= lois, sujet)
    See:
    3) (= poing)
    4) (= taxe) duty, tax, [inscription] fee
    4. droits nmpl
    1) (= prérogatives) rights
    See:
    2) (= somme d'argent)
    See:
    5. nf
    1) (= ligne) straight line
    2) BOXE (= coup) right
    3) (= opposé à gauche) right

    à droite (position) — on the right, (direction) right, to the right

    4) POLITIQUE right, right wing
    * * *
    A adj
    1 (pas courbe, pas tordu) [ligne, route, barre, cheveux, mur, tour, nez] straight; ( pas penché) [cône, cylindre, prisme] right; [écriture] up-and-down; le tableau n'est pas droit the picture isn't straight; se tenir droit ( debout) to stand up straight; ( assis) to sit up straight; tenir qch droit to hold sth straight; le droit chemin fig the straight and narrow; s'écarter du droit chemin to stray from the straight and narrow; descendre en droite ligne de to be a direct descendant of;
    2 ( contraire de gauche) right; le côté droit the right side; du côté droit on the right(-hand) side;
    3 ( honnête) [personne] straight, upright; [vie] blameless;
    4 ( sensé) [jugement] sound;
    5 Mode [jupe] straight; [veste] single-breasted;
    6 Math right.
    B adv [aller, rouler] straight; droit devant straight ahead; se diriger droit vers to make straight for, to make a beeline for○; la voiture venait droit sur nous the car was coming straight at us; continuez tout droit carry straight on; file tout droit à la maison go straight home; aller droit au but or fait fig to go straight to the point; aller droit à la catastrophe to be heading straight for disaster; ça m'est allé droit au cœur fig it really touched me; marcher droit lit to walk straight; marcher or filer○ droit to toe the line; regarder qn droit dans les yeux to look sb straight in the eye; venir tout droit de [expression, citation] to come straight out of [auteur, œuvre]; je reviens tout droit de chez elle/de l'exposition I've come straight from her place/the exhibition.
    C nm
    1 ( prérogative) right; connaître/faire valoir ses droits to know/assert one's rights; avoir des droits sur qn/qch to have rights over sb/sth; de quel droit est-ce que tu me juges? what gives you the right to judge me?; être dans son (bon) droit, avoir le droit pour soi or de son côté to be within one's rights; de (plein) droit by right(s); de droit divin [monarque, monarchie] by divine right; cela leur revient de droit it's theirs by right; c'est tout à fait ton droit you have every right to do so, you're perfectly entitled to do so; avoir droit à to have the right to [liberté, nationalité]; to be entitled to, to be eligible for [bourse, indemnité]; vous avez droit à une boisson chacun you're allowed one drink each; les spectateurs ont eu droit à un beau match the spectators were treated to a fine game; on a eu droit à ses souvenirs de régiment iron he treated us to stories about his army days; il a eu droit à une amende iron he got a fine; avoir le droit de faire ( la permission) to be allowed to do; (selon la morale, la justice) to have the right to do; elle n'a pas le droit de sortir le soir she isn't allowed to go out at night; j'ai quand même le droit de poser une question! iron I suppose I am allowed to ask a question?; j'ai le droit de savoir I've got a right to know; elle n'a pas le droit de me juger/d'exiger ça de moi she has no right to judge me/to demand that of me; avoir le droit de vie ou de mort sur qn to have (the) power of life and death over sb; il s'imagine qu'il a tous les droits he thinks he can do whatever he likes; être en droit de to be entitled to; on est en droit de se demander si… we are entitled ou we have every right to wonder if…; ça te donne droit à… it entitles you to…; à bon droit [se plaindre, protester] with good reason; ‘à qui de droit’ ‘to whom it may concern’; j'en parlerai à qui de droit○ I'll speak to the appropriate person; faire droit à to grant [demande, requête];
    2 Jur ( ensemble de lois) law; le droit français/anglais French/English law; faire son droit to study law; étudiant en droit law student;
    3 ( redevance) fee; acquitter/percevoir un droit to pay/receive a fee; droit d'inscription registration fee; passible de droit dutiable;
    4 ( en boxe) right; direct du droit straight right; crochet/uppercut du droit right hook/uppercut.
    D droite nf
    1 ( opposé à gauche) la droite the right; la porte de droite the door on the right; être/rouler à droite to be/to drive on the right; tourner à droite to turn right; tenir sa droite Aut to keep (to the) right; à ta droite, sur ta droite on your right; à droite de to the right of; deuxième couloir à droite second corridor on the right; il ne connaît pas sa droite de sa gauche he can't tell (his) right from (his) left; demander à droite et à gauche ( partout) to ask everywhere ou all over the place; ( à tous) to ask everybody; être critiqué de droite et de gauche to be criticized from all sides ou by everybody;
    2 Pol right; voter à droite to vote for the right; de droite [parti, personne, gouvernement] right-wing; être à or de droite to be right-wing;
    3 Math straight line.
    droit administratif administrative law; droit aérien Jur air law; droit des affaires Jur company law GB, corporate law US; droit d'aînesse Jur birthright, primogeniture; droit d'antenne broadcasting right; droit d'asile Pol right of asylum; droit au bail right to the lease; droit canon Jur canon law; droit de cité Jur (right of) citizenship; fig acceptance; acquérir droit de cité fig to gain acceptance; avoir droit de cité to be accepted; donner droit de cité à to accept; droit civil Jur civil law; droit commercial commercial law; droit commun ( prisonnier) nonpolitical; de droit commun [prisonnier] nonpolitical, ordinary; [[taux, régime] ordinary; droit constitutionnel Jur constitutional law; droit coutumier Jur common law; droit écrit Jur statute law; droit d'entrée Comm, Fisc import duty; ( pour une personne) entrance fee; droit d'étalage Comm, Fisc stallage; droit fil Cout straight grain; fig main line; dans le droit fil de fig in line with; droit fiscal Jur tax law; droit de grâce Jur right of reprieve; droit de grève Pol right to strike; droit immobilier Jur property law; droit international Jur international law; droit maritime Jur maritime law; droit de passage Jur right of way GB, easement US; droit pénal Jur criminal law; droit de port Fisc port dues; droit de poursuite Jur right of action; droit de préemption right of preemption; droit privé Jur private law; droit de propriété right of possession; droit public Jur public law; droit de recours Jur right of appeal; droit de regard Fin right of inspection; gén avoir droit de regard sur to have a say in; droit de réponse right of reply; droit de rétention lien; droit du sang right to citizenship by virtue of kinship; droit social Jur labourGB law; droit du sol right to citizenship by virtue of birth in a country; droit de timbre Fisc stamp duty; droit du travail Jur labourGB law; droit d'usage Jur customary right; droit de veto right of veto; droit de visite Jur right of access; droit de vote Pol right to vote; droits d'auteur Édition royalties; droits civiques Pol civil rights; droits de douane Comm, Fisc customs duties; les droits de l'homme human rights; droits de quai Fisc wharfage; droits de reproduction reproduction rights; tous droits de reproduction réservés all rights reserved; droits de succession Fisc inheritance tax; droits de tirage spéciaux, DTS Fisc special drawing rights, SDR.
    se tenir droit comme un i or un piquet to hold oneself very erect ou upright.
    I
    ( féminin droite) [drwa, drwat] adjectif
    1. [rectiligne - allée, bâton, nez] straight
    2. [vertical, non penché - mur] upright, straight, plumb (terme spécialisé) ; [ - dossier, poteau] upright, straight
    être ou se tenir droit
    droit comme un cierge ou un i ou un piquet (as) stiff as a poker ou a ramrod ou a post
    3. [d'aplomb] straight
    4. [loyal - personne] upright, honest
    5. [sensé - raisonnement] sound, sane
    6. [vêtement]
    manteau/veston droit single-breasted coat/jacket
    ————————
    adverbe
    [couper, rouler] straight (adverbe)
    après le carrefour, c'est toujours tout droit after the crossroads, keep going straight on ou ahead
    aller droit à: j'irai droit au but I'll come straight to the point, I won't beat about the bush
    aller droit à la catastrophe/l'échec to be heading straight for disaster/a failure
    ————————
    droite nom féminin
    II
    ( féminin droite) [drwa, drwat] adjectif
    [ailier, jambe, œil] right
    ————————
    nom masculin
    ————————
    droite nom féminin
    1. [côté droit]
    la droite the right (side), the right-hand side
    ————————
    à droite locution adverbiale
    1. [du côté droit]
    à droite et à gauche (figuré) here and there, hither and thither (littéraire & humoristique), all over the place
    à droite, droite! right wheel!
    ————————
    à droite de locution prépositionnelle
    to ou on the right of
    ————————
    de droite locution adjectivale
    1. [du côté droit]
    la porte de droite the door on the right, the right-hand door
    les gens de droite rightwingers, people on the right
    [drwa] nom masculin
    le droit [lois, discipline] law
    avoir le droit pour soi to have right ou the law on one's side
    droit civil/commercial/constitutionnel civil/commercial/constitutional law
    droit commun ou coutumier common law
    droit privé/public private/public law
    2. [prérogative particulière] right
    dans cette entreprise, le droit de cuissage est monnaie courante sexual harassment is very common in this company
    droit de voirietax paid by businesses who wish to place displays, signs etc. on the public highway
    le droit de vote (the) franchise, the right to vote
    avoir droit de cité [idéologie] to be established, to have currency
    ils se croient tous les droits, ces gens-là! these people think they can do what they like!
    3. [autorisation sociale ou morale] right
    de quel droit l'a-t-il lue? what gave him the right to read it?, what right had he to read it?
    être en droit de faire to be entitled ou to have the right to do
    reprendre ses droits [idée, habitude, nature] to reassert itself
    a. [explications] to be entitled to
    b. [bourse, indemnité] to be entitled to, to be eligible for
    c. [reconnaissance, respect] to deserve
    a. [comptabilité, dossier] to have the right to examine ou to inspect
    a. [généralement] to be allowed ou to have the right to do
    b. [officiellement] to have the right ou to be entitled to do
    j'ai bien le droit de me reposer! I'm entitled to some rest, aren't I?
    4. [impôt, taxe] duty, tax
    5. [frais] fee
    dans mon/son (bon) droit within my/his rights
    de (plein) droit by rights, as a right
    ————————
    droits nom masculin pluriel
    1. droit
    a. [prérogative] rights, copyright
    b. [somme] royalties

    Dictionnaire Français-Anglais > droit

  • 20 tum

        tum adv., of time    [3 TA-].—Of time past, then, at that time, in those times: placuit tum id mihi, T.: qui tum vexare cupiebant: vastae tum in his locis solitudines erant, L.: Caere, opulento tum oppido, L.: tum Staienus condemnatus est, i. e. in that trial.—In emphatic opposition to other advv. of time: tu nunc tibi Id laudi ducis quod tum fecisti inopiā? T.: quae tabula, tum imperio tuo revolsa, nunc a me tamen deportata est: Et tum sicca, prius creberrima fontibus, Ide, O.—Of time present (only in orat. obliq., for nunc), now, at this time, then: quando autem se, si tum non sint, pares hostibus fore? if they were not now so, L.—Of time future, then, in that case, if that be done, thereupon: Tum meae... Vocis accedet bona pars, H.: confer sudantes, ructantes... tum intelleges, etc.: agedum, dictatorem creemus... Pulset tum mihi lictorem, qui sciet, etc., L.—Of time indefinite, then, at such a time, in such circumstances, in this instance, if so: nam quid agimus, cum sevocamus animum?... quid, inquam, tum agimus, nisi, etc.?—Repeated, tum... tum, sometimes... sometimes, now... now, at one time... at another: tum hoc mihi probabilius, tum illud videtur: dictator tum appellare tum adhortari milites, L.—Of succession in time, then, thereupon, next, afterwards, forthwith: conlocari iussit hominem in aureo lecto... Tum ad mensam eximiā formā pueros iussit consistere: tum, prope iam perculsis aliis tribunis, A. Virginius Caesoni capitis diem dicit, L.—In a series, repeated, or with other advv. or conjj. varying the expression: ducem Hannibali unum e concilio datum (a Iove), tum ei ducem illum praecepisse ne respiceret, illum autem respexisse, tum visam beluam vastam, etc.: tum... alias... tum... alias: tum... tum... aliquando: tum... tum... aut... aut: modo... tum autem.—Fig., of succession in thought, and then, besides, also, moreover, again, further, on the other hand: Quot me censes homines iam deverberasse, Hospites tum civīs? as well as, T.: faciendum est igitur nobis ut... veteranorum, tum legionis Martiae quartaeque consensus... confirmetur.—After a general clause with cum, introducing a particular or emphatic assertion: cum... tum, as... so, while... also, not only... but also, as... so especially: Quom id mihi placebat, tum uno ore omnes omnia Bona dicere, T.: cum omnium rerum simulatio vitiosa est, tum amicitiae repugnat maxime: movet patres conscriptos cum causa tum auctor, L.—Cum, followed by tum vero, tum maxime, tum praecipue or tum inprimis, while... in particular, not only... but especially, while... above all, not only... but chiefly: cum haec sunt videnda, tum vero illud est hominis magni, etc.: cum infamia atque indignitas rei impediebat, tum maxime quod, etc., Cs.: cum multa non probo, tum illud inprimis quod, etc.— Cum, followed by tum certe, tum nimirum, tum etiam, tum quoque or tum praeterea, while... at least, as... so assuredly, both... and as well, not only... but moreover: at cum de plurimis eadem dicit, tum certe de maximis: cum memoriter, tum etiam amice, etc.: cum potestas maior, tum vir quoque potestati par, etc., L.—Referring to a temporal clause, with cum.—Of coincidence of definite time, tum... cum, or cum... tum, at the time when, at a time when, even when, already when: tum, quom gratum mihi esse potuit, nolui, T.: cum minime videbamur, tum maxime philosophabamur: tum mittendos legatos fuisse cum Perseus Graecas urbes obsideret, L.—Of succession in time, then, next, at once, forthwith: id cum Sulla fecisset, tum ante oppidum Nolam Samnitium castra cepit: cum muros defensoribus nudasset, tum Afros ad subruendum murum mittit, L.—Of indefinite time, tum... cum, or cum... tum, at the time when, at a time when, at such times as, whenever: omnis praedictio mali tum probatur cum ad praedictionem cautio adiungitur: tum cum sine pondere suci Mobilibus ventis arida facta volant, O.—With ubi, of succession in time, then, next, at once, forthwith: ubi eorum dolorem cognovi, tum meum animum in illos proposui: ubi spectaculi tempus venit, tum orta vis, L.—Of indefinite time, ubi... tum, whenever: Post ubi tempust promissa iam perfici, Tum coacti necessario se aperiunt, T.—With postquam or postea quam, of succession in definite time, then, at once: tum vero postquam res sociorum ante oculos prope suos ferri vidit, suum id dedecus ratus, etc., L.: posteaquam e portu piratae exierunt, tum coeperunt quaerere homines, etc., as soon as.—In indefinite time, then, always: postquam commoditas prava dicendi copiam consecuta est, tum malitia praevertere urbīs adsuevit.—With ut, ut... tum, or tum... ut, when, after, as soon as: ut vero accessit cohortatio... tum vero filium seduxit: ut vero aquam ingressi sunt, tum utique egressis rigere corpora, L.—With quando, tum... quando, or quando... tum, when, as soon as: utinam tum essem natus quando Romani dona accipere coepissent.—With dum, then, meanwhile: dum se glomerant... tum pondere turris Procubuit, V.—With quam diu, then, so long: qui, quam tibi amicus non modo tum fuerit quam diu tecum in provinciā fuit, verum, etc.—With a relative, then, at that time: Quā tempestate Paris Helenam innuptis iunxit nuptiis, Ego tum gravida expletis iam fui ad pariendum mensibus, C. poët.—With an abl absol., then, thereafter, at once: ut morte eius nuntiatā tum denique bellum confectum arbitraretur: ita rebus divinis peractis tum de bello dictator rettulit, L.—Fig., in a conclusion after cum or si, then, therefore, consequently, in that case: cum magnus numerus deesset, tum iste homo coepit, etc.: quid tum quaeso, si hoc pater resciverit? T.: Si quidem me amaret, tum istuc prodesset, T. —In particular phrases, iam tum, already at that time, as soon as that: iam tum erat suspitio Dolo malo haec fieri, T.: ut mihi iam tum divinasse ille videatur hanc urbem esse, etc.—Tum demum or tum denique, then only, then at length, then at last, not till then, as late as that: tum demum Liscus, quod antea tacuerat, proponit, Cs.: quo cum venerimus, tum denique vivemus.—Tum primum, tum primo, or tum deinde, then first, then for the first time, not till then: ludorum gratiā, quos tum primum anniversarios in circo facere constituisset: tum primo, L.: quas cum solus pertulisset, tum deinde comitia conlegae subrogando habuit, L.— Hic tum, at this point, just here, just then: hic tum iniectus est hominibus scrupulus.—With emphatic particles, tum vero, tum enim vero, or enim vero tum, then indeed, just then, at that crisis, then if not before, then: discedit a Melino Cluentia. tum vero illa egregia mater palum exsultare... coepit: Quae postquam frustra temptata rogumque parari... Sensit, Tum vero gemitūs... Edidit, O.—Tum quidem, at that time, thereupon, then at least: et tum quidem incolumis exercitum liberavit; post triennium autem, etc.—Ne tum quidem, not even then: num quis horum miser hodie? ne tum quidem, post spiritum extremum.—Tum maxime or tum cum maxime, especially at that time, chiefly then, just then, precisely at that time: quem provincia tum maxime exspectabat: regi, tum maxime captivos ex Illyrico vendenti, at that very time, L.—Etiam tum, even then, even at that time, even already, even yet: totum se Servilio etiam tum tradidit: Ipsa ego non longos etiam tum scissa capillos, not yet long, O.—Tum quoque, also then, then likewise, then as before, then too, then once more, even then: tum quoque homini plus tribui quam necessitati: tum quoque multis milibus Latinorum in civitatem acceptis, L.—Tum autem, and then, besides further, moreover, nay even, statim se ad hominis egentis, tum autem iudicis, familiaritatem se applicavit: tanta enim tempestas cooritur... tum autem nives proluit, etc., Cs.— Tum ipsum, at that very time, just then, even then: id quod aliquando posset accidere, ne tum ipsum accideret, timere.—Quid tum? what then? what next? what further?: dic; cras est mihi Iudicium. quid tum? T.: videsne abundare me otio? A. quid tum?
    * * *
    then, next; besides; at that time

    cum...tum -- not only...but also

    Latin-English dictionary > tum

Страницы

См. также в других словарях:

  • Line of succession to the Saudi Arabian throne — Saudi Arabia This article is part of the series: Politics and government of Saudi Arabia …   Wikipedia

  • The Masque of Mandragora — 086 – The Masque of Mandragora Doctor Who serial The Brethren of Demnos commune with the Mandragora Helix Cast …   Wikipedia

  • SUCCESSION — SUCCESSION, devolution of the deceased person s property on his legal heirs. Order of Succession The Pentateuchal source of the order of succession is If a man die and have no son, then ye shall cause his inheritance to pass unto his daughter.… …   Encyclopedia of Judaism

  • Post-Soviet states — The post Soviet states, also commonly known as the Former Soviet Union (FSU) [1][2][3] or former Soviet republics, are the 15 independent states that split off from the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics in its dissolution in December 1991. They …   Wikipedia

  • The United States of America —     The United States of America     † Catholic Encyclopedia ► The United States of America     BOUNDARIES AND AREA     On the east the boundary is formed by the St. Croix River and an arbitrary line to the St. John, and on the north by the… …   Catholic encyclopedia

  • The Carmelite Order —     The Carmelite Order     † Catholic Encyclopedia ► The Carmelite Order     One of the mendicant orders.     Origin     The date of the foundation of the Order of Our Lady of Mount Carmel has been under discussion from the fourteenth century to …   Catholic encyclopedia

  • The Church —     The Church     † Catholic Encyclopedia ► The Church     The term church (Anglo Saxon, cirice, circe; Modern German, Kirche; Sw., Kyrka) is the name employed in the Teutonic languages to render the Greek ekklesia (ecclesia), the term by which… …   Catholic encyclopedia

  • The Blueprint 3 — Studio album by Jay Z Released September 8, 2009 …   Wikipedia

  • The Riordans — was the second Irish soap opera made by Radio Telefís Éireann (then called Telefís Éireann ). It ran from 1965 to 1979 and was set in the fictional townland of Leestown in County Kilkenny. Its use of Outside Broadcast Units and its filming of its …   Wikipedia

  • The Clash of Civilizations — and the Remaking of World Order   …   Wikipedia

  • Succession —    The mechanics of the succession to the throne are never indicated in Egyptian sources. It is generally assumed that the eldest son of the king by his queen was the likely successor, but a more ambitious and politically competent son by a minor …   Ancient Egypt

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»